Molded Case Circuit Breaker

Size: px

Start display at page:

Download "Molded Case Circuit Breaker"

Erika Allen
5 years ago
Views:

1 & The Ultimate Safety Breaker Molded Case Circuit Breaker Catalogue No. 13!5E

2 ! Safety Notice Carefully read instruction manual to ensure proper installation, connection, operation, handling and maintenance of the product.

3 TABLE OF CONTENTS 1. General 1-1 Features 1- Selection Chart1-. Ratings and Specifications -1 Molded Case Circuit Breakers zeconomical series - xstandard series -3 chigh-fault level series - vcurrent limiting series- bmotor protection series-10 nswitch-disconnectors -11 mnon-automatic trip breakers -13,TB series for distribution boards-1.current limiting series (planned to be released) - 0List of breakers for marine use and rated breaking capacities (approved by ship classification societies) Selection 3-1 zcombination of breakers for cascade breaking 3-. Special Breakers -1 zinstantaneous trip only breakers - 5. Mounting and Connection 5-1 ztype of connections and mountings 5- xcompression terminals 5-1 cterminal screw sizes and standard torques 5-1 vinsulation distance from the line side5-0 breverse connection 5- nlists of breaker mounting screws 5-3. Accessories -1 zocr for electronic breakers - 1. TemBreak Electronic OCR -. TemBreak Electronic OCR - xinternally mounted accessories Overview -10. Connection diagrams and terminal numbers Possible combinations -1. Ratings and operation data of auxiliary and alarm switches- 5. Shunt trip device (SHT) -1. Undervoltage trip device (UVT) -17 xselection of breakers for selectivity coordination 3- xspecial instantaneous trip breakers-3 cexternally mounted accessories-0 1. Overview -0. Toggle extension (HA) Toggle holder (HH) and toggle lock () -. Motor operators (MC) - 5. External operating handles - (1) Breaker-mounted (field installable)(hb) - () Breaker-mounted (HB) -3 (3) Door-mounted (depth adjustable) (HP) -3 () Door-mounted (depth fixed) (HP) -55. Terminal covers CF/CR/CS-5 (1) CF for front-connected breakers -5 () CR for rear-connected and plug-in breakers CS for front-connected breakers with cable clamps Interpole barriers (BA) -0. Terminal blocks (TF) Mechanical interlock- Slide interlock (MS) Door Flange (DF) Characteristics and Outline Dimensions Handling and maintenance -1 ztransportation and storage - xenvironmental operating conditions- cinstallation and connection - vmaintenance and inspection - 9. Appendix 9-1 zhandle operation and dimensions 9- xmounting positions for trip button 9-3 cstandard arrangement for plug-in type auxiliary circuit terminals (for high-performance type) 9- vstandard arrangement for plug-in type auxiliary circuit terminals (for standard type) 9-5 binternal resistance and power consumptions of breakers 9-9

Germanischer Lloyd Bureau Veritas China Classification Society Korean Register of Shipping Registro

5 1 General 1 General Features 1- Selection Chart 1- Approvals by ship classification societies NK LR ABS GL BV CCS KR RINA NIPPON KAIJI KYOKAI Lloyd s Register of Shipping The American Bureau of Shipping Germanischer Lloyd Bureau Veritas China Classification Society Korean Register of Shipping Registro Italiano Navale Based Standards IEC 097- EN 097- International Electrotechnical Commission European Standard 1-1

Safety Breaker Tem Isolation capability The isolation capability means that, as long as the main contact is closed, the toggle is not in the OFF position and cannot be locked at the OFF position.

6 Safety Breaker Tem Isolation capability The isolation capability means that, as long as the main contact is closed, the toggle is not in the OFF position and cannot be locked at the OFF position. The toggle being in the OFF position hence shows the main contact is open and personnel are not exposed to electrical shock hazard when working in the load side. Main contact closed Not in the OFF position Cannot be locked OFF Tem Direct Opening Action Under the heading Measures to minimize the risk in the event of failure, IEC 00-1 Safety of Machinery-Electrical Equipment of Machinery includes the following recommendation: -the use of switching devices having positive (or direct) opening operation. Tem Safety lock for Plug-in versions There are three plug-in types available according to applications, [For switchboards] Standard type Suitable for angle-mounted or rear-connected application High-performance type Suitable for angle-mounted, front panel-mounted or rear panelmounted application. The plug-in MCCB is locked to the base when the toggle is ON. It cannot be removed unless the toggle is OFF or TRIPPED. The safety lock prevents a trip occurring as the MCCB is being removed from the base. Opening force is transmitted directly from the toggle switch. DIRECT OPENING ACTION [For distribution boards] Suitable for front-connected application where the breaker depth is smaller than for switchboards Tem Enhanced Insulation The risk of touching live parts has been minimized by design. If the toggle is broken by accident or misuse, no live part is exposed. Double Insulation 1-

Hi-Technology Tem Rated service short-circuit breaking capacity (I cs

maximum short-circuit current defined by IEC 097- which a circuit

capacity, thereby providing more safety.

/ I cs =5/13kA I cu / I cs =5/5kA I cu I cs I cu I cs TemBreak Tem

switchboards TemBreak current limiting breakers are reduced in size to

7 Hi-Technology Tem Rated service short-circuit breaking capacity (I cs ) The rated service short-circuit breaking capacity (I cs ) is the maximum short-circuit current defined by IEC 097- which a circuit breaker can break in accordance with a sequence of opening and closing operations (O-CO-CO). TemBreak has greatly been improved in its rated service short-circuit capacity, thereby providing more safety. [5AF Standard series] 1 General Rated breaking capacity 5kA 13kA I cu / I cs =5/13kA I cu / I cs =5/5kA I cu I cs I cu I cs TemBreak Tem Smaller size and higher breaking capacity, allowing a downsizing of switchboards TemBreak current limiting breakers are reduced in size to at least one-half and enhanced in breaking capacity. Smaller in size than existing models % % % TL--NF TL-5B L5-NF TL-00 L00-NE (A frame) (5A frame) (00A frame) 1-3

8 Selection Chart Molded Case Circuit Breakers Frame size (A) Economical series E-SF 10kA/5kA E-SF 10kA/5kA E-SF ka/1ka Standard series S00-CF ka/ka S-SF 5kA/13kA S-SF 5kA/13kA S-SF ka/ka S00-NF 5kA/5kA S-NF 5kA/5kA S-NF 5kA/5kA S5-NF 5kA/5kA S-NF 5kA/5kA S00-NE 5kA/5kA S-GF ka/5ka S-GF ka/5ka S-GF ka/5ka S5-GF ka/5ka S-GF ka/5ka S00-GF 5kA/kA High-fault level series S5-GE ka/5ka S00-GE 5kA/kA S00-PF 0kA/0kA S00-PE 0kA/0kA Current limiting series H-NF 10kA/0kA H-NF 10kA/0kA H5-NF 10kA/0kA H00-NE 10kA/0kA L-NF 10kA/135kA L-NF 10kA/135kA L5-NF 10kA/135kA L00-NE 10kA/135kA Motor protection series E-CM.5kA/1.3kA S-NM 5kA/5kA S5-NM 5kA/5kA Non-automatic trip breakers S-SN S-SN Switch-disconnectors S-NN S-NN S00-NN TB-5S 5kA/- TB series for distribution boards TB-5P 5kA/- TB-5D 5kA/- Notes: For breaking capacity, see pages - to - For AC0V For AC0V For ACV 1-

9 XS000NE 5kA/- 1 S-CF ka/ka S-NF ka/ka S00-CF ka/ka S00-NF ka/ka General S-NE ka/ka S00-NE ka/ka S0-NE 5kA/kA S100-NE 5kA/5kA S-RF 5kA/kA S00-RF 5kA/kA S-RE 5kA/kA S00-RE 5kA/kA S0-GE 5kA/5kA TL-0NE ka/- TL-NE ka/- H-NE ka/9ka L-NE 10kA/135kA H00-NE ka/9ka L00-NE 10kA/135kA H0-NE ka/5ka XS000NN S-GN S00-NN S0-NN S100-NN S-NF 5kA/5kA () () Planned to be released. Contact us for the release date. 1-5

11 Ratings and Specifications Molded Case Circuit Breakers zeconomical series - xstandard series -3 chigh-fault level series - vcurrent limiting series - bmotor protection series -10 nswitch-disconnectors -11 mnon-automatic trip breakers -13,TB series for distribution boards -1.Current limiting series (planned to be released) - 0List of breakers for marine use and rated breaking capacities (approved by ship classification societies) -1 Ratings and Specifications -1

12 Ratings and Specifications Molded Case Circuit Breakers zeconomical series Frame size (A) Type Number of poles Ratings Rated current, A Calibrated at 5 C E-SF E-SF E-SF center pole omitted Rated insulation voltageu i V AC Rated impulse withstand voltage U imp kv Rated breaking capacity, ka NK AC V I cu /I cs (sym) V 0V DC V IEC097- AC V I cu /I cs (sym) 0V 0V V V 0V DC V V Rated short time withstand current, ka External dimensions, mm Weight ( marked standard type) kg Connections and Mountings Front-connected (FC) Terminal screws With extension bars Rear-connected (RC) Bolt studs Flat bar studs Plug-in (PM) For switchboards Standard (PMC) High-performance (PMB) For distribution boards (PMC) Flush-mounted (FP) Bolt studs Flat bar studs Draw-out type (DR) TemPlug (PG) TemPlug5B (PG) DIN rail mount Clip-in chassis mount Accessories (optional) Symbol Auxiliary switch Alarm switch Internally mounted Shunt trips Undervoltage trips Motor operator External operating Breaker-mounted a b c d handle Door-mounted (variable depth) Toggle extension Mechanical interlock Slide type Toggle holder Toggle lock Terminal cover For front-connected For rear-connected and plug-in Interpole barrier Terminal block for lead Door flange Standard specifications Overcurrent trip mechanism Trip button (color) Handle position indication (ON: Red, OFF: Green) Suitability for isolation CE marking Page on which characteristics and outline dimensions are shown Externally mounted a b d c 10/-!3 5/-! 7.5/- 7.5/3. 10/5 10/5 1/ 5/13 7.5/3. / Thermal-magnetic (Red) Non Non 7-10/-!3 5/-! 7.5/- 7.5/3. 10/5 10/5 1/ 5/13 7.5/3. / Thermal-magnetic (Red) Non Non 7- /1 35/7 10/7.5 /1 5/19 5/19 35/7 /1 5/ (BAR) Thermal-magnetic (Red) 7-1 /1 35/7 10/7.5 /1 5/19 5/19 35/7 /1 5/ (BAR) Thermal-magnetic (Red) 7-1 Notes: : Standard. This configuration used unless otherwise specified. : Optional standard. Specify when ordering. : yes or available. : no or not available. : DC rating available on request. : Line side interpole barriers are supplied as standard. (Front connection only) : The UVT controller is installed externally, when provided with AC UVT. : Hydraulic-magnetic type for below 10A rating.!3 : at 0V AC.! : at V AC. -

13 Ratings and Specifications Molded Case Circuit Breakers xstandard series Frame size (A) Type Number of poles Ratings Rated current, A Calibrated at 5 C S-SF 0 0 S-NF S-SF S-NF 5 S5-NF S-SF center pole omitted Rated insulation voltageu i V AC Rated impulse withstand voltage U imp kv Rated breaking capacity, ka NK AC V I cu /I cs (sym) V 0V DC V IEC097- AC V I cu /I cs (sym) 0V 0V V V 0V DC V V Rated short time withstand current, ka External dimensions, mm Weight ( marked standard type) kg Connections and Mountings Front-connected (FC) Terminal screws With extension bars Rear-connected (RC) Bolt studs Flat bar studs Plug-in (PM) For switchboards Standard (PMC) High-performance (PMB) For distribution boards (PMC) Flush-mounted (FP) With flat bar studs Draw-out type (DR) TemPlug (PG) TemPlug5B (PG) DIN rail mount Clip-in chassis mount Accessories (optional) Symbol Auxiliary switch Alarm switch Internally mounted Shunt trips Undervoltage trips Motor operator External operating Breaker-mounted a b c d handle Door-mounted (variable depth) Toggle extension Mechanical interlock Slide type Toggle holder Toggle lock Terminal cover For front-connected For rear-connected and plug-in Interpole barrier Terminal block for lead Door flange Standard specifications Overcurrent trip mechanism Trip button (color) Handle position indication (ON: Red, OFF: Green) Suitability for isolation CE marking Page on which characteristics and outline dimensions are shown Externally mounted a b d c 5/13 /5 5/13 /3 1/ 5/13 / / /5 5/13 0/ (BAR) Thermal-magnetic (Red) 7- / 5/5 / 5/19 / / 5/5 / / / 5/19 0/ (BAR) Thermal-magnetic (Red) /13 /5 5/13 /3 1/ 5/13 / / /5 5/13 0/ (BAR) Thermal-magnetic (Red) (BAR) Thermal-magnetic (Red) 7- / 5/5 / 5/19 / / 5/5 / / / 5/19 0/ (BAR) Thermal-magnetic (Red) /7.5 5/5 5/5 0/0 7.5/7.5 5/5 5/5 35/35 35/35 5/5 0/0 0/ (BAR) Thermal-magnetic (Red) 7-1 / 5/3 5/13 / 5/13 / 0/0 0/0 5/3 5/13 0/ (BAR) Thermal-magnetic (Red) 7-1 / 5/3 5/13 / 5/13 / 0/0 0/0 5/3 5/13 0/ (BAR) Thermal-magnetic (Red) 7-1 Ratings and Specifications Notes: : Standard. This configuration used unless otherwise specified. : Optional standard. Specify when ordering. : Semi-standard. : yes or available. : no or not available. : DC rating available on request. : Line side interpole barriers are supplied as standard. (Front connection only) : The UVT controller is installed externally, when provided with AC UVT. : Hydraulic-magnetic type for below 10A rating. : Provided with DIN rail adaptor. -3

14 Ratings and Specifications Molded Case Circuit Breakers xstandard series Frame size (A) Type Number of poles Ratings Rated current, A Calibrated at 5 C center pole omitted Rated insulation voltageu i V AC Rated impulse withstand voltage U imp kv Rated breaking capacity, ka NK AC V I cu /I cs (sym) V 0V DC V IEC097- AC V I cu /I cs (sym) 0V 0V V V 0V DC V V Rated short time withstand current, ka External dimensions, mm Weight ( marked standard type) kg Connections and Mountings Front-connected (FC) Terminal screws With extension bars Rear-connected (RC) Bolt studs Flat bar studs Plug-in (PM) For switchboards Standard (PMC) High-performance (PMB) For distribution boards (PMC) Flush-mounted (FP) With flat bar studs Draw-out type (DR) TemPlug (PG) TemPlug5B (PG) DIN rail mount Clip-in chassis mount Accessories (optional) Symbol Auxiliary switch Alarm switch Internally mounted Shunt trips Undervoltage trips Motor operator External operating Breaker-mounted a b c d handle Door-mounted (variable depth) Toggle extension Mechanical interlock Slide type Toggle holder Toggle lock Terminal cover For front-connected For rear-connected and plug-in Interpole barrier Terminal block for lead Door flange Standard specifications Overcurrent trip mechanism Trip button (color) Handle position indication (ON: Red, OFF: Green) Suitability for isolation CE marking Page on which characteristics and outline dimensions are shown Externally mounted a b d c S-NF 3 7.5/7.5 5/5 5/5 0/0 7.5/7.5 5/5 5/5 35/35 35/35 5/5 0/0 0/ (BAR) Thermal-magnetic (Red) S00-CF / / / 0/0 / / / 3/3 3/3 / 0/0 0/ (BAR) Thermal-magnetic (Red) S00-NF / 5/5 5/5 0/ / 5/5 / / 5/5 0/0 0/ (BAR) e Thermal-magnetic (Red) S00-NE 3 (Adjustable) (Adjustable) / 5/5 5/5 0/ / 5/5 / / 5/5.3sec (BAR) e Electronic (Red) 7- S-CF /10 / / 10/10 / / 3/3 3/3 / / / e Thermal-magnetic(adjustable) (Red) 7-3 S-NF /0 / 5/5 0/0 / / / / 5/5 / / e Thermal-magnetic(adjustable) (Red) 7-3 S-NE 3 (Adjustable) /0 / 5/5 0/0 / / / / 5/5.3sec e Electronic (Red) 7-3 Notes: : Standard. This configuration used unless otherwise specified. : Optional standard. Specify when ordering. : Semi-standard. : yes or available. : no or not available. : DC rating available on request. : Line side interpole barriers are supplied as standard. (Front connection only) : The mechanical interlock is not applicable to the draw-out type (DR). : Optional pretrip alarm or ground fault trip function available on request. -

15 Ratings and Specifications Molded Case Circuit Breakers xstandard series Frame size (A) Type Number of poles Ratings Rated current, A Calibrated at 5 C 00 S00-CF S00-NF S00-NE (Adjustable) S0-NE (Adjustable) S100-NE (Adjustable) XS000NE (Adjustable) Rated insulation voltageu i V AC Rated impulse withstand voltage U imp kv Rated breaking capacity, ka NK AC V I cu /I cs (sym) V 0V DC V IEC097- AC V I cu /I cs (sym) 0V 0V V V 0V DC V V Rated short time withstand current, ka External dimensions, mm Weight ( marked standard type) kg Connections and Mountings Front-connected (FC) Terminal screws With extension bars Rear-connected (RC) Bolt studs Flat bar studs Plug-in (PM) For switchboards Standard (PMC) High-performance (PMB) For distribution boards (PMC) Flush-mounted (FP) With flat bar studs Draw-out type (DR) TemPlug (PG) TemPlug5B (PG) DIN rail mount Clip-in chassis mount Accessories (optional) Symbol Auxiliary switch Alarm switch Internally mounted Shunt trips Undervoltage trips Motor operator External operating Breaker-mounted a b c d handle Door-mounted (variable depth) Toggle extension Mechanical interlock Slide type Toggle holder Toggle lock Terminal cover For front-connected For rear-connected and plug-in Interpole barrier Terminal block for lead Door flange Standard specifications Overcurrent trip mechanism Trip button (color) Handle position indication (ON: Red, OFF: Green) Suitability for isolation CE marking Page on which characteristics and outline dimensions are shown Externally mounted a b d c 10/10 / / 10/10 / / 3/3 3/3 / / / e Thermal-magnetic(adjustable) (Red) 7-0 0/0 / 5/5 0/0 / / / / 5/5 / / e Thermal-magnetic(adjustable) (Red) 7-0 0/0 / 5/5 0/0 / / / / 5/5.3sec e Electronic (Red) 7-5/0 5/ /75 5/0 5/3 5/ / 5/5 /75 0.3sec e Electronic (Red) 7-5/3 5/5 /9 5/3 5/ 5/5 5/5 /75 /9 00.3sec e Electronic (Red) 7-5/-!3 5/ 5/ 5/5 5/5 /75 /9 0.3sec ^3 Electronic (Red) Non Non 7-7 Notes: : Standard. This configuration used unless otherwise specified. : Optional standard. Specify when ordering. : Semi-standard. : yes or available. : no or not available. 1 : DC rating available on request. : Supplied as standard. 3 : Line side interpole barriers are supplied as standard. (Front connection only) : The UVT controller is installed externally, when provided with AC UVT. 9 : The mechanical interlock is not applicable to the draw-out type (DR).! : Being or will be applied.!3 : at 0V AC.! : Optional pretrip alarm or ground fault trip function available on : One is supplied with every five breakers. Please specify if more are required. ^3 : Fixed depth, not adjustable. Ratings and Specifications -5

16 Ratings and Specifications Molded Case Circuit Breakers chigh-fault level series Frame size (A) Type Number of poles Ratings Rated current, A Calibrated at 5 C center pole omitted Rated insulation voltageu i V AC Rated impulse withstand voltage U imp kv Rated breaking capacity, ka NK AC V I cu /I cs (sym) V 0V DC V IEC097- AC V I cu /I cs (sym) 0V 0V V V 0V DC V V Rated short time withstand current, ka External dimensions, mm Weight ( marked standard type) kg Connections and Mountings Front-connected (FC) Terminal screws With extension bars Rear-connected (RC) Bolt studs Flat bar studs Plug-in (PM) For switchboards Standard (PMC) High-performance (PMB) For distribution boards (PMC) Flush-mounted (FP) With flat bar studs Draw-out type (DR) TemPlug (PG) TemPlug5B (PG) DIN rail mount Clip-in chassis mount Accessories (optional) Symbol Auxiliary switch Alarm switch Internally mounted Shunt trips Undervoltage trips Motor operator External operating Breaker-mounted a b c d handle Door-mounted (variable depth) Toggle extension Mechanical interlock Slide type Toggle holder Toggle lock Terminal cover For front-connected For rear-connected and plug-in Interpole barrier Terminal block for lead Door flange Standard specifications Overcurrent trip mechanism Trip button (color) Handle position indication (ON: Red, OFF: Green) Suitability for isolation CE marking Page on which characteristics and outline dimensions are shown Externally mounted a b d c S-GF 0 0 / /5 5/5 0/0 / 5/ /5 5/33 5/33 5/5 0/0 0/ (BAR) e Thermal-magnetic (Red) 7-10 S-GF / /5 5/5 0/0 / 5/ /5 5/33 5/33 5/5 0/0 0/ (BAR) e Thermal-magnetic (Red) 7-10 S-GF / /5 5/5 0/0 / 5/ /5 5/33 5/33 5/5 0/0 0/ (BAR) e Thermal-magnetic (Red) S5-GF /7.5 /5 5/5 0/0 7.5/7.5 5/5 /5 5/35 5/35 5/5 0/0 0/ (BAR) e Thermal-magnetic (Red) 7-1 S-GF 3 7.5/7.5 /5 5/5 0/0 7.5/7.5 5/5 /5 5/35 5/35 5/5 0/0 0/ (BAR) e Thermal-magnetic (Red) S5-GE (Adjustable) /7.5 /5 5/5 7.5/7.5 5/5 /5 5/35 5/35 5/ (BAR) e Electronic (Red) 7-00 S00-GF / 5/ /5 0/ / 5/ / / /5 0/0 0/ (BAR) e Thermal-magnetic (Red) S00-GE (Adjustable) (Adjustable) / 5/ /5 0/ / 5/ / / /5.3sec (BAR) e Electronic (Red) 7- Notes: : Standard. This configuration used unless otherwise specified. : Optional standard. Specify when ordering. : Semi-standard. : yes or available. : no or not available. : DC rating available on request. : Line side interpole barriers are supplied as standard. (Front connection only) : The mechanical interlock is not applicable to the draw-out type (DR). : Provided with DIN rail adaptor. : Being or will be applied. : Optional pretrip alarm or ground fault trip function available on request. : Optional pretrip alarm function available on request. -

17 Ratings and Specifications Molded Case Circuit Breakers chigh-fault level series Frame size (A) Type Number of poles Ratings Rated current, A Calibrated at 5 C Rated insulation voltageu i V AC Rated impulse withstand voltage U imp kv Rated breaking capacity, ka NK AC V I cu /I cs (sym) V 0V DC V IEC097- AC V I cu /I cs (sym) 0V 0V V V 0V DC V V Rated short time withstand current, ka External dimensions, mm Weight ( marked standard type) kg Connections and Mountings Front-connected (FC) Terminal screws With extension bars Rear-connected (RC) Bolt studs Flat bar studs Plug-in (PM) For switchboards Standard (PMC) High-performance (PMB) For distribution boards (PMC) Flush-mounted (FP) With flat bar studs Draw-out type (DR) TemPlug (PG) TemPlug5B (PG) DIN rail mount Clip-in chassis mount Accessories (optional) Symbol Auxiliary switch Alarm switch Internally mounted Shunt trips Undervoltage trips Motor operator External operating Breaker-mounted a b c d handle Door-mounted (variable depth) Toggle extension Mechanical interlock Slide type Toggle holder Toggle lock Terminal cover For front-connected For rear-connected and plug-in Interpole barrier Terminal block for lead Door flange Standard specifications Overcurrent trip mechanism Trip button (color) Handle position indication (ON: Red, OFF: Green) Suitability for isolation CE marking Page on which characteristics and outline dimensions are shown Externally mounted a b d c 00 S00-PF / 0/0 /5 0/ / 0/0 5/5 5/5 /5 0/0 0/ (BAR) e Thermal-magnetic (Red) S00-PE (Adjustable) (Adjustable) / 0/0 /5 0/ / 0/0 5/5 5/5 /5.3sec (BAR) e Electronic (Red) 7- S-RF /0 5/ /75 5/0 5/3 5/ / / /75 / / e Thermal-magnetic (Red) 7-3 S-RE (Adjustable) /0 5/ /75 5/0 5/3 5/ / / /75.3sec e Electronic (Red) S00-RF /0 5/ /75 5/0 5/3 5/ / / /75 / / e Thermal-magnetic (Red) S00-RE (Adjustable) /0 5/ /75 5/0 5/3 5/ / / /75.3sec e Electronic (Red) 7-0 S0-GE (Adjustable) /3 5/5 /9 5/3 5/ 5/5 5/5 /75 /9 0.3sec e Electronic (Red) 7- Ratings and Specifications Notes: : Standard. This configuration used unless otherwise specified. : Optional standard. Specify when ordering. : Semi-standard. : yes or available. : no or not available. : DC rating available on request. : Line side interpole barriers are supplied as standard. (Front connection only) : The mechanical interlock is not applicable to the draw-out type (DR). : Being or will be applied. : Optional pretrip alarm or ground fault trip function available on : One is supplied with every five breakers. Please specify if more are required. -7

18 Ratings and Specifications Molded Case Circuit Breakers vcurrent limiting series Frame size (A) Type Number of poles Ratings Rated current, A Calibrated at 5 C Rated insulation voltageu i V AC Rated impulse withstand voltage U imp kv Rated breaking capacity, ka NK AC V I cu /I cs (sym) V 0V DC V IEC097- AC V I cu /I cs (sym) 0V 0V V V 0V DC V V Rated short time withstand current, ka External dimensions, mm Weight ( marked standard type) kg Connections and Mountings Front-connected (FC) Terminal screws With extension bars Rear-connected (RC) Bolt studs Flat bar studs Plug-in (PM) For switchboards Standard (PMC) High-performance (PMB) For distribution boards (PMC) Flush-mounted (FP) With flat bar studs Draw-out type (DR) TemPlug (PG) TemPlug5B (PG) DIN rail mount Clip-in chassis mount Accessories (optional) Symbol Auxiliary switch Alarm switch Internally mounted Shunt trips Undervoltage trips Motor operator External operating Breaker-mounted a b c d handle Door-mounted (variable depth) Toggle extension Mechanical interlock Slide type Toggle holder Toggle lock Terminal cover For front-connected For rear-connected and plug-in Interpole barrier Terminal block for lead Door flange Standard specifications Overcurrent trip mechanism Trip button (color) Handle position indication (ON: Red, OFF: Green) Suitability for isolation CE marking Page on which characteristics and outline dimensions are shown Externally mounted a b d c H-NF / 10/0 0/0 0/ 5/5 10/0 /5 /5 0/0 0/0 0/ (BAR) e Thermal-magnetic (Red) 7- H-NF 0/ 10/0 0/0 0/ 5/5 10/0 /5 /5 0/0 0/0 0/ (BAR) e Thermal-magnetic (Red) 7-5 H5-NF / 10/0 0/0 0/ 5/5 10/0 /5 /5 0/0 0/0 0/ (BAR) e Thermal-magnetic (Red) 7-00 H00-NE (Adjustable) (Adjustable) /35 10/0 0/0 35/35 5/5 10/0 /5 /5 0/0.3sec (BAR) e Electronic (Red) 7-3 H-NE (Adjustable) /0 /9 0/0 5/0 5/3 /9 /9 /9 0/0.3sec e Electronic (Red) H00-NE (Adjustable) /0 /9 0/0 5/0 5/3 /9 /9 /9 0/0.3sec e Electronic (Red) 7-0 TL-0NE (Adjustable) /3 75/57 /5 /5 /5 0/ sec e Electronic (Brown) Non Non 7-7 TL-NE (Adjustable) /3 75/57 /5 /5 /5 0/ sec e Electronic (Brown) Non Non 7-7 Notes: : Standard. This configuration used unless otherwise specified. : Optional standard. Specify when ordering. : Semi-standard. : yes or available. : no or not available. : DC rating available on request. : Line side interpole barriers are supplied as standard. (Front connection only) : The UVT controller is installed externally, when provided with AC UVT. : The mechanical interlock is not applicable to the draw-out type (DR). : Optional pretrip alarm or ground fault trip function available on : at 0V : One is supplied with every five breakers. Please specify if more are required. -

19 Ratings and Specifications Molded Case Circuit Breakers vcurrent limiting series Frame size (A) Type Number of poles Ratings Rated current, A Calibrated at 5 C Rated insulation voltageu i V AC Rated impulse withstand voltage U imp kv Rated breaking capacity, ka NK AC V I cu /I cs (sym) V 0V DC V IEC097- AC V I cu /I cs (sym) 0V 0V V V 0V DC V V Rated short time withstand current, ka External dimensions, mm Weight ( marked standard type) kg Connections and Mountings Front-connected (FC) Terminal screws With extension bars Rear-connected (RC) Bolt studs Flat bar studs Plug-in (PM) For switchboards Standard (PMC) High-performance (PMB) For distribution boards (PMC) Flush-mounted (FP) With flat bar studs Draw-out type (DR) TemPlug (PG) TemPlug5B (PG) DIN rail mount Clip-in chassis mount Accessories (optional) Symbol Auxiliary switch Alarm switch Internally mounted Shunt trips Undervoltage trips Motor operator External operating Breaker-mounted a b c d handle Door-mounted (variable depth) Toggle extension Mechanical interlock Slide type Toggle holder Toggle lock Terminal cover For front-connected For rear-connected and plug-in Interpole barrier Terminal block for lead Door flange Standard specifications Overcurrent trip mechanism Trip button (color) Handle position indication (ON: Red, OFF: Green) Suitability for isolation CE marking Page on which characteristics and outline dimensions are shown Externally mounted a b d c L-NF /0 10/135 00/0 #1 5/0 5/5 10/135 00/0 00/0 00/0 0/0 0/ (BAR) e Thermal-magnetic (Red) 7- L-NF 5/0 10/135 00/0 #1 5/0 5/5 10/135 00/0 00/0 00/0 0/0 0/ (BAR) e Thermal-magnetic (Red) 7-5 L5-NF /0 10/135 00/0 #1 5/0 5/5 10/135 00/0 00/0 00/0 0/0 0/ (BAR) e Thermal-magnetic (Red) 7-00 L00-NE (Adjustable) (Adjustable) / 10/135 00/0 #1 / 5/5 10/135 00/0 00/0 00/0.3sec (BAR) e Electronic (Red) 7-3 L-NE (Adjustable) /0 10/135 00/0 5/0 5/3 10/135 00/0 00/0 00/0.3sec e Electronic (Red) L00-NE (Adjustable) /0 10/135 00/0 5/0 5/3 10/135 00/0 00/0 00/0.3sec e Electronic (Red) 7- Notes: : Standard. This configuration used unless otherwise specified. : Optional standard. Specify when ordering. : Semi-standard. : yes or available. : no or not available. : DC rating available on request. : Line side interpole barriers are supplied as standard. (Front connection only) : The mechanical interlock is not applicable to the draw-out type (DR). : Optional pretrip alarm or ground fault trip function available on request. #1 : Also applicable to ACV. Ratings and Specifications -9

20 Ratings and Specifications Molded Case Circuit Breakers bmotor protection series Frame size (A) Type Number of poles Ratings Motor rated capacity (kw) and breaker rated current (A) Calibrated at 5 Note: Select an appropriate one depending on the total load current of the motor operator. E-CM kw (A) 00/0V 00/0V S-NM (A) 00/0V kw 00/0V S5-NM (A) 00/0V kw 00/0V Rated insulation voltageu i V AC Rated impulse withstand voltage U imp kv Rated breaking capacity, ka NK AC V I cu /I cs (sym) V 0V DC V IEC 097- AC 0V I cu /I cs (sym) V V 0V DC V External dimensions, mm Weight ( marked standard type) kg Connections and Mountings Front-connected (FC) Terminal screws With extension bars Rear-connected (RC) Bolt studs Flat bar studs Plug-in (PM) For switchboards Standard (PMC) High-performance (PMB) For distribution boards (PMC) Flush-mounted (FP) Bolt studs Flat bar studs Draw-out type (DR) TemPlug (PG) TemPlug5B (PG) DIN rail mount Clip-in chassis mount Accessories (optional) Symbol Auxiliary switch Alarm switch Internally mounted Shunt trips Undervoltage trips Motor operator External operating Breaker-mounted a b c d handle Door-mounted (variable depth) Toggle extension Mechanical interlock Slide type Toggle holder Toggle lock Terminal cover For front-connected For rear-connected and plug-in Interpole barrier Terminal block for lead Door flange Standard specifications Overcurrent trip mechanism Trip button (color) Handle position indication (ON: Red, OFF: Green) Suitability for isolation CE marking Page on which characteristics and outline dimensions are shown Externally mounted a b d c.5/-!3 5/-!.5/1.3.5/1.3.5/1.3 5/ (Red) Non Non 7-5/5 / 5/5 / / / (BAR) e Thermal-magnetic (Red) 7-5 5/5 5/5 5/5 35/35 35/35 5/ (BAR) e Thermal-magnetic (Red) 7-5 Notes: : Standard. This configuration used unless otherwise specified. : Optional standard. Specify when ordering. : yes or available. : no or not available. 3 : Line side interpole barriers are supplied as standard. (Front connection only)!1 : Provided with DIN rail adaptor.!3 : at 0V AC.! : at V : Hydraulic-magnetic type for below 5A rating. -10

21 Ratings and Specifications Molded Case Circuit Breakers nswitch-disconnectors Frame size (A) Type Number of poles Ratings Rated current, A Rated insulation voltageu i V Rated operational voltage V AC AC DC Rated short circuit making capacity, ka peak Rated short time withstand current, ka Rated impulse withstand voltage U imp kv Performance Utilization category AC V IEC DC V Upstream breaker External dimensions, mm Weight ( marked standard type) kg Connections and Mountings Front-connected (FC) Terminal screws With extension bars Rear-connected (RC) Bolt studs Flat bar studs Plug-in (PM) For switchboards Standard (PMC) High-performance (PMB) For distribution boards (PMC) Flush-mounted (FP) With flat bar studs Draw-out type (DR) TemPlug (PG) TemPlug5B (PG) DIN rail mount Clip-in chassis mount Accessories (optional) Symbol Auxiliary switch Alarm switch Internally mounted Shunt trips Undervoltage trips Motor operator External operating Breaker-mounted a b c d handle Door-mounted (variable depth) Toggle extension Mechanical interlocko Slide type Toggle holder Toggle lock Terminal cover For front-connected For rear-connected and plug-in Interpole barrier Terminal block for lead Door flange Standard specifications Trip button (color) Handle position indication (ON: Red, OFF: Green) Suitability for isolation CE marking Page on which characteristics and outline dimensions are shown Externally mounted a b d c S-NN sec AC-3A DC-A S-NF (BAR) e (Red) 7-5 S-SN sec AC-3A DC-A S-SF (BAR) e (Red) sec AC-3A DC-A S-SF (BAR) e (Red) 7-5 S-NN sec AC-3A DC-A S-NF (BAR) e (Red) 7-0 S-SN 5.3sec AC-3A DC-A S-SF (BAR) e (Red) 7-.3sec AC-3A DC-A S-SF (BAR) e (Red) 7-00 S00-NN sec AC-3A DC-A S00-NF (BAR) e (Red) 7- S-GN sec AC-3A DC-A S-NF e (Red) 7- Notes: : Standard. This configuration used unless otherwise specified. : Optional standard. Specify when ordering. : Semi-standard. : yes or available. : no or not available. : Line side interpole barriers are supplied as standard. (Front connection only) : The mechanical interlock is not applicable to the draw-out type (DR). : Provided with DIN rail Required for overcurrent protection. Rated conditional short-circuit current [I cc ] will be the same as Rated short-circuit breaking capacity of upstream breaker. Ratings and Specifications -11

22 Ratings and Specifications Molded Case Circuit Breakers nswitch-disconnectors Frame size (A) Type Number of poles Ratings Rated current, A Rated insulation voltageu i V Rated operational voltage V AC AC DC Rated short circuit making capacity, ka peak Rated short time withstand current, ka Rated impulse withstand voltage U imp kv Performance Utilization category AC V IEC DC V Upstream breaker External dimensions, mm Weight ( marked standard type) kg Connections and Mountings Front-connected (FC) Terminal screws With extension bars Rear-connected (RC) Bolt studs Flat bar studs Plug-in (PM) For switchboards Standard (PMC) High-performance (PMB) For distribution boards (PMC) Flush-mounted (FP) With flat bar studs Draw-out type (DR) TemPlug (PG) TemPlug5B (PG) DIN rail mount Clip-in chassis mount Accessories (optional) Symbol Auxiliary switch Alarm switch Internally mounted Shunt trips Undervoltage trips Motor operator External operating Breaker-mounted a b c d handle Door-mounted (variable depth) Toggle extension Mechanical interlocko Slide type Toggle holder Toggle lock Terminal cover For front-connected For rear-connected and plug-in Interpole barrier Terminal block for lead Door flange Standard specifications Trip button (color) Handle position indication (ON: Red, OFF: Green) Suitability for isolation CE marking Page on which characteristics and outline dimensions are shown Externally mounted a b d c 00 S00-NN sec AC-3A DC-A S00-NF e (Red) 7-0 S0-NN sec AC-3A DC-A S0-NE e (Red) S100-NN sec AC-3A DC-A S100-NE e (Red) 7-7 Notes: : Standard. This configuration used unless otherwise specified. : Optional standard. Specify when ordering. : Semi-standard. : yes or available. : no or not available. : Line side interpole barriers are supplied as standard. (Front connection only) : The mechanical interlock is not applicable to the draw-out type : One is supplied with every five breakers. Please specify if more are : Required for overcurrent protection. Rated conditional short-circuit current [I cc ] will be the same as Rated short-circuit breaking capacity of upstream breaker. -1

23 Ratings and Specifications Molded Case Circuit Breakers mnon-automatic trip breakers Frame size (A) Type Number of poles Ratings Rated current, A Rated insulation voltageu i V Rated operational voltage V AC AC DC Rated short circuit making capacity, ka peak Rated short time withstand current, ka Rated impulse withstand voltage U imp kv Performance Max switching current A AC IEC 097- Ann.L CBI-Y DC Endurance Number of operating cycles with current Number of operating cycles without current Upstream breaker External dimensions, mm Weight ( marked standard type) kg Connections and Mountings Front-connected (FC) Terminal screws With extension bars Rear-connected (RC) Bolt studs Flat bar studs Plug-in (PM) For switchboards Standard (PMC) High-performance (PMB) For distribution boards (PMC) Flush-mounted (FP) With flat bar studs Draw-out type (DR) TemPlug (PG) TemPlug5B (PG) DIN rail mount Clip-in chassis mount Accessories (optional) Symbol Auxiliary switch Alarm switch Internally mounted Shunt trips Undervoltage trips Motor operator External operating Breaker-mounted a b c d handle Door-mounted (variable depth) Toggle extension Mechanical interlock Slide type Toggle holder Toggle lock Terminal cover For front-connected For rear-connected and plug-in Interpole barrier Terminal block for lead Door flange Standard specifications Trip button (color) Handle position indication (ON: Red, OFF: Green) Suitability for isolation CE marking Page on which characteristics and outline dimensions are shown Externally mounted a b d c 000 XS000NN sec XS000NE ^3 (Red) Non Non 7-7 Ratings and Specifications Notes: : Standard. This configuration used unless otherwise specified. : Optional standard. Specify when ordering. : Semi-standard. : yes or available. : no or not available. : Supplied as standard. : The UVT controller is installed externally, when provided with AC UVT. : The mechanical interlock is not applicable to the draw-out type : Required for overcurrent protection. Rated conditional short-circuit current [I cc ] will be the same as Rated short-circuit breaking capacity of upstream breaker. ^3 : Fixed depth, not adjustable. -13

24 Ratings and Specifications Molded Case Circuit Breakers,TB series for distribution boards Frame size (A) Type Number of poles Ratings Rated current, A Calibrated at 5 C Rated voltage V AC DC Rated breaking capacity, ka NK AC sym DC External dimensions, mm a b d c Weight kg Connecting scheme Front-connected both on the line and load sides Plug-in on the line side and front-connected on the load side Plug-in both on the line and load sides Mounting scheme (optional) Clip-in chassis Single mounting base Double mounting base Accessories (optional) Symbol Toggle holder Toggle lock Toggle cap Interpole barrier Standard specifications Overcurrent trip mechanism Trip button (color) Handle position indication (ON: Red, OFF: Green) Suitability for isolation CE marking Page on which characteristics and outline dimensions are shown Notes: : yes or available. : no or not available. $ :.5kA for 10A. $7 : Specify the branch bars when ordering. TB-5S $ Thermal-magnetic Non Non Non Non 7-0 TB-5P $ $7 $7 Thermal-magnetic Non Non Non Non 7- TB-5D $ $7 $7 Thermal-magnetic Non Non Non Non 7- -1

25 Ratings and Specifications Molded Case Circuit Breakers.Current limiting series (planned to be released) Frame size (A) Type Number of poles Ratings Rated current, A Calibrated at 5 C 0 H0-NE (Adjustable) Rated insulation voltageu i V AC Rated impulse withstand voltage U imp kv Rated breaking capacity, ka NK AC V I cu /I cs (sym) V 0V DC V IEC097- AC V I cu /I cs (sym) 0V 0V V V 0V DC V V Rated short time withstand current, ka External dimensions, mm a d a c b b c d Weight ( marked standard type) kg Connections and Mountings Front-connected (FC) Terminal screws With extension bars Rear-connected (RC) Bolt studs Flat bar studs Plug-in (PM) For switchboards Standard (PMC) High-performance (PMB) For distribution boards (PMC) Flush-mounted (FP) With flat bar studs Draw-out type (DR) TemPlug (PG) TemPlug5B (PG) DIN rail mount Clip-in chassis mount Accessories (optional) Symbol Auxiliary switch Alarm switch Internally mounted Shunt trips Undervoltage trips Motor operator External operating Breaker-mounted handle Door-mounted (variable depth) Toggle extension Mechanical interlock Slide type Toggle holder Toggle lock Terminal cover For front-connected For rear-connected and plug-in Interpole barrier Terminal block for lead Door flange Standard specifications Overcurrent trip mechanism Trip button (color) Handle position indication (ON: Red, OFF: Green) Suitability for isolation CE marking Externally mounted 5/0 /5 0/113 5/0 5/3 /5 /5 /5 0/ e Electronic (Red) Ratings and Specifications Notes: : Standard. This configuration used unless otherwise specified. : Optional standard. Specify when ordering. : Semi-standard. : yes or available. : no or not available. : Line side interpole barriers are supplied as standard. (Front connection only) : The mechanical interlock is not applicable to the draw-out type (DR). : Being or will be applied. : Optional pretrip alarm or ground fault trip function available on : One is supplied with every five breakers. Please specify if more are required. -

26 Ratings and Specifications Molded Case Circuit Breakers 0List of breakers for marine use and rated breaking capacities (approved by ship classification societies) Frame size Type E-SF E-CM S-SF S-GF S-GFL S-GFH E-SF S-NF S-NFL S-NFH S-NM S-GF S-GFL Rated current(a) Poles Rated Rated breaking capacities, ka (sym.) Values enclosed in square brackets [ ] represent the making current, ka. voltage (V) Icu Ics Icu Ics Icu Ics Icu Ics Notes: 1 : at V AC. : at 0V AC. 3 : at 10V AC. : at 0V AC. 5 : at 55V AC.! : Being or will be applied. 7 : at 0V AC. : at 110V AC. 9 : at 5V AC.!0 : at 0V AC.!3 : at 0V AC.! : at V AC.!5 : at V AC. -1

27 Ratings and Specifications Molded Case Circuit Breakers 0List of breakers for marine use and rated breaking capacities (approved by ship classification societies) Frame size Type E-SF E-CM S-SF S-GF S-GFL S-GFH E-SF S-NF S-NFL S-NFH S-NM S-GF S-GFL Rated current(a) Poles 3 Rated Rated breaking capacities, ka (sym.) Values enclosed in square brackets [ ] represent the making current, ka. voltage (V) Icu Ics Icu Ics Icu Ics Icu Ics Ratings and Specifications -17

28 Ratings and Specifications Molded Case Circuit Breakers 0List of breakers for marine use and rated breaking capacities (approved by ship classification societies) Frame size 5 Rated Rated breaking capacities, ka (sym.) Values enclosed in square brackets [ ] represent the making current, ka. Type Rated current(a) Poles voltage (V) Icu Ics Icu Ics Icu Ics Icu Ics S-GFH H-NF L-NF S-SF S-NF S-GF H-NF L-NF S5-NF S5-NFL S5-NFH S5-NM S5-GF Notes: : at V AC. : at 0V AC. : at 10V AC. : at 0V AC. t : at 55V AC. : Being or will be applied. : at 0V AC. : at 110V AC. : at 5V AC.!0 : at 0V AC.!3 : at 0V AC.! : at V AC.!5 : at V AC. center pole omitted. -1

29 Ratings and Specifications Molded Case Circuit Breakers 0List of breakers for marine use and rated breaking capacities (approved by ship classification societies) Frame size 5 Rated Rated breaking capacities, ka (sym.) Values enclosed in square brackets [ ] represent the making current, ka. Type Rated current(a) Poles voltage (V) Icu Ics Icu Ics Icu Ics Icu Ics S-GFH H-NF L-NF S-SF S-NF S-GF H-NF L-NF S5-NF S5-NFL S5-NFH S5-NM S5-GF Ratings and Specifications -19

30 Ratings and Specifications Molded Case Circuit Breakers 0List of breakers for marine use and rated breaking capacities (approved by ship classification societies) Frame size 5 00 Type S5-GFL S5-GFH S5-GE H5-NF L5-NF Rated current(a) Poles E-SF S-NF S-SF S-GF S00-CF S00-NF S00-NE S00-NEH Rated Rated breaking capacities, ka (sym.) Values enclosed in square brackets [ ] represent the making current, ka. voltage (V) Icu Ics Icu Ics Icu Ics Icu Ics Notes: : at V AC. : at 0V AC. : at 10V AC. : at 0V AC. t : at 55V AC. : Being or will be applied. : at 0V AC. : at 110V AC. : at 5V AC.!0 : at 0V AC.!3 : at 0V AC.! : at V AC.!5 : at V AC. center pole omitted

31 Ratings and Specifications Molded Case Circuit Breakers 0List of breakers for marine use and rated breaking capacities (approved by ship classification societies) Frame size 5 00 Type S5-GFL S5-GFH S5-GE H5-NF L5-NF E-SF Rated current(a) Rated Rated breaking capacities, ka (sym.) Values enclosed in square brackets [ ] represent the making current, ka. Poles voltage (V) Icu Ics Icu Ics Icu Ics Icu Ics S-NF S-SF S-GF S00-CF S00-NF S00-NE S00-NEH Ratings and Specifications -1

32 Ratings and Specifications Molded Case Circuit Breakers 0List of breakers for marine use and rated breaking capacities (approved by ship classification societies) Frame size 00 Type S00-GF S00-GE S00-GEH S00-PF S00-PE H00-NE L00-NE S-CF S-NF S-NE S-NEH S-RF S-RE H-NE L-NE Rated current(a) Rated Rated breaking capacities, ka (sym.) Values enclosed in square brackets [ ] represent the making current, ka. Poles voltage (V) Icu Ics Icu Ics Icu Ics Icu Ics Notes: : at V AC. : at 0V AC. : at 10V AC. : at 0V AC. t : at 55V AC. : Being or will be applied. : at 0V AC. : at 110V AC. : at 5V AC.!0 : at 0V AC.!3 : at 0V AC.! : at V AC.!5 : at V AC. -

33 Ratings and Specifications Molded Case Circuit Breakers 0List of breakers for marine use and rated breaking capacities (approved by ship classification societies) Frame size 00 Type S00-GF S00-GE S00-GEH S00-PF S00-PE H00-NE L00-NE S-CF S-NF S-NE S-NEH S-RF S-RE H-NE L-NE Rated current(a) Rated Rated breaking capacities, ka (sym.) Values enclosed in square brackets [ ] represent the making current, ka. Poles voltage (V) Icu Ics Icu Ics Icu Ics Icu Ics Ratings and Specifications -3

34 Ratings and Specifications Molded Case Circuit Breakers 0List of breakers for marine use and rated breaking capacities (approved by ship classification societies) Frame size 00 S00-RE H00-NE L00-NE H0-NE S100-NE S0-NE ,0 100 Rated Rated breaking capacities, ka (sym.) Values enclosed in square brackets [ ] represent the making current, ka. Type Rated current(a) Poles voltage (V) Icu Ics Icu Ics Icu Ics Icu Ics S00-CF S00-NF S00-NE S00-NEH S0-NEH S0-GE S100-NEH , , S00-RF Notes: : at V AC. : at 0V AC. : at 10V AC. : at 0V AC. t : at 55V AC. : Being or will be applied. : at 0V AC. : at 110V AC. : at 5V AC.!0 : at 0V AC.!3 : at 0V AC.! : at V AC.!5 : at V AC. -

35 Ratings and Specifications Molded Case Circuit Breakers 0List of breakers for marine use and rated breaking capacities (approved by ship classification societies) Frame size 00 S00-RE H00-NE L00-NE H0-NE S100-NE S0-NE ,0 100 Rated Rated breaking capacities, ka (sym.) Values enclosed in square brackets [ ] represent the making current, ka. Type Rated current(a) Poles voltage (V) Icu Ics Icu Ics Icu Ics Icu Ics S00-CF S00-NF S00-NE S00-NEH S0-NEH S0-GE S100-NEH , , S00-RF Ratings and Specifications -5

36 Ratings and Specifications Molded Case Circuit Breakers 0List of breakers for marine use and rated breaking capacities (approved by ship classification societies) Frame size 0 Rated Rated breaking capacities, ka (sym.) Values enclosed in square brackets [ ] represent the making current, ka. Type Rated current(a) Poles voltage (V) O-CO O-CO-CO O-CO O-CO-CO O-CO O-CO-CO O-CO O-CO-CO TB-5S TB-5P TL-0NE TL-NE TB-5D XS000NE Notes: : at V AC. : at 0V AC. : at 10V AC. : at 0V AC. t : at 55V AC. : Being or will be applied. : at 0V AC. : at 110V AC. : at 5V AC.!0 : at 0V AC.!3 : at 0V AC.! : at V AC.!5 : at V AC. -

37 Ratings and Specifications Molded Case Circuit Breakers 0List of breakers for marine use and rated breaking capacities (approved by ship classification societies) Frame size Rated Rated breaking capacities, ka (sym.) Values enclosed in square brackets [ ] represent the making current, ka. Type Rated current(a) Poles voltage (V) O-CO O-CO-CO O-CO O-CO-CO O-CO O-CO-CO O-CO O-CO-CO TB-5S TB-5P TL-0NE TL-NE XS000NE TB-5D Ratings and Specifications -7

39 Selection 3zCombination of breakers for cascade breaking 3- xselection of breakers for selectivity coordination 3-3 Selection 3-1

40 3 Selection Molded Case Circuit Breakers zcombination of breakers for cascade breaking The following table shows possible combinations of backup and backed-up breakers (conforming to Appendix A, IEC 097-) as well as the cascade breaking capacity (ka sym.) of each combination. Cascade breaking system Backup MCCB Backed-up MCCB Short-circuit point Breaker combination table for cascade breaking for V AC circuit (approved by NK, LR, AB) Backup breaker Rated breaking capacity Backed-up breaker E-SF 10 E-SF 10 E-SF S-SF 5 S-SF S-NF S-NF S-NFL 5 S-NFH S-NM S5-NF S-NF S5-NFL 5 S5-NFH S5-NM S-SF S00-CF S-CF S00-CF S00-NF S00-NE 5 S00-NEH S-GF S-GF S-GF S-GFL S-GFH S-GFL S-GFH S5-GF S-GF S5-GFL S5-GFH S-NF S-NE S-NEH S00-NF S00-NE S00-NEH S00-GF S00-GE 5 S00-GEH S00-PF 0 S00-PE H-NF 10 H-NF H5-NF 10 H00-NE 10 E-SF S-NF S-NF S-NFL S-NFH S-SF S5-NF S-NF S5-NFL S5-NFH S-SF S00-CF S-CF S00-CF S00-NF S00-NE S00-NEH S-GF S-GF S-GF S-GFL S-GFH S-GFL S-GFH S5-GF S-GF S5-GFL S5-GFH Notes: Values enclosed in square brackets [ ] represent the making current. 3-

41 Breaker combination table for cascade breaking for 0V AC circuit (approved by NK, LR, AB) TB-5S TB-5D TB-5P Backup breaker Rated breaking capacity Backed-up breaker E-SF 5 5 [5.3] 5 [5.3] 5 [5.3] E-SF 5 E-SF 5 E-SF S-SF S-NF S-NF S-NFL S-NFH S5-NF S-NF S5-NFL S5-NFH [5.3] 5 [5.3] 5 [5.3] 5 [55.] 5 [55.] 5 [55.] [1] [1] 5 [55.] 5 [55.] 5 [55.] [1] [1] [1] [1] Notes: Values enclosed in square brackets [ ] represent the making current. If the rated current is 10A, the rated breaking capacity is.5 ka. S-NF S-NE S-NEH S00-NF S00-NE S00-NEH S00-GF S00-GE S00-GEH S00-PF S00-PE H-NF H-NF H5-NF H00-NE H-NE H00-NE L-NF L-NF L5-NF L00-NE L-NE L00-NE 10 3 Selection

42 3 Selection Molded Case Circuit Breakers xselection of breakers for selectivity coordination The following table shows possible combinations of main circuit breakers and branch circuit breakers capable of selectivity coordination with the main circuit breakers as well as the breaking capacity (ka sym.) of each combination at the points where the branch circuit breaker is installed. Selectivity coordination Power supply continued Main circuit breaker Branch circuit breaker Breaker combination table for selectivity coordination for V AC circuit Main circuit breaker vital load Short-circuit point Rated breaking capacity S00-NE S00-NEH S00-GE S00-GEH H00-NE L00-NE S-NE S-NEH H-NE S00-NE S00-NEH H00-NE TL-0NE XS000NE TL-NE S0-NEH S100-NEH 3- sym.ka Branch circuit breaker E-SF E-SF E5-NEL E5-NFH E-NF E-SF S-SF S-NF S-NFH S-NFL S-NF S-SF S5-NF S5-NFH S5-NFL S-NF S-SF S00-CF S-CF S00-CF 0 S-GF S-GFH S-GFL S-GF S-GFH S-GFL S-GF S5-GF S5-GFH S5-GFL S-GF S00-PF S00-NE S00-NEH S00-NF S00-GE S00-GEH S00-GF S00-PE S-NE S-NEH 1 35 S-NF S00-NE S00-NEH 0 35 S00-NF H-NF H-NF H5-NF H00-NE L-NF L-NF L5-NF L00-NE H-NE 35 L-NE H00-NE 35 L00-NE Note: The table assumes that: The trip pickup current of the main circuit breakers is set to the maximum; The main circuit breakers are provided with the long time delay, short time delay and instantaneous trip functions; For CCS, the values are being or will be applied. Contact us for the details. The main circuit breakers marked with are high instantaneous trip breakers.

43 Special Breakers zinstantaneous trip only breakers- xspecial instantaneous trip breakers High Instantaneous Trip -3. Low Instantaneous Trip - Special Breakers -1

44 Special Breakers Molded Case Circuit Breakers zinstantaneous trip only breakers These are standard breakers without the thermal overload trip. They have the instantaneous tripping characteristic, normally used when short circuit protection only is required. Other ratings and specifications and outline dimensions of these breakers are the same as those of standard breakers of the same types. Category Type For AC/DC Rated current, A Code number Instantaneous trip current, A E-SF AC or DC S-GF 0 0 If the DC version is required, please state so 0 09 when ordering. The AC Fixed instantaneous trip q Adjustable instantaneous trip w version is provided E-SF unless otherwise stated 1 when ordering S-NF S-GF 0 09 H-NF L-NF S-SF S5-NF S5-GF H5-NF L5-NF E-SF S-SF AC or DC Dial position Code number If the DC version is required, please state so when ordering. The AC S00-CF version is provided S00-NF unless otherwise stated S00-GF when ordering S-CF S-NF S-RF S00-CF S00-NF S00-RF 00 Code number Dial position The instantaneous trip current values shown in the table above are standard settings. Contact us if you require other settings. Notes: q Setting tolerance: ±0% (Please specify the code number). w For AC: The selector dial is factory set to position 1 unless the instantaneous trip current is specified. Setting tolerance: ±0% (Please specify the code number). For DC: The instantaneous trip current cannot be adjusted by the customer. The instantaneous trip current is factory set to the value specified by the customer. Setting tolerance: ±0% (State the version (DC), code number and instantaneous trip current you require). e Common for AC use and DC use. In case of DC use the instantaneous trip current will be about 1. times that of the figures in the table. Setting tolerance ±0% INST TRIP ONLY INST Selector dial Selector dial A Nameplate installed on the magnetic breakers only -

45 Special Breakers Molded Case Circuit Breakers xspecial instantaneous trip breakers 1. High Instantaneous Trip High instantaneous trip breakers are the breakers having a high instantaneous trip pickup current. Use these breakers in order to achieve selective coordination or to provide protection on the primary side of transformer. Category Type (Reference type e) Rated current, A Thermal -Magnetic type q Electronic type w S-GFHS-GF S-NFHS-NF S-GFHS-GF S5-NFHS5-NF S5-GFHS5-GF S00-NEHS00-NE S00-GEHS00-GE S-NEHS-NE S00-NEHS00-NE S0-NEHS0-NE S100-NEHS100-NE XS000NE CT rated current (I CT ), A 00 CT rated current (I CT ), A CT rated current (I CT ), A 00 CT rated current (I CT ), A 0 CT rated current (I CT ), A 100 CT rated current (I CT ), A 000 Instantaneous trip pickup current, A Rated current (I R ), A 0 Rated current (I R ), A 00 Rated current (I R ), A 00 Rated current (I R ), A 000 Rated current (I R ), A 10 Rated current (I R ), A 300 Notes: q Setting tolerance: ±10%. w Setting tolerance: ±0%. e Ratings and specifications, except for the instantaneous trip pickup current, and outline dimensions of the High-Inst breakers are the same as those of the reference breakers enclosed in parentheses. r An optional trip indicator cannot be added. INST HIGH INST A Nameplate of High-Inst breakers Special Breakers -3

46 Special Breakers Molded Case Circuit Breakers xspecial instantaneous trip breakers. Low Instantaneous Trip Low instantaneous trip breakers are the breakers having a low instantaneous trip pickup current. Use these breakers in order to achieve selective coordination with a high-voltage fuse located on the primary side of the breakers. Category Type (Reference type w) Rated current, A Thermal -Magnetic q S-GFLS-GF S-NFLS-NF S-GFLS-GF S5-NFLS5-NF S5-GFLS5-GF Instantaneous trip pickup current, A Notes: q Setting tolerance: ±10%. w Ratings and specifications, except for the instantaneous trip pickup current, and outline dimensions of the Low-Inst breakers are the same as those of the reference breakers enclosed in parentheses. INST LOW INST A Nameplate of Low-Inst breakers -

47 Mounting and Connection 5zType of connections and mountings 5- List of connecting type 5- Connecting parts 5- Plug-in type (PM) 5-1. For switchboards 5-. For distribution boards5-9 xcompression terminals 5-1 cterminal screw sizes and standard torques 5-1 vinsulation distance from the line side 5-0 breverse connection 5- nlists of breaker mounting screws Mounting and Connection 5-1

Mounting and Connection 5Molded Case Circuit Breakers ztype of connections and mountings List of Connecting Types Connecting types (Abbreviation) For compression terminals/flat bars Front-connected

H-NF,H-NF,H5-NF,H5-GE L-NF,L-NF,L5-NF S5-NF,S5-GF S-NF,S-GF S5-NM E-SF,S-SF,S-SN S00-CF,S00-NF,S00-NE S00-GF,S00-GE,S00-PF S00-PE,S00-NN H00-NE,L00-NE S-CF,S-NF,S-NE,S-RF S-RE,S-GN H-NE,L-NE

48 Mounting and Connection 5Molded Case Circuit Breakers ztype of connections and mountings List of Connecting Types Connecting types (Abbreviation) For compression terminals/flat bars Front-connected (FC) With extension bars With cable clamps Rear-connected (RC) Flat bar studs Stud can be turned 5 or Stud can be tured Outer view Breaker S-SF,S-SF,S-SN S-GF,S-NF,S-GF,S-NN S-NF,S-GF,S-NN S-NM H-NF,H-NF,H5-NF,H5-GE L-NF,L-NF,L5-NF S5-NF,S5-GF S-NF,S-GF S5-NM E-SF,S-SF,S-SN S00-CF,S00-NF,S00-NE S00-GF,S00-GE,S00-PF S00-PE,S00-NN H00-NE,L00-NE S-CF,S-NF,S-NE,S-RF S-RE,S-GN H-NE,L-NE S00-CF,S00-NF,S00-NE,S00-RF S00-RE,S00-NN H00-NE,L00-NE Connect compression terminals or flat bars directly to breaker terminals. Extension bars are attached to breaker terminals. Connect compression terminals or flat bars to the extension bars. Cable clamps are attached to breaker terminals. Connect wires directly to cable clamps. Flat bar studs will be factory installed in the horizontal position unless otherwise specified. Flat bar studs in the vertical position are available on request. Please select a position code from those shown in the table below: Position code Position of flat bar studs Line side Load side RC-A Vertical Horizontal RC-B Horizontal Vertical RC-C Vertical Vertical RC-D Horizontal Horizontal Remarks : The studs are horizontal direction only. See pages 5-1 and 5-17 for dimensions and tightening torques of terminal screws. Notes: q. Except -pole breakers. w. May not be applied to or -pole breakers of some types. e. See page 5- for details. r. See page 5- and 5-9 for details. t. TemPlug 5B (PG) is not applicable. 5-

Plug-in (PM) For switchboards 3 Plug-in (PM) For distribution boards 1 Flush Plate (FP) Flat bar studs Draw-out type (DR) TemPlug (PG)(PG) 5 To make connection, push the breaker into the mounting

High-performance models have a safety mechanism that prevents them from being mounted or removed as long as they are in the ON state. Models meeting protection grade IP0 are available as options.

When ordering the products, please specify as IP0 applied products. Plug-in type with front connection suitable for the small depth. Install the mounting frame directly to a panel.

49 Plug-in (PM) For switchboards 3 Plug-in (PM) For distribution boards 1 Flush Plate (FP) Flat bar studs Draw-out type (DR) TemPlug (PG)(PG) 5 To make connection, push the breaker into the mounting base already wired to the main and control circuits. The breaker can be fixed by the mounting screws. High-performance models have a safety mechanism that prevents them from being mounted or removed as long as they are in the ON state. Models meeting protection grade IP0 are available as options. IEC 059 specifies that IP0-compliant devices be designed and constructed so that live parts of the devices cannot be touched by hand. When ordering the products, please specify as IP0 applied products. Plug-in type with front connection suitable for the small depth. Install the mounting frame directly to a panel. Use the flat bar studs in the same manner as for rear-connected breakers. The plate is painted in Munsell 5Y 7/1. To make connection, push the breaker into the draw-out cradle already wired to the main and control circuits. The draw-out cradle has two positions Connected and Isolated. The breakers have a safety mechanism that prevents them from being mounted or removed as long as they are in the ON state. Models meeting protection grade IP0 are available as options. IEC 059 specifies that IP0-compliant devices be designed and constructed so that live parts of the devices cannot be touched by hand. When ordering the products, please specify as IP0 applied products. Simply plugging TemPlug onto the main busbars in a switchboard completes the connection of the breaker to a power distribution line. Use plug-in base mounting screws to secure the breaker. Direct coupling of the plug-in base to the main busbars reduces the lead time involved in completing a power distribution system. If the frame size or rated current of the breakers is changed, all you have to do is to replace the TemPlug. 5 Mounting and Connection : Standard. This configuration used unless otherwise specified. : Optional standard. Specify when ordering. : Semi-standard. : Custom-built. Contact us for details. : no or not available. 5-3

50 5Molded Case Circuit Breakers ztype of connections and mountings List of Connecting Types Breaker Mounting and Connection Connecting types (Abbreviation) Front-connected (FC) For compression terminals/flat bars Bolt studs TB-5S TB-5P (Load side) TB-5D E-SF, E-SF, E-CM S0-NE, S0-GE, S0-NN TL-0NE, TL-NE S100-NE, S100-NN 3 XS000NE, XS000NN 3 Connect compression terminals directly to breaker terminals. With extension bars Stud can be turned Fixed 1 Extension bars are attached to breaker terminals. Connect compression terminals or flat bars to the extension bars. Rear-connected (RC) Flat bar studs Remarks See pages 5-1 and 5-19 for dimensions and tightening torques of terminal screws. Notes: 1. Breakers are mounted on angles.. Flat bar studs will be factory installed in the horizontal position unless otherwise specified. If vertical installation is required, please state when ordering. Position code Position of flat bar studs Line side Load side RC-A Vertical Horizontal RC-B Horizontal Vertical RC-C Vertical Vertical RC-D Horizontal Horizontal 3. Vertical installation only. The breakers can be installed on the panel door using mounting frame supplied as standard. 5. The breakers can be installed on the mounting angle as well as Rear-connected breakers.. See page 5- for details. 5-

51 Plug-in (PM) Draw-out type (DR) Flush Plate (FP) For switchboards For distribution boards Two-position type Three-position type Flat bar studs (Line side) To make connection, push the breaker into the plug-in base cradle already wired to the main and control circuits. Use breaker mounting screws to secure the breaker. Plug-in type with front connection suitable for the small depth. To make connection, push the breaker into the draw-out cradle already wired to the main and control circuits. The draw-out cradle has two positions Connected and Isolated. To make connection, push the breaker into the draw-out cradle already wired to the main and control circuits. The draw-out cradle has three positions Connected, Test and Isolated. The plate is painted in Munsell 5Y 7/1. The breakers have a safety mechanism that prevents them from being mounted or removed as long as they are in the ON state. The breakers are fitted with a safety trip. If an attempt is made to remove the breakers while ON position it will automatically trip. The breakers are fitted with a safety trip. If an attempt is made to remove the breakers while ON position it will automatically trip. Models meeting protection grade IP0 are available as options. IEC 059/JIS C 0 specify that IP0- compliant devices be designed and constructed so that live parts of the devices cannot be touched by hand. : Standard. This configuration used unless otherwise specified. õ : Optional standard. Specify when ordering. : Semi-standard. : Custom-built. Contact us for details. : no or not available. Models meeting protection grade IP0 are available as options. IEC 059/JIS C 0 specify that IP0- compliant devices be designed and constructed so that live parts of the devices cannot be touched by hand. When ordering the products, please specify as IP0 applied products. The auxiliary circuit is connected or isolated automatically through the auxiliary circuit terminals of a plug-in breaker. (When the motor operator is mounted, the auxilary circuit is connected or isolated manually.) Safety shutters are available as option which automatically cover the live parts on the cradle side in the isolated position. The auxiliary circuit is connected or isolated automatically by the disconnector. Connected on CONN and TEST position. Isolated on ISOLATED position. 5 Mounting and Connection 5-5

52 Mounting and Connection 5Molded Case Circuit Breakers ztype of connections and mountings Connecting parts There are the following connecting/mounting hardware available as options: 1. Extension bars for front conection Type Number of poles Applicable breakers Min Constituent parts order qty Extension bar Screw B Screw C TFB1LSH 1/ S-SF Straight extension bars TFB1L3SH TFB1LSB S-SF Straight extension bars 1 TFB1L3SB 3 TFB1LSH 1/ TFB1L3SH 3 S-SF,S-SN Straight extension bars TFB1LSH TFB1LSB TFB1L3SB 3 S-SF,S-SN Straight extension bars 1 TFB1LSB TFB1H S-GF,S-NF,S-GF 1/ TFB13H 3 S-NM,S-NN Straight extension bars TFB1H S-NF,S-GF,S-NN TFB1B S-GF,S-NF,S-GF TFB13B 3 S-NM,S-NN Straight extension bars 1 TFB1B S-NF,S-GF,S-NN H-NF,L-NF TFB5L3WH H-NF,L-NF 1/ Spread extension bars S5-NF,S5-GF,S5-GE,S5-NM,H5-NF,L5-NF 1 TFB5LWH S-NF,S-GF,E-SF,S-SF,S-SN H-NF,L-NF TFB5L3WB 3 H-NF,L-NF Spread extension bars 1 S5-NF,S5-GF,S5-GE,S5-NM,,H5-NF,L5-NF TFB5LWB S-NF,S-GF,E-SF,S-SF,S-SN Remarks TFB5LSH H-NF,L-NF TFB5L3SH 3 H-NF,L-NF 1/ S5-NF,S5-GF,S5-GE,S5-NM Straight extension bars 1 H5-NF,L5-NF 3 3 TFB5LSH S-NF,S-GF,E-SF,S-SF,S-SN TFB5LSB H-NF,L-NF TFB5L3SB 3 H-NF,L-NF S5-NF,S5-GF,S5-GE,S5-NM Straight extension bars 1 TFB5LSB H5-NF,L5-NF S-NF,S-GF,E-SF,S-SF,S-SN 3 TFB0H S00-CF,S00-NF,S00-PF,S00-NN 1/ TFB03H 3 S00-NE,S00-GF,S00-GE,S00-PE Spread extension bars TFB0H H00-NE,L00-NE TFB0B S00-CF,S00-NF,S00-PF,S00-NN TFB03B 3 S00-NE,S00-GF,S00-GE,S00-PE Spread extension bars 1 TFB0B H00-NE,L00-NE See page 5-1 for screws B and C. Note q: Two sets, one for the line side and one for the load side, are required per breaker.. Flat bar stud for rear connection Type Number of poles Applicable breakers Min order qty Constituent parts Stud bar Screw D Screw E Remarks TRP05LS S-SF,S-SF-A 1 TRP05L3S 3 TRP1LS TRP1L3S 3 S-SF,S-SN0-A 1 TRP1LS TRP1S S-GF,S-NF,S-GF 1 TRP13S 3 S-NM,S-NN 1 TRP1S S-NF,S-GF,S-NN TRP5S S5-NF,S5-GF,S5-GE,S5-NM TRP53S 3 1 H5-NF,L5-NF 1 TRP5S S-NF,S-GF TRP5LS 1 TRP5L3S 3 E-SF,S-SF,S-SN 1 TRP5LS TRP53L 3 H-NF,L-NF 1 H-NF,L-NF TRP5L 1 H5-NF,L5-NF TRO03S TRP0S 3 S00-CF,S00-NF,S00-PF,S00-NN S00-NE,S00-GF,S00-GE,S00-PE 1 1 TRP03L 3 1 H00-NE,L00-NE TRP0L 1 See page 5-1 for screws D and E. Note q: The studs can be rotated to four angular positions: 0 (horizontal), 5, (vertical) and 135 degrees. 5-

53 3. Plug-in base Type Number of poles 0 Applicable breakers Min Constituent parts order qty Plug-in base Nut J XDM1- E-SF,E-SF 1 1 XDM1-3 3 E-SF,E-SF,E-CM 1 1 TPM1E3 3 S-GF,S-NF,S-GF,S-NN,S-NF,S-GF,S-NN 1 1 TPM1LT3 3 S-SF,S-SF,S-SN 1 1 S5-NF,S5-GF,S5-GE TPM5E3 3 S-NF,S-GF 1 1 H-NF,L-NF,H-NF,L-NF,H5-NF,L5-NF TPM5LE3 3 E-SF,S-SF,S-SN 1 1 TPM0E3 3 Non S00-CF,S00-NF,S00-NE,S00-NN,S00-GF S00-GE,S00-PF,S00-PE,H00-NE,L00-NE 1 1 TPM0E3 3 S-CF,S-NF,S-NE,S-RF,S-RE,S-GN S00-CF,S00-NF,S00-NE,S00-RF,S00-RE,S00-NN 1 1 TPM0M3 3 H-NE,L-NE,H00-NE,L00-NE 1 1 TPMX3E3 3 S0-NE,S0-GE,S0-NN 1 1 TPMX3E S0-NE,S0-GE 1 1 XDM-3 3 TL-0NE,TL-NE 1 1 Standard XDM- TL-0NE,TL-NE 1 1 XDM1- E-SF,E-SF 1 1 XDM1-3 3 E-SF,E-SF,E-CM 1 1 TPM1LC3 3 S-SF,S-SF,S-SN 1 1 TPM1C3 3 S-GF,S-NF,S-GF,S-NN,S-NF,S-GF,S-NN 1 1 S5-NF,S5-GF,S5-GE TPM5C3 3 S-NF,S-GF 1 1 H-NF,L-NF,H-NF,L-NF,H5-NF,L5-NF TPM5LC3 3 E-SF,S-SF,S-SN 1 1 TPM0C3 3 Compliant S00-CF,S00-NF,S00-NE,S00-NN,S00-GF S00-GE,S00-PF,S00-PE,H00-NE,L00-NE 1 1 TPM0C3 3 S-CF,S-NF,S-NE,S-RF, S-RE,S-GN S00-CF,S00-NF,S00-NE,S00-RF,S00-RE,S00-NN 1 1 TPM0N3 3 H-NE,L-NE,H00-NE,L00-NE 1 1 TPMX3C3 3 S0-NE,S0-GE,S0-NN 1 1 TPMX3C S0-NE,S0-GE 1 1 XDM-3 3 TL-0NE,TL-NE 1 1 XDM- TL-0NE,TL-NE 1 1 TPM1B 1 S-GF,S-NF,S-GF,S-NN TPM1B S-NF,S-GF,S-NN TPM1B 1 S5-NF,S5-GF,S5-GE TPM5B3 3 1 S-NF,S-GF 1 H-NF,L-NF,H-NF,L-NF TPM5B Non 1 H5-NF,L5-NF TPM0B3 3 S00-CF,S00-NF,S00-NE,S00-NN,S00-GF 1 1 TPM0B S00-GE,S00-PF,S00-PE,H00-NE,L00-NE TPM0B3 3 S-CF,S-NF,S-NE,S-RF,S-RE,S-GN 1 S00-CF,S00-NF,S00-NE,S00-RF,S00-RE,S00-NN 1 Highperformance TPM0B H-NE,L-NE,H00-NE,L00-NE 1 TPM1P 1 S-GF,S-NF,S-GF,S-NN TPM1P S-NF,S-GF,S-NN TPM1P 1 S5-NF,S5-GF,S5-GE TPM5P3 3 1 S-NF,S-GF 1 H-NF,L-NF,H-NF,L-NF TPM5P Compliant 1 H5-NF,L5-NF TPM0P3 3 S00-CF,S00-NF,S00-NE,S00-NN,S00-GF 1 1 TPM0P S00-GE,S00-PF,S00-PE,H00-NE,L00-NE 1 TPM0P3 3 S-CF,S-NF,S-NE,S-RF,S-RE,S-GN 1 S00-CF,S00-NF,S00-NE,S00-RF,S00-RE,S00-NN 1 TPM0P H-NE,L-NE,H00-NE,L00-NE 1 See page 5-17 or 5-19 for Nut J. Notes: 1 Please order 1 piece IP cover for 1 piece plug-in base. IP cover codes: IPC1 for poles, IPC13 for 3 poles. When ordering the products, please specify as IP0 applied products.. Flush Plate (with flat bar studs) Type Number of poles TFP1S TFP1S3 3 TFP1S TFP5S3 3 TFP5S TFP5L3 3 TFP5L TFP0S3 3 TFP0S TFP0L3 3 TFP0L Connection q Applicable breakers S-GF S-NF,S-GF,S-NN S-NF,S-GF,S-NN S5-NF,S5-GF S5-GE,S-NF S-GF H-NF,L-NF,H-NF,L-NF H5-NF,L5-NF,H-NF,L-NF S00-CF,S00-NF,S00-GF S00-GE,S00-NN Min order qty Flush plate Molded Flush-mounting frame Constituent parts Stud bar Notes: 1. Possible mounting positions include four angular ones: 0 (horizontal), 5, (vertical) and 135 degrees.. The flash plate is painted in Munsell 5Y 7/1. 3. Use the breaker mounting screws (supplied with the breaker) to secure the breaker in the flush-mounting frame.. Stud bars are not supplied with the flush-mounting frame. See. Studs for rear connection on page 5- to select and order suitable studs. Iron Frame mounting screw Remarks It is recommended to order plug-in base along with breakers. Separately available plug-in base are for the convenience of customers who want to make wiring of the mounts in advance. Panel mounting screw H00-NE,L00-NE Remarks 5 Mounting and Connection 5-7

54 Mounting and Connection 5Molded Case Circuit Breakers ztype of connections and mountings Plug-in type (PM) 1.For switchboards (Standard) Warnig Terminal Warnig Terminal Conductor Conductor Plug-in base Nut Nut Conductor (Not supplied) Terminal bolt Secure the conductor with the correct nut and washer to ensure full contact of conductor with terminal on the plug-in base, so that the steel stud bolt is not used as the current path. Plug-in base Mounting angle (Not supplied) Terminal bolt Secure the conductor with the correct nut and washer to ensure full contact of conductor with terminal on the plug-in base, so that the steel stud bolt is not used as the current path. Auxiliary circuit terminals mounted on breaker body Auxiliary circuit terminals to be mounted on the plug-in base. Mounting angle (Not supplied) Auxiliary circuit terminals mounted on breaker body Terminal leads for internally mounted accessories Lead wires from switchboard Conductor (Not supplied) Auxiliary circuit terminal blocks for XDM are to be mounted on the plug-in base. (High-performance) Plug-in base Conductor (Not supplied) Mounting angle (Not supplied) Auxiliary circuit terminals (See page 9-) 5-

55 . For distribution boards Plug-in base Frame size (A) S-SF S-GF Breaker E-SF, E-SF S-NF, S-GF, S-NN S-SF S-SN No. of poles For double TPM1LD For single TPM1LS For double TPM1LD3 For single TPM1LS3 For double XDAD-3 For single XDAS-3 For double XDA1D- For single XDA1S- For double XDA1D-3 For single XDA1S-3 For double XDAD-3 For single XDAS-3 For double TPM1LD For single TPM1LS For double TPM1LD3 For single TPM1LS3 For double TPM1LD3 For single TPM1LS3 5 Mounting and Connection 5-9

56 Mounting and Connection 5Molded Case Circuit Breakers ztype of connections and mountings Components / Parts to be purchased Breaker E-SF E-CM E-SF S-SF S-SF S-SN S-GF S-NF S-GF S-NN S-NF S-GF S-NN For double For single For double For single For double For single Components / Parts to be purchased Mounting/connecting screws Remarks Name Type Qty Size Qty Remarks Plug-in base XDA1D- M For breaker mounting For -pole breaker Branching bar (thickness) XDA1S-3 1 M For breaker mounting For 3-pole breaker Branching bar 1R-LDt= 1 M51 For busbar connection 3 For 10 A (thickness) 1S-LDt= 1 M For Mounting base installation 1T-LDt= 1 3 1R-LD10t=3 1 M51 For busbar connection 3 For 0 A 1S-LD10t=3 1 M For Mounting base installation 1T-LD10t=3 1 3 Plug-in base TPM1LD M For -pole breaker Branching bar (thickness) TPM1LD3 M For 3-pole breaker S-LDBt= M51 1 For busbar connection 1 M For Mounting base installation RT-LD10Bt=3 M51 For busbar connection For 0 A M For Mounting base installation S-LD10Bt=3 M51 1 For busbar connection 1 M For Mounting base installation Connecting plate Connecting plate (for -pole breaker) 1 M35 Connecting plate D (for 3-pole breaker) 1 M35 Insulator for arc Arc guard PD (for -pole breaker) 1 Arc guard D (for 3-pole breaker) 1 Branching bar barrier Busbar barrier D Plug-in base TPM1LS 1 M For breaker mounting For -pole breaker TPM1LS3 1 M For breaker mounting For 3-pole breaker Branching bar 1R-LDBt= 1 M51 For busbar connection 3 For A (thickness) 1S-LDBt= 1 M For Mounting base installation 1T-LDBt= 1 3 1R-LD10Bt=3 1 M51 For busbar connection 3 For 0 A 1S-LD10Bt=3 1 M For Mounting base installation 1T-LD10Bt=3 1 3 Plug-in base XDAD-3 M55 For breaker mounting For 3-pole breaker Branching bar (thickness) RT-LEt= S-LEt= 1 M51 For busbar connection For 10 A M For Mounting base installation M51 1 For busbar connection M For Mounting base installation RT-LE10t=3 M51 For busbar connection For 0 A M For Mounting base installation S-LE10t=3 M51 1 For busbar connection 1 M For Mounting base installation Connecting plate Connecting plate (for 3-pole breaker) 1 M35 Insulator for arc Arc guard (for 3-pole breaker) 1 Branching bar barrier Busbar barrier E Plug-in base XDAS-3 1 M For breaker mounting For 3-pole breaker Branching bar (thickness) XDA1D-3 M For breaker mounting For 3-pole breaker RT-LDt= S-LDt= M51 1 For busbar connection 1 M For Mounting base installation RT-LD10t=3 M51 For busbar connection For 0 A M For Mounting base installation S-LD10t=3 M51 1 For busbar connection 1 M For Mounting base installation Connecting plate Connecting plate (for -pole breaker) 1 M35 Connecting plate D (for 3-pole breaker) 1 M35 Insulator for arc Arc guard PD (for -pole breaker) 1 Arc guard D (for 3-pole breaker) 1 Branching bar barrier Busbar barrier D Plug-in base XDA1S- 1 M For breaker mounting For -pole breaker RT-LDBt= 1R-LEt= 1 M51 3 1S-LEt= 1 M 1T-LEt= 1 3 1R-LE10t=3 1 M51 3 1S-LE10t=3 1 M 1T-LE10t=3 1 3 M51 For busbar connection For 10 A M For Mounting base installation M51 For busbar connection For A M For Mounting base installation For busbar connection For 10 A For Mounting base installation For busbar connection For 0 A For Mounting base installation Notes: 1. The number required to form either single or double plug-in base for 3-pole construction.. Branch bars for 10 - A and 0 - A differ in thickness only. The conductor for 10 - A ( mm thick) can be used for applications where the breaker rated current is A or less. 5-10

57 Outline dimensions XDA1D-, XDA1S-, XDA1D-3, XDA1S-3 Applicable breaker types E-SF E-CM E-SF XDA1D-, XDA1D-3 (3 poles only for E-CM) M5X0. tapped hole for connection of RT-LD, RT-LD M5X0. tapped hole for connection of RT-LD RT-LD10 ø. mounting holes P Load end terminal M5X0. tapped hole for connection of S-LD, S-LD10 MX0.7 tapped holes for fixing branching bar 175 Insulator for arc Connecting plate 19 M Screw Insulation plate, t = 1. (Not supplied) Branch bar barrier (Installed under branching bar R-LD, RT-LD10) Busbar (Not supplied) Insulation plate, t = 1. (Not supplied) Mounting angle (not supplied) Drilling plan P 5 MX0.7 tapped holes 30 XDA1S-, XDA1S-3 (3 poles only for E-CM) Busbar (Not supplied) Busbar (Not supplied) M5X0. tapped hole for connection of 1R-LD, 1R-LD10 P 5 75 Components / Parts to be purchased 5 M5X0. tapped hole for connection of 1T-LD, 1T-LD10 M5X0. tapped hole for connection of 1S-LD, 1S-LD MX0.7 tapped holes for fixing branching bar ø. mounting holes Load end terminal 19 M screw Insulation plate t = 1. (Not supplied).5 Insulation plate t = 1. (Not supplied) Allow a clearance of 5 mm from the adjacent breaker if optional internally mounted accessories are installed. Branching bar M R RT-LD RT-LD10 M5 1R M R M R M5 1R M R M5 1R 1S-LD M R 1S-LD10 M R M5 1R M5 R Mounting angle (not supplied) Drilling plan P MX0.7 tapped holes Insulator for arc Mounting and Connection 1R-LD 1R-LD10 M R S-LD S-LD10 1T-LD 1T-LD10 Branching bar barrier Connecting plate Screws are not supplied. 5-11

58 Mounting and Connection 5Molded Case Circuit Breakers ztype of connections and mountings Outline dimensions TPM1LD, TPM1LD3, TPM1LS, TPM1LS3 Applicable breaker types S-SF S-SF S-SN TPM1LD, TPM1LD3 M5 0. tapped hole for connection of RT-LDB, RT-LD10B 1 1 M5 0. tapped hole for connection of RT-LDB, RT-LD10B ø. mounting holes P Load end terminal M5 0. tapped hole for connection of S-LDB, S-LD10B M 0.7 tapped holes for fixing branching bar Insulator for arc Connecting plate 5.5 M Screw Insulation plate, t = 1. (Not supplied) Mounting angle (not supplied) Branch bar barrier (Installed under branching bar RT-LDB, RT-LD10B) Busbar (Not supplied) Insulation plate, t = 1. (Not supplied) Drilling plan P 5 M 0.7 tapped holes 30 TPM1LS, TPM1LS3 Busbar (Not supplied) Busbar (Not supplied) M5 0. tapped hole for connection of 1R-LDB, 1R-LD10B P M5 0. tapped hole for connection of 1T-LDB, 1T-LD10B M5 0. tapped hole for connection of 1S-LDB, 1S-LD10B M 0.7 tapped holes for fixing branching bar ø. mounting holes Load end terminal 5.5 M screw Insulation plate t = 1. (Not supplied).5 Insulation plate t = 1. (Not supplied) Mounting angle (not supplied) Drilling plan P M 0.7 tapped holes 5 0 Components / Parts to be purchased Branching bar Insulator for arc M x r RT-LDB RT-LD10B M5 x 1r M x r M x r M5 x 1r M x r S-LDB S-LD10B M5 x 1r 1S-LDB M x r 1S-LD10B M x r M5 x 1r 1R-LDB 1R-LD10B M x r M5 x 1r 1T-LDB 1T-LD10B Branching bar barrier Connecting plate Screws are not supplied. 5-1

59 Outline dimensions XDAD-3, XDAS-3 Applicable breaker types S-GF S-NF S-GF S-NN S-NF S-GF S-NN XDAD-3 10 M5 0. tapped hole for connection of RT-LE, RT-LE10 M5 0. tapped hole for connection of S-LE, S-LE Drilling plan -M Insulator for arc M5 0. tapped hole for connection of RT-LE,RT-LE10 10 M load end terminal R S T M 0.7 tapped holes for fixing branching bar Connecting plate 1 9 Branch bar barrier (Installed under branching bar RT-LE, RT-LE10) Mounting angle 11 (not supplied) XDAS-3 M5 0. tapped holes for connection of 1S-LE,1S-LE10 M5 0. tapped holes for connection of 1R-LE,1R-LE M Load end terminal R S T Components / Parts to be purchased Branching bar M x r RT-LE RT-LE10 M5 x 1r M x r M5 0. tapped holes for connection of 1T-LE, 1T-LE10 M 0.7 tapped holes for fixing branching bar M x r M5 x 1r M x r S-LE S-LE Insulation plate t = 1. (Not supplied) Mounting angle (not supplied) Insulation plate t = 1. (Not supplied) M5 x 1r 1S-LE M x r 1S-LE10 M x r M5 x 1r 1R-LE 1R-LE10 M x r 1T-LE 1T-LE10 M5 x 1r Drilling plan Insulator for arc M Mounting and Connection Branching bar barrier Connecting plate Screws are not supplied. 5-13

60 Frame size (A) Breaker E-SF,S-SF R-5 (R-) Mounting and Connection 5Molded Case Circuit Breakers xcompression terminals Front connected type (without extension bar) Nominal wire size (mm ) R5.5-5 (R5.5-) R-5 (R-) R1-5 NTMCB-5S AMP3311 S-GF S-NF, S-GF, S-NM S-NN R- R5.5- R- R1- R- AMP3 JST3-S NTK-R3--1 NTM3-S H-NF, L-NF E-SF, S-SF, S-SN, S-NN (-A) R-5 (R-) (0-A) R5.5-5 (R5.5-) R-5 (R-) R1-5 NTMCB-5S AMP3311 R- R1- R- AMP3 JST3-S NTM3-S 0-BA Note 3 CB0-0-BA Note 3 H-NF, L-NF R- R5.5- R- R1- R- AMP3 JST3-S NTK-R BA Note 3 CB0- NTM3-S 5 S5-NF, S5-GF, S5-GE, S5-NM H5-NF, L5-NF R3- R0-0-3BA Note 3-3BA Note 3 CB0- S-NF, S-GF, E-SF S-SF, S-SN CB0- CB- 00 S00-CF, S00-NF, S00-NE S00-GF, S00-GE, S00-NN S00-PF, S00-PE H00-NE, L00-NE R3-10 Note R0-10 Note 0-B Note CB0-10 Note -B Note CB-10 Note 0-B Note CB0-10 Note Front connected type (with extension bar) Frame size (A) 5, S5-NF, S5-GF, S5-GE, S5-NM H5-NF, L5-NF S-NF, S-GF, E-SF S-SF, S-SN Breaker Nominal wire size (mm ) R3-10 R0-10 R0-10 R-10 R0-10 CB S00-CF, S00-NF, S00-NE S00-GF, S00-GE, S00-NN S00-PF, S00-PE H00-NE, L00-NE R3-1 R0-1 R0-1 R-1 R0-1 R00-1 JST35-1 S-CF, S-NF, S-NE, S-RF, S-RE S-GN H-NE,L-NE R0-1 RD0-1 R0-1 RD0-1 R-1 RD-1 R0-1 RD0-1 R00-1 RD00-1 JST35-1 SD S00-CF, S00-NF, S00-NE, S00-RF, S00-RE S00-NN H00-NE, L00-NE 0 S0-NE, S0-GE, S0-NN R0-1 RD0-1 R-1 RD-1 R0-1 RD0-1 R00-1 RD00-1 JST35-1 SD TL-0NE R0-1 RD0-1 R-1 RD-1 R0-1 RD0-1 R00-1 RD00-1 JST35-1 SD35-1 TL-NE R0-1 RD0-1 R-1 RD-1 R0-1 RD0-1 R00-1 RD00-1 JST35-1 SD35-1 Notes: q. Commercially made compression terminals can be used (refer to boxes) R/RD : JIS-compliant CB : JEM 1399-compliant AMP : Made by Nippon AMP Co., Ltd. JST : Made by Japan Solderless Terminal Manufacturing Co., Ltd. NTK : Made by Nippon Tanshi Co., Ltd. NTM : Made by Nichifu Terminal Industries Co., Ltd. w. Only a single terminal can be connected. e. Compression terminals in box cells are made by us at Terasaki. They are available from us or our authorized agents. r. Compression terminals enclosed in parentheses are to be used as the lower terminal when two terminals are connected. 5-1

61 Connection (two terminals) If a shortage of insulating occurs between the mounting plate and a terminal, use a recommended taping or insulator. When a single terminal is connected Second terminal when two terminals are connected Terasaki made compression terminals are used (refer to 0-BA 0-3BA 0-B ø9 box) ø1 1.0 ø. ±0.3 ø ± ø1.5 ø ø ø Nominal size engraved Nominal size engraved -3BA.5 ± ø. 0 ±0.5 ø B 0-B ø1 ø1. ø ø1 ø19.5 ø Connection (one electric cable) If a shortage of insulating occurs, use a recommended taping or insulator.. Nominal size engraved 3. Connection (two electric cables) If a shortage of insulating occurs, use a recommended typing or insulator. Nominal size engraved Mounting and Connection Make connection so that the screw heads face toward the mounting surface. Make connection so that the screw heads face toward the mounting surface. 5-

62 Mounting and Connection 5Molded Case Circuit Breakers cterminal screw sizes and standard torques Front connection (FC) Rear connection (RC) (Flat bar stud) Connecting types Screw E Screw B Screw C Screw D Type Screw A Frame size Compression terminal Extension bar Breaker (A) Screw size (A) Torque (N. m) Screw size (B) Torque (N. m) Screw size (C) Torque (N. m) Screw size (D) Torque (N. m) Screw size (E) Torque (N. m) S-SF Wire clamping M Wire clamping M Hex head M Pan head M51.3. Hex head M.7.5 S-GF Pan head M1.9.9 Pan head M1.9.9 Hex head M Hex socket head M Hex head M S-NF,S-GF Pan head M1.9.9 Pan head M1.9.9 Hex head M Hex socket head M Hex head M S-NN S-NM Pan head M1.9.9 Pan head M1.9.9 Hex head M Hex socket head M Hex head M H-NF,L-NF Hex socket head M Hex socket head M Hex head M Hex socket head M Hex head M S-SF Wire clamping M Wire clamping M Hex head M Pan head M51.3. Hex head M.7.5 A S-SF Pan head M1.9.9 Pan head M1.9.9 Hex head M Hex socket head M Hex head M A S-SN Pan head M1.9.9 Pan head M1.9.9 Hex head M Hex socket head M Hex head M S-NF,S-GF Pan head M1.9.9 Pan head M1.9.9 Hex head M Hex socket head M Hex head M S-NN H-NF,L-NF Hex socket head M Hex socket head M Hex head M Hex socket head M Hex head M S5-NF,S5-GF Hex socket head M Hex socket head M Hex head M Hex socket head M Hex head M S5-GE H5-NF,L5-NF S5-NM Hex socket head M Hex socket head M Hex head M Hex socket head M Hex head M E-SF,S-SF S-SN Hex socket head M Hex socket head M Hex head M Hex socket head M Hex head M S-NF,S-GF Hex socket head M Hex socket head M Hex head M Hex socket head M Hex head M S00-CF,S00-NF S00-NES00-GF S00-GE,S00-PF S00-PE,S00-NN Hex socket head M Hex socket head M Hex head M Special hex socket head M 1.9. Hex head M H00-NE,L00-NE Hex socket head M Hex socket head M S-CF,S-NF S-NE,S-RF S-RE,S-GN H-NE,L-NE 00 S00-CF,S00-NF S00-NE,S00-RF S00-RE,S00-NN H00-NE,L00-NE Hex socket head M5 Hex socket head M5 Extension bars are fitted as standard. Extension bars are fitted as standard. Hex head M Hex head M Special hex socket head M107 Special hex socket head M Hex head M Hex head M Wire clamping screw Pan head screw Hex socket head bolt Hex head bolt 5-1

63 Flush Plate (FP) Plug-in (PM) Draw-out (DR) Screw F Nut K Nut J Screw G With flat bar stud Screw size (F) Torque (N. m) Screw size (G) Torque (N. m) Nut size (J) Torque (N. m) Nut size (K) Torque (N. m) Pan head M51.3. Hex head M.7.5 Hex. nut M 3..0 Hex socket head M Hex head M Hex. nut M 3..0 Hex socket head M Hex head M Hex. nut M 3..0 Hex socket head M Hex head M Hex socket head M Hex head M Hex. nut M.1.7 Pan head M51.3. Hex head M.7.5 Hex. nut M 3..0 Hex socket head M Hex head M Hex. nut M 3..0 Hex socket head M Hex head M Hex. nut M 3..0 Hex socket head M Hex head M Hex. nut M 3..0 Hex socket head M Hex head M Hex. nut M.1.7 Hex socket head M Hex head M Hex. nut M.1.7 Hex socket head M Hex head M Hex socket head M Hex head M Hex. nut M Hex socket head M Hex head M Hex. nut M.1.7 Special hex socket head M Hex head M Hex. nut M Hex. nut M Special hex socket head M107 Special hex socket head M Hex head M Hex. nut M Note 1.9. Hex head M Hex. nut M Noto Notes: 1. Connecting method and standard torques are same as plug-in (PM).. Secure the conductor with the correct nut and washer to ensure full contact of conductor with terminal on the plug-in base, so that the steel terminal bolt is not used as the current path. Terminal Conductor Nut Terminal bolt Mounting and Connection 5-17

64 Mounting and Connection 5Molded Case Circuit Breakers cterminal screw sizes and standard torques Front connection (FC) Rear connection (RC) (Flat bar stud) Connecting types Screw A Screw C Screw D Screw E Screw B Type Frame size (A) Breaker TB-5S,TB-5P Pan head M51 Wire clamping screw Compression terminal Extension bar Screw size (A) Torque (N. m) Screw size (B) Torque (N. m) Screw size (C) Torque (N. m) Screw size (D) Torque (N. m) Screw size (E) Torque (N. m).33. TB-5D E-SF E-SF (10A) E-SF (0A) 0 TL-0NE Hex head M Hex head M TL-NE Hex head M Hex head M S0-NE,S0-GE S0-NN 100 S100-NE S100-NN 000 XS000NE XS000NN Pan head M51 Wire clamping screw Pan head M51 Wire clamping screw Hex head M Hex head M Hex head M Hex head M Hex head M Hex head M Note : Terminal screws for 100AF and over are not provided as standard Pan head M

65 Rear connection (RC) (Bolt stud) Plug-in (PM) Draw-out (DR) Screw F Screw K J 1 G Screw size (F) Torque (N. m) Nut size (G) Torque (N. m) Nut size (J) Torque (N. m) Screw size (K) Torque (N. m) Pan head M5 (screw)1.3.5 Pan head M Hex. nut M.7.5 Hex. nut M 3..0 Pan head M Hex. nut M.7.5 Hex. nut M 3..0 Hex head M nut.7.5 Hex. nut M.910. Hex. nut M 3..0 Hex. nut M17 (screw) Hex. nut M17 (screw) Hex. nut M17 (screw) Hex head M Hex head M Note: q. Secure the conductor with the correct nut and washer to ensure full contact of conductor with terminal on the plug-in base, so that the steel terminal bolt is not used as the current path. Terminal Conductor Nut Terminal bolt 5 Mounting and Connection 5-19

66 Mounting and Connection 5Molded Case Circuit Breakers vinsulation distance from the line side The insulation distance between the breaker and earthed metal parts and insulators shown in the table on the next page must be maintained to prevent arcing faults occurring due to conductive ionised gas. In addition, completely cover exposed conductors, to their roots at the breaker or to below the height protected by interpole barriers, on the line side of the breaker using insulation tube or tape, in order to provide positive ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ protection against short circuit or ground fault due to metal chipping, surge voltage, dust particles or salt. Be sure to install the interpole ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ barriers supplied with the breaker. ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ Insulating tube or tape Interpole barrier Exposed conductor Line side Sheathed wire Interpole barrier Compression terminal Load side Insulation plate Top plate (earthed metal) Interpole barrier (Insulation tube or tape is also acceptable) Side plate B1 B B1 B B1 B E A A Insulation tube or tape A D Front connection, terminal screw Front connection, extension bar Rear connection, Plug-in C A. Distance from lower breaker to exposed live part of upper breaker terminal (front connection) or distance from lower breaker to end face of upper breaker (rear connection). B1. Distance from end face of breaker to top plate. B. Distance from end face of breaker to insulation plate. C. Gap between breakers. D. Distance from side of breaker to side plate (earthed metal). E. Dimension of insulation over exposed conductors. 5-0

67 Insulation distance, mm (AC 0 V or less) Note q Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series Economical Standard High-fault Level Current-limiting Motor protection Breaker 1 E-SF E-SF Possible to set close 5 Not less than the length of the bare live part Note 3 E-SF 0 0 Possible to set close Not less than the length of the bare live part Note 3 S-SF 10 Possible to set close 5 Not less than the length of the bare live part Note 3 S-SF 10 Possible to set close 5 Not less than the length of the bare live part Note 3 S-NF S-NF 10 Possible to set close 5 Not less than the length of the bare live part Note 3 S-SF 0 Possible to set close Not less than the length of the bare live part Note 3 S5-NF S-NF 0 Possible to set close Not less than the length of the bare live part Note 3 S00-CF S00-NF S00-NE 0 0 Possible to set close 0 Not less than the length of the bare live part Note 3 S-CF S-NF S-NE S00-CF S00-NF S00-NE 10 0 Possible to set close 0 Not less than the length of the bare live part Note 3 S0-NE Possible to set close 0 Not less than the length of the bare live part Note 3 S100-NE 0 0 Possible to set close Not less than the length of the bare live part Note 3 S-GF S-GF S-GF Possible to set close 5 Not less than the length of the bare live part Note 3 S5-GF S5-GE S-GF 0 0 Possible to set close Not less than the length of the bare live part Note 3 S00-GF S00-GE 0 0 Possible to set close Not less than the length of the bare live part Note 3 S00-PF S00-PE Possible to set close 0 Not less than the length of the bare live part Note 3 S00-RF S00-RF S00-RE S00-RE Possible to set close 0 Not less than the length of the bare live part Note 3 S0-GE 0 0 Possible to set close Not less than the length of the bare live part Note 3 H-NF H-NF H5-NF 0 0 Possible to set close Not less than the length of the bare live part Note 3 H00-NE Possible to set close 0 Not less than the length of the bare live part Note 3 H-NE H00-NE Possible to set close 0 Not less than the length of the bare live part Note 3 TL-0NE TL-NE 0 0 Possible to set close Not less than the length of the bare live part Note 3 L-NF L-NF L5-NF 0 0 Possible to set close Not less than the length of the bare live part Note 3 L00-NE Possible to set close 0 Not less than the length of the bare live part Note 3 L-NE L00-NE Possible to set close 0 Not less than the length of the bare live part Note 3 S-NM 10 Possible to set close 5 S5-NM 0 Possible to set close Not less than the length of the bare live part Note 3 Not less than the length of the bare live part Note 3 Notes: q. Required to allow free and uninterrupted flow of arc gases. Ensure additional clearance or insulation distance if required to perform wiring, barrier installation or electrical work or to meet the need for more insulation distance between bare live parts and grounded metal members in a switchboard or the like. w. The figures are for lower breakers. e. For front connection breakers, insulate all exposed conductors of the line side until the breaker end. If interpole barriers are packed, be sure to use the barriers; more over, insulate all exposed conductors by insulating tape or the like so that the tape overlaps with the barriers.. If using extension bars (optional), ensure the insulation distance specified for the application. 5 Mounting and Connection 5-1

68 Mounting and Connection 5Molded Case Circuit Breakers breverse connection The breakers are available for normal connection by default. Reverse connection is optionally allowed. See the tables below. Breaker AC0V ACV ACV E-SF, E-SF, E-SF S-SF, S-GF, S-NF, S-GF S-NM, S-NN S-SF, S-NF, S-GF S-NN, S-SN H-NF, L-NF H-NF, L-NF S5-NF, S5-GF, S5-GE, S5-NM H5-NF, L5-NF S-SF, S-NF, S-GF, S-SN S00-CF, S00-NF, S00-NE, S00-NN S00-GF, S00-GE, S00-PF, S00-PE H00-NE, L00-NE S-CF, S-NF, S-NE, S-RF S-RE, S-GN S00-CF, S00-NF, S00-NE, S00-RF S00-RE, S00-NN H-NE, L-NE, H00-NE, L00-NE S0-NE, S0-GE, S0-NN S100-NE, S100-NN TB-5S, TB-5P, TB-5D XS000NE, XS000NN TL-0NE, TL-NE ON OFF ON OFF 5-

69 5 Mounting and Connection Molded Case Circuit Breakers nlists of breaker mounting screws Plug-in (PM) for switchboards Series Breaker Number of poles Front-connected (FC) Rear-connected (RC) Standard High-fault Level Screw size Qty Screw size Qty Screw size Qty Screw size Qty Economical E-SF,3 Pan head M35 Pan head M35 Pan head M35 E-SF,3 Pan head M5 Pan head M5 Pan head M5 E-SF,3 Pan head M55 Pan head M55 Pan head M5 Standard S-SF,3 Pan head M1 Pan head M1 Pan head M75 S-GF 3 Pan head M55 Pan head M55 Pan head M5 Pan head M0 Pan head M55 Pan head M55 Pan head M5 Pan head M0 S-NF, S-GF,3 Pan head M55 Pan head M55 Pan head M5 Pan head M0 Pan head M55 Pan head M55 Pan head M5 Pan head M0 S-SF,3 Pan head M1 Pan head M1 Pan head M75 S-NF, S-GF,3 Pan head M55 Pan head M55 Pan head M5 Pan head M0 Pan head M55 Pan head M55 Pan head M5 Pan head M0 S-NM 3 Pan head M55 Pan head M55 S5-NF, S5-GF,3 Pan head M55 Pan head M55 Pan head M5 Pan head M0 S-NF, S-GF Pan head M55 Pan head M55 Pan head M5 Pan head M0 S-SF,3 Pan head M55 Pan head M55 Pan head M5 Pan head M55 Pan head M55 Pan head M5 S5-GE 3 Pan head M Pan head M Pan head M Pan head M1 Pan head M Pan head M Pan head M Pan head M1 S5-NM 3 Pan head M55 Pan head M55 S00-CF, S00-NF S00-GF S00-NE, S00-GE 3, Pan head M Pan head M Pan head M Pan head M10 S00-PF, S00-PE Current limiting Switch disconnector S-CF, S-NF, S-RF S-NE, S-RE S00-CF, S00-NF, S00-RF S00-NE,S00-RE S0-NE,S0-GE S100-NE H-NF, H-NF, H5-NF L-NF, L-NF, L5-NF H00-NE, L00-NE H-NE, L-NE H00-NE, L00-NE S-SN S00-NN S-GN, S00-NN S0-NN S100-NN. Width across flats of hex socket: mm (M10), thread size: M Series Breaker Number of poles 3, Pan head M5 Pan head M5 Cap nut 3, Pan head M Pan head M Cap nut 3, Pan head M Pan head M 3 Pan head M Pan head M Pan head M Pan head M Pan head M Pan head M 3, Pan head M10 Pan head M10 Pan head M10 3, Pan head M5 Pan head M5 Cap nut Pan head M5 3 Pan head M1 Pan head M1 Pan head M0 S-NN, S-NN 3 Pan head M55 Pan head M55 Pan head M5 Pan head M0 Pan head M55 Pan head M55 Pan head M5 Pan head M0 S-SN 3 Pan head M55 Pan head M55 Pan head M55 Pan head M55 Pan head M55 Pan head M55 3, Pan head M Pan head M Pan head M Pan head M10 3, Pan head M5 Pan head M5 Cap nut Pan head M5 3, Pan head M Pan head M Cap nut 3, Pan head M Pan head M Front-connected (FC) Rear-connected (RC) Notes: q. The length of mounting screws may differ from the standard one if the breaker is equipped with external accessories (motor operator, external operation handle, etc.) Consult the operating Instructions of external accessories for details.. Width across flats of hex socket: mm (M10), thread size: M Plug-in (PM) for switchboards Standard Screw size Qty Screw size Qty Screw size Qty Standard XS000NE 3, Hex socket head M1010 Hex socket head M1010 Current limiting TL-0NE,TL-NE 3, Pan head M Pan head M Cap nut Non-automatic trip breaker XS000NN Pan head M5 Pan head M1 Pan head M1 Pan head M10 3, Hex socket head M1010 Hex socket head M Mounting and Connection 5-3

71 Accessories zocr for electronic breakers - 1. TemBreak Electronic OCR-. TemBreak Electronic OCR - xinternally mounted accessories Overview-10. Connection diagrams and terminal numbers Possible combinations -1. Ratings and operation data of auxiliary and alarm switches - 5. Shunt trip device (SHT) -1. Undervoltage trip device (UVT) -17 cexternally mounted accessories Overview-0. Toggle extension (HA) Toggle holder (HH) and toggle lock () -. Motor operators (MC) - 5. External operating handles - (1) Breaker-mounted (field installable)(hb) - () Breaker-mounted (HB)-3 (3) Door-mounted (depth adjustable) (HP) -3 () Door-mounted (depth fixed) (HP) -55. Terminal covers CF/CR/CS -5 (1) CF for front-connected breakers -5 () CR for rear-connected and plug-in breakers CS for front-connected breakers with cable clamps Interpole barriers (BA) -0. Terminal blocks (TF) Mechanical interlock - Slide interlock (MS)- 10. Door Flange (DF) -5 Accessories -1

72 Accessories Molded Case Circuit Breakers zocr for electronic breakers 1. TemBreak Electronic OCR (Standard type) (1) Overcurrent trip characteristics - TemBreak electronic OCR for S00-NE I CT 00 A I R (A) GF ON OFF PICK UP TemBreak OCR Specifications Characteristics Long time, Short time, Instantaneous Preferential trip alarm (PTA) Ground falut trip (GF) Neutral protection (NP) CT rated current Protection (I CT ) poles code 3 A 3 AP A AP AN APN 00 3 A 3 AP 00 3 AG 0 3 APG 0 A 100 AP AN APN AGN APGN 1 TEST IN OCR characteristics for S00-NE Notes: 1. Ground fault trip is not available when (I CT ) is A.. In case of (I R )(I CT ), the setting tolerance becomes big when (I N ) is set at (I R )%. Characteristic No. will be applied as standard setting unless otherwise specified. T 1 3 PTA GF NP 7 5 1, 3 5,,7 R-3-APG/B01 Characteristics No CT rated current : (I CT ) = A, 0, 175, 00, 5 Long time-delay pick-up current (A) : (I R ) CT rated current : (I CT ) = 00A 175, 00, 5,, 0, 3, Long time-delay time settings (s) : (t R ) at 00%(I R ) at 00%(I R ) Setting tolerance ±0% Short time-delay (I R ) pick-up current (A) : (I sd ) Setting tolerance ±% Short time-delay time settings (s) : (t sd ) Total clearing time +ms, resettable time 0ms Instantaneous trip pick-up current (A) : (I i ) (I R )100% Max: (I CT )10% Setting tolerance ±0% Preferential trip alarm Pick-up current (A) : (I p) (I R )0% Setting tolerance ±10% Time-settings (s) : (t Definite time-delay characteristic, 0sec. p) Setting tolerance ±10% Option Ground falut trip Pick-up current (A) : (I g ) (I CT )0% Setting tolerance ±%1 Time-settings (s) : (t g ) Neutral protection Pick-up current (A) : (I N ) Time-settings (s) : (t N ) Difinite time-delay characteristic, 0.sec. Total tripping time +ms, resettable time 0ms. (I R )% or % selectable (t N )=(t R ) Same as Long time-delay time settings I Applicable breakers Frame size (A) Type of breaker 5 S5-GE S00-NE, S00-GE, S00-PE 00 H00-NE, L00-NE S-NE, S-RE, H-NE, L-NE 00 S00-NE, S00-RE, H00-NE, L00-NE 0 S0-NE, S0-GE 100 S100-NE TemBreak electronic OCR allows you to achieve a wide range of protection simply by setting two dials located on the front of the breakers; one for selecting the rated current and the other for selecting a protection characteristic. Coming standard with seven protection characteristics, the OCR provides optimum selective coordination between upstream breakers and downstream breakers and/or loads. (5 protection characteristics for S5-GE) Characteristic 1: For generator protection Characteristics, 3 and : For general feeder protection. The possibility of selecting one from three options makes it easy to achieve selective coordination with upstream or downstream breakers. Characteristics 5, and 7: For motor protection. The selection of the option best suited to motor startup characteristics provides an optimum protection solution to motors. If you require a characteristic which is not available as a preset on our standard electronic protection unit, send us the details and we will program a customized characteristic to your specification. Note: Characteristic is programmable within certain limits. Contact us for details. Tripping Time Time/Current characteristic curves second minute hour , T 5,, Percent Rated Current Ex.S00-NE I p I R t R t p I g Isd t sd t g I i I

73 () Optional OCR functions Pretrip alarm (PTA) The pretrip alarm function causes the alarm LED to flash when the load current exceeds 0% of the rated current (I R ) and, after 0 seconds, provides a contact output (1a). The contact output can be used to provide an alarm. The PTA function uses RMS sensing and hence does not suffer a malfunction due to harmonics. Control power and the OCR controller (supplied by Terasaki) are required to use this function. Note : When the OCR controller is installed on the breaker, the breaker cannot be equipped with a terminal block for connection to the shunt trip device and undervoltage trip device. Specifications of OCR controller Control voltage AC 10 V or AC00 0 V (Rated voltage) Current consumption, VA VA Note : The control voltage must be 5 to 110% of the rated voltage. Please state the rated voltage when ordering. Operating time (s) [t P ] 0 secs (fixed definite time-delay) setting tolerance is ± 10%. Output contact Normally open contact, (1a) Integral lead is standard. length (mm) Resistive load Inductive load Rating of V AC V A (A max) 0V A (A max) contact 0V DC 0W (A max) 10W (A max) Tripped indication Pick-up LED flickers NOTE: the pick-up LED flickers at a higher current than [I P ]. When higher current flows continuously for 0 secs, the contact (1a) automatically resets. OCR controller connection diagram Applicable breakers: S5-GE ON Control power OP1 OP PALc PALa PTA output 1a OFF Note : Separate installation of the OCR controller is not available. Applicable breakers: S00-NE, S00-GE, S00-PE, H00-NE, L00-NE S-NE, S-RE, H-NE, L-NE S00-NE, S00-RE, H00-NE, L00-NE S0-NE, S0-GE, S100-NE OCR controller installed on the breaker ON OFF Control power OS1 OS OP1 OP White Factory wired PALc PALa Red PTA output 1a OCR controller installed external to the breaker ON OFF Control power OS1 OS Lead wire (00 mm long) PALc PALa OP1 OP White Red PTA output 1a Accessories Lead wire ( mm long) Lead wire ( mm long) Note : Standard installation of the OCR controller is on the right side of the breaker. Separate installation is standard for the flush-mounted breakers. -3

74 Accessories Molded Case Circuit Breakers zocr for electronic breakers () Optional OCR functions Mounting dimensions and terminal arrangement of the OCR controller installed on the breaker Applicable breakers: S5-GE ON OFF OP1 OP PALc PALa Outline of the OCR controller installed external to the breaker Applicable breakers: S00-NE, S00-GE, S00-PE H00-NE, L00-NE S-NE, S-RE, H-NE L-NE S00-NE, S00-RE, H00-NE L00-NE S0-NE, S0-GE S100-NE 1 Mounting hole ø.5 Terminal screw M Notes: 1. Tightening torque of terminal screws: N. m. Applicable wire size:.0 mm max S00-NE, S00-GE, S00-PE, H00-NE, L00-NE, S-NE, S-RE S00-NE, S00-RE, H-NE, L-NE H00-NE, L00-NE S0-NE, S0-GE S100-NE, Terminal screw M D A ON OFF OP1 OP OS1 OS Terminal screw M3.5 C B Notes: 1. Tightening torque of terminal screws: N. m. Applicable lead wire size:.0 mm max Ground fault trip (GF) The ground fault trip pickup current is 0% of the CT rated current (I CT ). The GF function provides protection against fire that may be caused by arcing ground fault current. The GF function is not available when I CT is A. Note: Separate type neutral CT is required when the GF function is added to a 3-pole breaker used in a 3-phase, -wire system. Contact us for details. N-phase protection (NP) The NP function is available on -pole breakers and provides protection to the neural conductor in a 3-phase, -wire system against overcurrent. The NP pickup current (I N ) can be selected with 1.0 or 0.5 I R rated current. For S5 and H5, I N is 1.0 I R only. Characteristic of N-phase protection (t N vs I N ) is identical to characteristic of phase protecion (t R vs I R ). -

75 (3) How to change the tripping characteristics The electronic breakers are designed so that their protective functions, i.e., long time delay trip, short time delay trip, instantaneous trip, ground fault trip and pretrip alarm functions, can be adjusted depending on a change in load or layout of power distribution lines. Outer view Front panel of electronic OCR (cover removed) Current rating sticker I CT 00 A I R(A) Characteristics T 1 3 PTA GF NP 7 5 5,,7 175 GF ON 1 1, 3 I OCR Cover OFF PICK UP TEST IN R-3-APG/B01 Replacement sticker storage S5-GE, S00-NE, S00-GE, S00-PE, H00-NE, L00-NE S-NE, S-RE, H-NE, L-NE, S00-NE, S00-RE, H00-NE, L00-NE S0-NE, S0-GE, S100-NE Item Rated current Long time delay trip, short time delay trip, instantaneous trip, ground fault trip, pretrip alarm Turn the breaker to OFF position before changing the settings. Turn the breaker to OFF position before changing the settings. Adjusting procedure 1. Peel the sealing sticker off and remove the cover.. Rotate the I R (A) dial to the desired position using a flatblade screwdriver. I R (A) Take an appropriate current rating sticker and a sealing sticker from the replacement sticker storage.. Peel the existing current rating sticker off and affix the replacement current rating sticker. 5. Reinstall the cover and affix the replacement sealing sticker. 1. Peel the sealing sticker off and remove the cover.. Rotate the Characteristics dial to the desired position using a flatblade screwdriver. 3. Take a sealing sticker from the replacement sticker storage.. Reinstall the cover and affix the replacement sealing sticker. Accessories -5

76 Accessories Molded Case Circuit Breakers zocr for electronic breakers. TemBreak Electronic OCR (1) Overcurrent trip characteristics TemBreak electronic OCR for XS000NE Applicable breakers T I1 T1 IG I TG T I3 I1 I I1 I3 ICT IG ICT T1 T TG I1 T I1 IP I1 Frame size (A) 0 TL-0NE TL-NE 000 XS000NE Type of breaker Standard Protective Characteristics The electronic type TemBreak incorporates an adjustable long time-delay, short timedelay and instantaneous trips, enabling coordination with fuses on the high voltage side and down stream breakers. Adjustable LTD Essential for general industrial plants and generator protection Ramp Characteristic [I t], STD The ramp characteristic [I t] enables precise co-ordination with thermal magnetic MCCBs or fuses. The ramp characteristic or the definite time-delay characteristic can be used by operating the OFF-ON switch (on for[i t] ramp characteristic). The definite time-delay characteristic is 0% of the rated current [I 1 ] OCR characteristics for XS000NE CT rated current (A) (I CT ) Long time-delay pick-up current (A) (I 1 ) Long time-delay time settings (S) (T 1 ) Short time-delay pick-up current (A) (I ) Short time-delay time settings (S) (T ) Instantaneous trip pick-up current (A) (I 3 ) Pre-trip alarm pick-up current (A) (I P ) (optional) Pre-trip alarm time setting (S) (T P ) (optional) Ground fault trip pick-up current (A) (I G ) (optional) ^ Ground fault trip-time setting (S) (T G ) (optional) ^ 000 0,, 100, 100,, 000 ( ) at (I 1 ) x 00% current Setting tolerance ±0% (I 1 ) x 00, 00, 00, 00, 0% Setting tolerance ± % Opening time (0.1, 0., 0., 0.5, 0.3) in the definite time-delay. Total clearing time is +ms and resettable time 0ms for the time-delay settings Continuously adjustable from (I CT ) x 0 ~ %. Setting tolerance ±0% (I 1 ) x, 0,, % Setting tolerance ±10% 0 fixed definite time-delay. Setting tolerance ±10% Continuously adjustable from (I CT ) x 10 ~ 0% Setting tolerance ±% Opening time (0.1, 0., 0.3, 0., 0.) in the definite time- delay. Total clearing time is +ms and resettable time 0ms for the time-delay settings NOTE: The underlined values will be applied as standard ratings unless otherwise specified when ordering Tripping Time t Time/Current characteristic curves Standard Fuse Standard MCCB I t OFF Fuse on high voltage side Ramp characteristic I t ON Current i -

77 () Optional OCR functions Pretrip alarm (PTA) The pretrip alarm function causes the alarm LED to flash when the load current exceeds the pre-set current value and, after 0 seconds, provides a contact output (1a). The contact output can be used to provide an alarm. The PTA function uses RMS sensing and hence does not suffer a malfunction due to harmonics. Control power and the OCR controller (supplied by Terasaki) are required to use this function. PTA specifications Pick-up current (A) [I P ] Adjustable steps of, 0,, % of the selected rated current [I 1 ]. Setting tolerance ± 10% Note: The long time-delay trip does not operate first when the pick-up current is adjusted to % of the rated current [I 1 ]. PTA Characteristics PTA characteristics IP I1 Operating time (s) [T P ] 0 secs (fixed definite time-delay) setting tolerance is ± 10%. Output contact Normally open contact, (1a) Integral lead is standard length (mm) Resistive load Inductive load Rating of V AC V A (A max) 0V A (A max) contact 0V DC 0W (A max) 10W (A max) Tripped indication Pick-up LED flickers Note : the pick-up LED flickers at a higher current than [I P ]. When higher current flows continuously for 0 secs, the contact (1a) automatically resets. Tripping time (s) LTD characteristic curve PTA pick-up current setting range OCR controller (PTA and trip indication) 0 The OCR controller is installed in the left hand of the breaker (standard). This can also be installed externally to the breaker (please specify when ordering). 0 % X [I 1 ] Specifications of OCR controller Control voltage AC - 10 V or AC00-0 V (Rated voltage) Current consumption, VA VA Note : The control voltage must be 0 to 110% of the rated voltage. Please state the rated voltage when ordering. Outline of the OCR controller installed external to the breaker OCR controller connection diagram OCR controller installed on the breaker ON OCR controller installed external to the breaker Lead wire (00 mm long) ON Mounting hole ø.5 1 Red White OP OP1 Factory wired Control power OS OS1 OFF PALc PALa PTA output 1a Lead wire ( mm long) OP OP1 White Red Control power OS OS1 OFF PALc PALa PTA output 1a Lead wire ( mm long) Mounting dimensions and terminal arrangement of the OCR controller installed on the breaker Accessories A 1 Dimension table (mm) 9 Terminal screw M OCR controller Terminal screw M3.5 ON OP OP1 OS OFF OS1 1 B Type of MCCB TL-0NE TL-NE 51 XS000NE 5 With UVT contoroller Without UVT contoroller Support 59 Remarks 1): Standard torque for the terminal screws M ~1.N.m ): Connected cable size Max..0mm -7

78 Accessories Molded Case Circuit Breakers zocr for electronic breakers () Optional OCR functions Ground fault trip (GF) The ground fault trip pickup current is 10 to 0% of the CT rated current (I CT ). The GF function provides protection against fire that may be caused by arcing ground fault current. Note that a separate type neutral CT is required when the GF function is added to a 3-pole breaker used in a 3-phase, -wire system. Contact us for details. GF Specifications GF characteristics Pick-up current (A): [I G ] Continuously adjustable from 10 to 0% of the rated CT current [I CT ]. Setting tolerance ±% I G X I CT Time-delay (S) [T G ] The GFT has a definite time-delay characteristic and is adjustable in steps of 0.1, 0., 0.3, 0. and 0.s. 0.3 Total clearing time is +ms and resettable time is 0ms for the pre-set timedelay Tripping time (s) GFT pick-up current setting range 0.1 T G SEC Trip indicators The LEDS, when lit, indicate which trip function tripped the breaker; Long time-delay (LTD), short time-delay/instantaneous (ST/INST) or ground fault (GF) (control power required) If a pre-trip alarm (PTA) is fitted, the LED control power can be used (common). See page -7 for PTA. This is not applicable to high instantaneous trip breakers (See page -3) %x (I CT ) Trip indicator display Reset button pushed to turn off the LED LED for LT tripped indication RESET LED for ST/INST tripped indication LED for GF tripped indication TRIP INDICATORS T I 1 T 1 I G I T G CT RATED CUR. I ct 000 A TEST IN T I3 5 T 1 LONG TIME 100 CUR SETTING 0 I 1 RATED CUR.(A) TIME SETTING PICK UP SHORT TIME I I 1 INSTANTANEOUS GROUND FAULT x I 3 xi CT I G x I CT 0. SHORT TIME I 0.3 t SEC T SEC OFF ON T G SEC at x I 1 T SEC at 10 x I Example XS000NE -

79 (3) How to chanege the tripping characteristics The electronic breakers are designed so that their protective functions, i.e., long time delay trip, short time delay trip, instantaneous trip, ground fault trip and pretrip alarm functions, can be adjusted depending on a change in load or layout of power distribution lines. Outer view 000A Cover Sealing sticker Replacement sticker storage Current rating sticker Front panel of electronic OCR (cover removed) T I1 T1 IG I T TG I3 CT RATED CUR. Ict 000 A TEST IN LONG TIME SHORT TIME INSTANTANEOUS GROUND FAULT 100 CUR SETTING I1 RATED CUR.(A) I xi1 I3 Ict IG Ict PRE TRIP ALARM SHORT TIME I t TIME SETTING T1 SEC T SEC OFF ON TG SEC IP xi1 at x I1 T SEC at 10 x I1 PICK UP Ex.: XS000NE Item Rated current Long time delay trip, short time delay trip, instantaneous trip, ground fault trip, pretrip alarm Turn OFF the breaker before changing the settings. Turn OFF the breaker before changing the settings. Adjusting procedure 1. Peel the sealing sticker off, loosen the cover mounting screws and remove the cover.. Rotate the RATED CUR. (A) dial using a flatblade screwdriver so that the black points on the dial point the desired position. LONG TIME 100 CUR. 100 SETTING Black point I1 RATED CUR.(A) (Ex.: XS000NE) 3. Take an appropriate current rating sticker and a sealing sticker from the replacement sticker storage.. Peel the existing current rating sticker off and affix the replacement current rating sticker. 5. Reinstall the cover and affix the replacement sealing sticker. 1. Peel the sealing sticker off, loosen the cover mounting screws and remove the cover.. Rotate the desired dial using a flatblade screwdriver so that the black points on the dial point the desired position. The instantaneous trip and ground fault trip pickup current can be continuously adjusted. 3. Take a sealing sticker from the replacement sticker storage.. Reinstall the cover and affix the replacement sealing sticker. Accessories -9

Accessories Molded Case Circuit Breakers xinternally mounted accessories 1. Overview The following internally mounted accessories are available.

Alarm switch Provides an electrical indication that the breaker is in a tripped state. Auxiliary switch Provides an electrical indication that the breaker is in a ON or OFF state.

This device can also be used to trip the breaker open from a remote location. Caution: Combined use of SH and UV is not available.

ending manner for front-connected, rear-connected and flush-mounted breakers. Lead wires from accessories are derived vertically, thereby enabling contact mounting.

80 Accessories Molded Case Circuit Breakers xinternally mounted accessories 1. Overview The following internally mounted accessories are available. See the tables of possible combinations of internally mounted accessories on pages -1 to -1 for the number of accessories that can be installed per breaker and their locations. Alarm switch Provides an electrical indication that the breaker is in a tripped state. Auxiliary switch Provides an electrical indication that the breaker is in a ON or OFF state. Shunt trip device Electrically trips the breaker open from a remote location. Undervoltage trip device AL AX SH UV Trips the breaker open when the voltage of the power distribution line lowers. This device can also be used to trip the breaker open from a remote location. Caution: Combined use of SH and UV is not available. Termination or ending of lead wires from accessories There are three manners in which lead wires from accessories are ended or terminated, as shown below: Lead wires are open: Standard lead wire ending manner for front-connected, rear-connected and flush-mounted breakers. Lead wires from accessories are derived vertically, thereby enabling contact mounting. Lead wire specifications accessory Grade Size Finished OD Length Color SH Heat 0.5mm 3mmø 0mm Black UV resistant 3mmø 0mm Black AX 1.mmø 0mm Gray AL 1.mmø 0mm Black Lead wires are terminated in a terminal block: Optional lead wire termination manner for front-connected and rear-connected breakers. There are two types of terminal blocks available depending on the direction in which lead wires are derived; vertical and horizontal. See pages -1 to -7 for details. Lead wires are ended at auxiliary circuit (self-engaging) terminals: Standard lead wire ending manner for plug-in breakers. See pages 9- and 9-7 for the standard arrangement of auxiliary circuit terminals. Contact us for other arrangements. -10

81 Accessories Molded Case Circuit Breakers xinternally mounted accessories. Connection diagrams and terminal numbers Accessory Combination symbol Connection diagram and terminal No. Remarks Shunt trip device (SH) With anti-burn switch Without anti-burn switch C1 C Applicable to E-SF, E-SF, E-CM, TL-0NE and TL-NE. Shunt trips are fitted with anti-burn switches. Applicable to other breakers except above breakers. Shunt trips are continuous rating without anti-burn switches. Undervoltage trip device (UV) For AC With UVT controller controller For DC Applicable to E-SF, E-SF, TL-0NE and TL-NE. UVT controller is required for AC UVT. See page -1 for the details. D1 D Applicable to other breakers except above breakers. 1/AXb1 1/AXa1 1pc Aux. SW installed. 11/AXc1 1/AXb1 1/AXa1 /AXb /AXa Auxiliary switch (AX) 11/AXc1 1/AXc 1/AXb1 1/AXa1 /AXb /AXa 3/AXb3 3/AXa3 /AXb /AXa 11/AXc1 1/AXc 31/AXc3 1/AXc AXb1 AXa1 AXb AXa AXb3 AXa3 AXb AXa AXb5 AXa5 AXb AXa pcs Aux. SW installed. pcs Aux. SW installed. pcs Aux. SW installed. AXc1 AXc AXc3 AXc AXc5 AXc Applicable to E-SF, E-SF and E-CM 9/ALb1 9/ALa1 TRIP 1pc Alarm. SW installed. 91/ALc1 Alarm switch (AL) 9/ALb1 9/ALa1 TRIP 91/ALc1 0/ALb 0/ALa TRIP 01/ALc pcs Alarm. SW installed. Available for S-SF, S-SF, S, S00, S0 and S100 Applicable to E-SF, E-SF and E-CM Accessories -11

82 Accessories Molded Case Circuit Breakers xinternally mounted accessories 3. Possible combinations Molded Case Circuit Breakers Economical series E5-NF E-SF Standard series S-SF S-SF S-SF S-SF S-NF S-NF S-NF S-NF S5-NF S-NF S-SF S00-CF S00-NF S00-NE S-CF S-NF S-NE S00-CF S00-NF S00-NE S0-NE S100-NE Type High-fault level series S-GF S-GF S-GF S5-GF S5-GE S-GF S00-GF S00-GE S00-PF S00-PE S-RF S-RE S00-RF S00-RE S0-GE Current limiting series H-NF H-NF H5-NF H00-NE H-NE H00-NE Current limiting series L-NF L-NF L5-NF L00-NE L-NE L00-NE Motor protection series S-NM S5-NM Number of poles q AX AL SH UV AX Combinations of accessories AL AX SH AX UV AL SH AL UV AX AL SH AX AL UV Notes: q: The two-pole type breaker obtained by modifying a three-pole breaker by removing the conductive part of its central pole is regarded as the same as the three-pole type. -1

83 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Economical series Standard series E-SF E-SF E-SF E-SF XS000NE Molded Case Circuit Breakers Motor protection series E-CM Type Number of poles 3 AX Type High-fault level series AL Current limiting series TL-0NE TL-NE SH UV Number of poles q AX AX AL SH UV Combinations of accessories AL AX SH AX UV AL SH AX AL Combinations of accessories AL AX SH AX UV AL SH AL UV UV AX AL SH AX AL UV AX AL SH AX AL UV Notes: q : The two-pole type breaker obtained by modifying a three-pole breaker by removing the conductive part of its central pole is regarded as the same as the three-pole type. For the four-pole type, also see the column for the three-pole type. w : A breaker with AC UVT is provided with an external UVT controller. See page -1. Accessories -13

84 Accessories Molded Case Circuit Breakers xinternally mounted accessories 3. Possible combinations Molded Case Circuit Breakers Switch disconnectors Molded Case Circuit Breakers Non-automatic breakers Type S-SN S-NN S-NN S-SN S00-NN S-GN S00-NN S0-NN S100-NN Type XS000NN Number of poles Number of poles 3 AX AX AL AL SH SH UV UV Combinations of accessories AX AL AX SH AX UV AL Combinations of accessories AX AL AX SH AX UV AL SH SH AL UV AL UV AX AX AL AL SH SH AX AL UV AX AL UV Notes: w : A breaker with AC UVT is provided with an external UVT controller. See page

85 . Ratings and operation data of auxiliary and alarm switches (1) Ratings of AX and AL The applicable load of the switch shall be no larger than the rating and no smaller than the minimum load. E5-NF E-SF S-SF S-SF S-GF S-NF,S-GF S-NF, S-GF S5-NF, S5-GF S5-GE S-NF, S-GF S00-CF, S00-NF S00-GF, S00-GE S00-PF, S00-PE S-CF, S-NF, S-RF S-NE, S-RE S00-CF, S00-NF, S00-RF S00-NE, S00-RE S0-NE S100-NE S-SF H-NF, L-NF H-NF, L-NF H5-NF, L5-NF H00-NF, L00-NE H-NE, L-NE H00-NE, L00-NE S-NM S5-NM S-SN S-SN S-NN S-NN S00-NN S-GN S00-NN S0-NN S100-NN E-SF, E-SF, E-CM Type of breaker Voltage (V) AC (V) Current (A) Resistive load Inductive load Standard For microload 1 DC (V) DC (V) Current (A) Minimum Current (A) load Voltage (V) Resistive load Inductive load DCV ma DCV ma DCV 5mA Voltage (V) Resistive load Minimum load DC5V 1mA DCV 5mA DCV 1.5mA XS000NE TL0-NE, TL-NE XS000NN Note: 1 This is a custom-made product. When ordering for this product, specify that it is intended for minute load use. Note: The inductive load means power factor of no smaller than 0. and time constant of no larger than 7 ms. DC5V 10mA DCV.7mA 0.1 DC5V 1mA DCV 1mA Accessories () Operation of AX and AL Switch Breaker status [ON] [OFF] [TRIP] Auxiliary switch (AX) status 1/AXb 1/AXa 91/AXc 11/AXc-1/AXa Closed 11/AXc-1/AXb Open 11/AXc-1/AXa Open 11/AXc-1/AXb Closed 11/AXc-1/AXa Open 11/AXc-1/AXb Closed Alarm switch (AL) status 9/ALb 9/ALa TRIP 91/ALc-9/ALa Open 91/ALc-9/ALb Closed 91/ALc-9/ALa Open 91/ALc-9/ALb Closed 91/ALc-9/ALa Closed 91/ALc-9/ALb Open 91/ALc -

86 Accessories Molded Case Circuit Breakers xinternally mounted accessories 5. Shunt trip device (SH) Ratings of SHT Type of breaker E5-NF E-SF S-GF, S-SF S-NF, S-GF S-NF, S-GF S-SF S5-NF, S5-GF S5-GE S-NF, S-GF S-SF S00-CF, S00-NF S00-GF, S00-GE S00-PF, S00-PE S-CF, S-NF, S-RF S-NE, S-RE S00-CF, S00-NF, S00-RF S00-NE, S00-RE S0-NE, S0-GE S100-NE H-NF, L-NF H5-NF, L5-NF H-NF, L-NF H00-NE, L00-NE H-NE, L-NE H00-NE, L00-NE S-NM S5-NM S-NN S-SN S-SN S00-NN S-GN S00-NN S0-NN S100-NN Rated voltage Peak exciting current, A AC (V) DC (V) E-SF, E-SF, E-CM Type of breaker Rated voltage Peak exciting current, A AC (V) DC (V) XS000NE, XS000NN (AC00-0V) 0.93 (AC-0V) TL0-NE, TL-NE Notes: : Exclusive use for 00V class and 00V class. (1) The permissible voltage range is from 5% to 110% of the rated voltage for AC or 75% to % thereof for DC. Ensure that the voltage does not drop exceeding the permissible voltage range when SHT is actuated. () Breaker contacts usually start opening within ms after the rated voltage is applied to the breaker. -1

87 . Undervoltage trip device (UV) Ratings of UVT with Inst Type of breaker S-GF S-NF, S-GF S-NF, S-GF S5-NF, S5-GF S5-GE S-NF, S-GF S00-CF, S00-NF S00-NE S00-GF, S00-GE S00-PF, S00-PE H-NF, L-NF H-NF, L-NF H5-NF, L5-NF H00-NE, L00-NE S-NM S5-NM S-NN S00-NN S-SF, S-SF, S-SN E-SF, S-SF, S-SN Note: 1: No UVT controller is required. Rated voltage Power supply capacity, VA 1 Exciting current, ma 1 AC (V) DC (V) S-CF, S-NF, S-RF S-NE, S-RE S00-CF, S00-NF, S00-RF S00-NE, S00-RE S0-NE, S0-GE S100-NE H-NE, L-NE H00-NE, L00-NE S-GN S00-NN S0-NN S100-NN Note: 1: No UVT controller is required. E-SF, E-SF XS000NE, XS000NN TL0-NE, TL-NE Type of breaker Type of breaker Rated voltage Rated voltage Notes: 1: No UVT controller is required. : Equipped with the UVT controller. See page -1 for specifications of the UVT controller. Power supply capacity, VA 1 Exciting current, ma 1 AC (V) DC (V) Power supply capacity, VA Exciting current, ma 1 AC (V) DC (V) min 5 min 5 min min 5 min 5 min.7 5 min 5 min 5 min.7 Accessories -17

88 Accessories Molded Case Circuit Breakers xinternally mounted accessories. Undervoltage trip device (UV) UVT controller See pages -17 for the breakers on which the UVT controller is installed. A breaker equipped with the AC UVT need a UVT controller. The UVT controller is installed on the breaker by default. Separate installation of the controller is also available on request. If the breaker is of flush-mounted (FP) type, the UVT controller is separately installed by default. Also a UVT controller (type XCU1D) with a time delay of less than 0 ms is available on request. UVT controller connection diagram UVT controller installed on the breaker UVT controller installed external to the breaker Breaker or fuse Line side Breaker or fuse Line side ON ON UVT controller P P1 UC OFF UC1 UVT controller Note: If the UVT controller is installed on the breaker, terminals UC1 and UC are factory wired. P P1 UC UC1 Lead wire ( mm long) OFF Mounting dimensios and terminal arrangement of the UVT controller installed on the breaker Outline of the UVT controller installed external to the breaker 0 A UVT controller terminal screw M3.5 1 ON OFF 1 Mounting hole ø P P1 UC UC1 UC1 UC P1 P B UVT controller 1 terminal screw M3.5 C (E-SF only) 1 7. Mounting dimensions 10 Frame size (A) Type of breaker A B C E-SF E-SF TL-0NE,TL-NE XS000NE,XS000NN Notes: 1. Dimension A shown in parentheses "( )" are the case fitted with OCR controller.. Tightening torque of terminal screws: N. m 3. Applicable wire size:.0 mm max Terminal screw M Support -1

89 . Undervoltage trip device (UV) UVT with time delays for TemBreak TemBreak UVT are available with 0±0 msec time delays. UVT controller is installed on the breaker. Rating of UVT with time delay S-GF, S, S-NF, S-GF, S-NN, E, S5, S-NF, S-GF, H, H, H5, L, L, L5, S00, H00, L00 S-SF, S-SF, S-SN E-SF, S-SF, S-SN Rated voltage Time delays: 0±0 msec. Power supply capacity, VA Exciting current, ma AC (V) DC (V) S, S00, H, L, H00, L00, S0, S100 Rated voltage Power supply capacity, VA Exciting current, ma AC (V) DC (V) Mounting dimensios and terminal arrangement of the UVT controller installed on the breaker S-GF, S, S-NF, S-GF, S-NN P,, S-SF, S-SF, S-SN P,, 3 55 S5, S-NF, S-GF (except S5-GE), E-SF, S-SF, S-SN, S5-GE H, H1 H5, L, L, L5 S00, H00, L00, S, S00, H, L, H00, L00, The UVT controller is installed in the right hand side of the breaker D A S S The UVT controller is installed in the left hand side of the breaker A D ON OFF D1 D C UVT controller Terminal screw M3.5 B B 0 UVT controller Terminal screw M C D1 D ON OFF Accessories Notes: 1. Tightening torque of terminal screws: N. m. Applicable lead wire size:.0 mm max Notes: 1. Tightening torque of terminal screws: N. m. Applicable lead wire size:.0 mm max -19

extension uterminal cover (for rear-connected and plug-in breakers) qmotor operator uterminal cover (for front-connected breakers) Motor operator MC Allows electrical operation (closing, opening and

90 Accessories Molded Case Circuit Breakers cexternally mounted accessories 1. Overview wexternal operating handle (door-mounted, depth adjustable) wexternal operating handle (breaker-mounted) iinterpole barrier ttoggle holder ytoggle lock rmechanical interlock etoggle extension uterminal cover (for rear-connected and plug-in breakers) qmotor operator uterminal cover (for front-connected breakers) Motor operator MC Allows electrical operation (closing, opening and resetting) of the breaker. External operating handle Allows the breaker installed in a switchboard or box to be operated from outside. Breaker-mounted HB The handle is mounted directly on the breaker. Door-mounted (depth adjustable) HP The handle is coupled to the breaker through a shaft. Toggle extension Lessens the force require to close, open or reset the breaker. (Applicable to breakers with a frame size of 00A or larger) Mechanical interlock Provides an interlock that allows one of two breakers to be closed. Slide type HA MS Toggle holder HH Holds the breaker on or off when simply fitted onto the breaker toggle. Toggle lock Allows the breaker to be locked on or off with commercially available padlocks. Terminal cover Prevents live parts of the breaker from being exposed. For front-connected breakers For rear-connected and plug-in breakers For front-connected breakers with cable clamps Interpole barrier BA Enhances electrical insulation between poles and prevents shortcircuit due to electrically conductive foreign matter. Terminal block Terminates lead wires from internally mounted accessories. Door flange DF Is intended to cover the cutout of a switchboard panel from the front. DIN rail adaptor Allows the breaker to be mounted on DIN rails. CF CR CS TF -0

91 . XHA9B, THA0 XHA lock pin lock pin Frame size (A) Type of breaker S-CF, S-NF, S-NE S-RF, S-RE S-GN, H-NE, L-NE S00-CF, S00-NF, S00-NE S00-RF, S00-RE S00-NN, H00-NE, L00-NE TL-0NE TL-NE S0-NE, S0-GE, S0-NN 100 S100-NE, S100-NN 000 XS000NE, XS000NN 3 Note: 1 Optional. Specify when ordering. One is supplied with every five breakers. Please specify if more are required. 3 Supplied as standard. 1 1 Toggle extension Order codes THA0 THA0 XHA9B THA0 XHA10 Mounting and Removal Pull lock pins out left and right in direction of the arrows, and slot the toggle extension in place. The lock pins are spring loaded. Removal-Pull out left and right hand lock pins and hold while removing. Accessories -1

92 Accessories Molded Case Circuit Breakers cexternally mounted accessories 3. Toggle holder (HH) and toggle lock () Toggle holder (HH) Simply fitting the toggle holder onto the breaker toggle disables breaker operation without using padlocks. Toggle lock () The toggle lock is a tool that locks the breaker on or off. When an overcurrent occurs, the breaker will trip even if the breaker toggle is locked in the ON position. (Use commercially available padlocks). Toggle holders/toggle locks Frame size (A) Type of breaker Toggle holder Toggle lock Figure Order codes Marking codes Order codes Marking codes Figure S-SF THH5L THH5L 1 T5L T5L S-NF S-GF, S-GF H-NF L-NF THH5 THH5 1 T5 T5 S-NM S-NN S-NF, S-NN THH5 THH5 1 T5 T5 S-SF, S-SN THH5L THH5L 1 T5L T5L S-GF H-NF THH5 THH5 1 T5 T5 L-NF 5 E5-NF S5-NF S5-GF, S5-GE H5-NF L5-NF S5-NM S-NF E-SF, S-SF, S-SN S-GF 00 E00-NF S00-CF, S00-NF S00-NE S00-GF, S00-GE S00-PF, S00-PE H00-NE L00-NE S00-NN S-CF, S-NF S-NE, S-RF, S-RE H-NE L-NE S-GN 00 S00-CF, S00-NF S00-NE, S00-RF, S00-RE H00-NE L00-NE S00-NN 0 S0-NE S0-GE S0-NN 100 S100-NE S100-NN TB-5S, TB-5P TB-5D THH5 THH5 1 T5 T5 THH5 THH5 1 T5 T5 THH5L THH5L 1 T5L T5L THH5 THH5 1 T5 T5 T0 T0 T0 T0 3 T0 T0 3 T0 3 T0 T0 3 T0 3 T0 T0 3 TX XKC9 l= TX XKC9 l= TX XKC9 l= TX XKC9 l= for 1PTKB-SGH TAA-5CR for PTAA-5SH for TAA-53SH for 1PTKB-SGH TAA-5CR for PTAA-5SH for TAA-53SH 7a TKB-SG TKB-SG 5 7b E-SF, E-SF, E-CM TKB-1DH 0 TL-0NE XKC9 XKC9 l= XKC9 XKC9 l= TL-NE XKC9 XKC9 l= XKC9 XKC9 l= 000 XS000NE XS000NN XKC10 XKC10 l=9 XKC10 XKC10 l=9 Notes: 1. Same as toggle lock.. Order codes shown in parentheses ( ) are toggle caps. The colour is Red. 3. A hole must be drilled in the breaker toggle. Please state with toggle lock () when ordering. -

93 Fig. 1 Red Fig. Red ø5 Padlock Up to three padlocks can be used Fig. 3 Red Fig. Red ø5 ø O N OFF Padlock Up to three padlocks can be used Fig. 5 Red.5ø Lock plate Padlock Up to three padlocks can be used Fig. Green O N OFF Length to the lever tip ø or less Padlock Up to three padlocks can be used O N Lock lever Toggle holder (HH): Make sure the lock lever of the toggle holder is in the UNLOCK position, fit the toggle holder onto the toggle and swing the lock lever to the LOCK position. The toggle is now locked on or off. Toggle lock (): Padlock the toggle in the ON or OFF position. Accessories Fig. 7 (a) (b) Red -3

Select lever Lock plate Manual charging point ON button TRIP button Voltage presence LED indication (TMC1 / TMC5) (TMC0 / TMC0) Ratings and Specifications Type of breaker Rated operational voltage 1

94 Accessories Molded Case Circuit Breakers cexternally mounted accessories. Motor operators (MC) -1. TemBreak Motor driven type Spring charged type Key lock (optional) Manual charging lever Voltage presence LED indication Operating handle ON/OFF+TRIPPED indicator Key lock (optional) Lock plate Select lever Lock plate Manual charging point ON button TRIP button Voltage presence LED indication (TMC1 / TMC5) (TMC0 / TMC0) Ratings and Specifications Type of breaker Rated operational voltage 1 Peak steady-state/ AC00-0V starting current, A AC-0V DCV DCV DC-110V DC00-0V TMC1 TMC5 TMC5L TMC0 S-GF S-NF S-GF S-NF S-GF H-NF L-NF H-NF L-NF S-NM S-NN S-NN AC-110V AC00-0V AC-0V DCV DCV DC-110V DC00-0V E5-NF S5-NF S5-GF S5-GE S-NF S-GF H5-NF L5-NF S5-NM E-SF S-SF S-SN S00-CF,S00-NF S00-GF S00-NE,S00-GE S00-PF,S00-PE H00-NE,L00-NE S00-NN AC-0V ADC-V DC-10V./5.5 Operation method Motor driven (direct drive system) Spring driven Operating time, s ON at rated voltage OFF/RESET Operating switch ratings V 0.1A (Open voltage/current: V/ ma) V 0.1A (Open voltage/current: V/1 ma) Power supply required 0VA or higher 0VA or higher Dielectric withstand voltage (for one minute) AC00V (AC 0 V for DC / V) AC00V (AC 0 V for DC / V) Weight 1.kg 3.5kg TMC0 S-CF,S-NF,S-RF S-NE,S-RE S00-CF,S00-NF,S00-RF S00-NE,S00-RE H-NE,L-NE H00-NE,L00-NE S-GN S00-NN AC-0V ADC-V DC-10V AC-110V.5/ /1.9(ON) 1.3/3.(OFF,RESET) /.(ON) 1.7/3.5(OFF,RESET) / /3.3(ON) 0.9/3.(OFF,RESET) /.(ON) 1.3/3.5(OFF,RESET) 3.5/7 /3.3(ON) 0.9/3.(OFF,RESET) /.(ON) 1.3/3.5(OFF,RESET) 1/ /9.(ON).3/9.(OFF,RESET) 1/1 /3.(ON).0/5.(OFF,RESET)./ /1.3(ON) 1./.9(OFF,RESET) /.(ON) 1.3/3.5(OFF,RESET) Spring driven V 0.1A (Open voltage/current: V/1 ma) 0VA or higher AC00V (AC 0 V for DC / V) 3.5kg Notes: : Permissible operating range is 5 to 110%. A power transformer is available as option for ACV or AC00-0V. : The currents shown are the maximum values at the maximum rated operational voltage. : The operating time is the value when the rated operational voltage is supplied. Allow a longer time for the motor operator to complete the operation. : The motor operator is of a short time duty. Do not subject it to more than 10 continuous ON-OFF operations. If this occurs, allow the motor operator to cool for at least minutes. : When the rated operational voltage is DCV the open voltage will be DCV. Features Installation and removal ease TMC1/5/5L: Simply rotate two knobs allows the motor operator to be installed on or removed from the breaker. TMC0/0: The compact and lightweight design enables easy installation and removal. High-speed, stable actuation The operating time as short as up to 0.1 second makes it possible to use the motor operators for synchronized closing of breakers. Silent operation TMC1/5/5L use a direct drive system, providing operational silence. Lock-in off capability This capability allows the breaker to be padlocked in the OFF state. Up to thee padlocks with a 5 to mm hasp diameter can be used. Padlocks are not supplied. Compact and lightweight TMC0/0 is of compact design where the OCR of the breakers does not hide behind the operator, and thus does not need to be removed when changes in setting of the OCR are to be made. -

95 Motorized operation The motor operator has an input-signal self-hold circuit; closing the ON or OFF switch (see circuit diagrams shown bellow) momentarily allows activating the motor operator. To reset the tripped breaker to the OFF position, close the OFF (RESET) switch. The voltage presence LED indication is on when the power is supplied to the motor operator. Auto reset feature (optional) The auto reset feature allows the breaker to be automatically reset approx. 1.5 seconds after the breaker trips open. This option contains auto-reset switches and does not require to use auxiliary or alarm switches installed in the breaker. Note : that after the thermal OCR trips a thermal-magnetic breaker, the breaker cannot be immediately closed though it can be auto-reset. Wait for a few minutes after the tripping and provide a close signal to the breaker. This option resets the tripped breaker automatically, regardless of the cause of the tripping. Manual operation TMC1/5/5L: Pull the operating handle out. Rotating the handle counterclockwise turns ON the breaker and clockwise turns OFF or resets the breaker. TMC0/0 : Use the spring charging handle to charge the spring and press the ON or TRIP button. TMC0/0 : When the TRIP button is pressed while the control power is supplied, the breaker turns OFF and if equipped with an alarm switch, it provides an output signal. Operation precautions 1. Ensure that the actual operation voltage ranges from 5% to 110% of the rated one.. Use operation switches whose ratings and power capacity is as specified in the Ratings and Specifications table on the previous page. 3. Use noise filters if the control power supply of the motor operator is shared by peripheral devices. Otherwise, power supply noise may cause malfunction of the peripheral devices.. When the motors are used in conjunction with the mechanical interlock the electrical interlock should be provided between the motors in order to avoid the simultaneous closing. The followings are the available electrical interlock cables. Interlock cables Order codes TMM5L05 TMM5L TMM0L0 TMM0L1 TMM0S0 TMM0S1 Length 0mm 00mm 00mm mm 00mm mm for the electrical interlock between TMC1 and TMC5/5L. for the electrical interlock between TMC0 and TMC0. for the electrical interlock between TMC0 and TMC1/5/5L. Control circuit diagrams of motor operators Remarks TMC1 / TMC5 / TMC5L TMC0 / TMC0 OFF(RESET) ON + The + and symbols indicate the Uc polarities of DC-rated motor operators. P1(+) OFF ON COM DS Control power circuit ON/OFF control circuit LED Motor drive circuit M OFF(RESET) ON P1(+) OFF ON + Uc COM The + and symbols indicate the polarities of DC-rated motor operators. P( ) ON/OFF control circuit Control power circuit LED LRC drive circuit LRC Motor drive circuit M Accessories P( ) E E -5

E-SF E-SF AC-110V AC00-0V DCV DC110V Optional XMB10 XS000NE XS000NN AC-110V AC00-0V DC-110V Optional Peak steady-state/ AC-110V.0/.5 0.5/3.5 starting current, A AC00-0V 1.0/.0 1.3/.1 DCV 1.1/.

96 Accessories Molded Case Circuit Breakers cexternally mounted accessories. Motor operators (MC) -. TemBreak Motor driven type ON-OFF indicator ON-OFF indicator Operating handle mounting shaft (XMB1) (XMB10) Ratings and Specifications Series/type of breaker Rated operational voltage Auto reset XMB1 E-SF E-SF AC-110V AC00-0V DCV DC110V Optional XMB10 XS000NE XS000NN AC-110V AC00-0V DC-110V Optional Peak steady-state/ AC-110V.0/.5 0.5/3.5 starting current, A AC00-0V 1.0/.0 1.3/.1 DCV 1.1/.5 DC110V 1./3.0 Operation method Motor driven Motor driven Operating time, s ON 1..0 at rated voltage OFF/RESET Operating switch ratings V, 5A V, 5A Power supply required VA or higher 0VA or higher Dielectric withstand voltage (for one AC0V AC0V minute) Weight 1. 1 Non Non Notes: Ensure that the actual operation voltage is within the following range: 5% to 110% of the AC rated voltage, or 75% to 110% of the DC rated voltage In case the rated operation voltage is AC V or AC 00 to 0 V, optional power supply transformers are available on request. Auto reset require to use auxiliary switch (1b) installed in the breaker. If the number of auxiliary switches is insufficient, actuate an external relay via an auxiliary switch (1a) and use the relay contact (1b) for auto reset. The currents shown are the maximum values at the maximum rated operational voltage. The operating time assume the motor operator is supplied with the rated operation voltage. Longer operating time will be required under actual operating conditions. The motor operator is short-time rated. The number of continuous switching (ON-OFF) cycles must not exceed 10. After any 10 continuous switching cycles, provide a pause of at least minutes to the motor operator for cooling. Can be custom-made on request. The outline dimensions of the motor operator will be larger. An auto-reset switch cannot be used. Contact us for details. -

97 Operation mechanism Motorized operation Breaker ON Closing the ON switch throws the motor switch from contact status 1- to 3-, thereby activating the X relay and energizing the motor operator to turn the breaker ON. When the breaker turns ON, the motor switch is thrown from contact status 3- to 1-, thereby releasing the X relay to de-energize and stop the motor operator. Breaker OFF Closing the OFF/RESET switch throws the motor switch from contact status 3- to 1-, thereby activating the Y relay and energizing the motor operator to turn the breaker OFF. When the breaker turns OFF, the motor switch is thrown from contact status 1- to 3-, thereby releasing the Y relay to de-energize and stop the motor operator. Breaker RESET To reset the tripped breaker to the OFF position, close the OFF/RESET switch. Breaker auto-reset (optional) Using the AUTO RESET auxiliary switch (1b) of the breaker allows resetting the breaker automatically when the breaker trips open. Note: Do not use a normally closed switch as the ON switch. Doing so will result in ON-TRIP-RESET-ON cycles repeated unless the cause of tripping is removed. Manual operation Mount the operating handle onto the mounting shaft located on the front of the motor operator and rotate the shaft to turn the breaker ON or OFF. Rotating the handle anti-clockwise turns ON the breaker and clockwise turns OFF or resets the breaker. When the operating handle is mounted, the motorized operation mechanism is disengaged. Removing the handle engages the motorized operation mechanism to enable motorized operation. Handle switch With the addition of a handle switch, the motor operator mechanism can be automatically brought to the manually operated position (ON or OFF) on removal of the handle, providing that the motor operator is powered up. Operation precautions When the breaker is ON and is then tripped, the ON/OFF indicator on the motor operator will indicate ON until the breaker is reset. Note: The breakers condition may differ. When a thermal-magnetic breaker is tripped by the thermal OCR, wait for a few minutes; then reset the breaker. When a breaker equipped with the UVT device is in the OFF position and the UVT device is deenergized, the breaker cannot be closed. To close such a breaker, perform ON and OFF (RESET) operation on the motor operator once and repeat ON operation. The breaker will be able to closed. (Breaker XS000NE can be closed without the need for the ON and OFF (RESET) operation on the motor operator described above). Use noise filters if the control power supply of the motor operator is shared by peripheral devices. Otherwise, power supply noise may cause malfunction of the peripheral devices. Control circuit diagrams of motor operators XMB1 For AC and DC XMB10 For AC MOTOR SW 1 3 Y X Ya Xa HANDLE SW M Xb Xa Xa Yb Ya Ya For DC MOTOR SW 1 3 Y X Ya Xa HANDLE SW M Xb Xa Xa Yb Ya Ya Accessories AUTO RESET SW (OPTION) AUTO RESET SW (OPTION) A B C D E A B C D E Built in AC 00 0 V rated motor operators. X: Relay, M: Motor ON OFF RESET SOURCE ON OFF RESET + SOURCE -7

98 Accessories Molded Case Circuit Breakers cexternally mounted accessories. Motor operators (MC) -3. TemBreak, TemBreak Spring charged type Manual operating handle Indicator Lock plate Control circuit terminal (TMCX / XMD9) Ratings and Specifications Applicable breakers Rated operational voltage Peak steady-state/ starting current, A TMCX S0-NE, S0-GE, S0-NN S100-NE, S100-NN AC-1V AC00-V DC-110V DCV AC-1V ON OFF, RESET /3.1 1./.0 AC00-V ON OFF, RESET /1. 1.0/3. DC-110V ON OFF, RESET /0. 1.1/. DCV ON /.5 OFF, RESET.0/1.0 Operation method Spring charged Operating time, s ON (Max) rated voltage OFF/RESET 3 Power supply required 0VA Dielectric withstand voltage (for one minute) AC00V Weight.kg Notes: 1 : Permissible operating range AC5 to 110% DC75 to 110% A power transformer is available as option for ACV or AC00-0V. : The currents shown are the maximum values at the maximum rated operational voltage. 3 : The operating time is the value when the rated operational voltage is supplied. Allow a longer time for the motor operator to complete the operation. : Dielectric withstand voltage for DC V motor is AC 0 V. XMD9 TL-0NE, TL-NE Features Clear status indication Color indication: Red means ON, green OFF and white TRIPPED. Quick closing Energy in a charged spring closes the breaker 0 msec or less. High-speed, time-stable operation is ensured after multiple times of closing cycles. Equipped with anti-pumping circuit When the closing signal is applied, TRIP- RESET-ON cycles are not repeated even though the cause of tripping is in the breaker. Ease of manual ON-OFF operation Simply pressing the ON or OFF button closes or opens the breaker. Lock-in off capability This capability allows the breaker to be padlocked in the OFF state. Padlocks are not supplied. ø5.5 -

99 Operation mechanism Motorized operation Breaker ON Closing the ON switch activates the latch release coil (LRC), thereby releasing the closing spring to turn the breaker ON. Breaker OFF (RESET) Closing the OFF/RESET switch activates the (Y) control relay, thereby starting the motor to turn the breaker OFF. At the same time, the closing spring is charged. The motor is deenergized when the breaker turns OFF (RESET). Breaker auto-reset (optional) The auto-reset option uses an auto-reset switch (alarm switch) through which the closing spring is charged and the breaker is reset automatically after the breaker trips open. This option both for XMD and TMC will be factory wired. Notes: 1. For S0 and S100, installable alarm switch will be only 1 piece.. When the breaker is equipped with the auto-reset option, a signal self-hold circuit is required because the signal provided by the alarm switch is a pulse. 3. Not applicable to thermal-magnetic breakers Manual operation * Breaker ON. OFF (RESET) Pulling down the operating lever turns the breaker ON and OFF/REST alternately. The handle returns to the original position when released. With auto-charge/discharge feature: When manual ON operation is performed while the control power is applied, the handle switch (HS) operates to discharge the closing spring. OFF operation causes the closing spring to be charged. When manual ON or OFF operation is performed while the control power is lost, and afterwards the control power is recovered, the closing spring is discharged or charged in the same manner as described above. When the auto-charge/discharge action is in progress, mechanical noises will be heard. The noises however do not mean a failure. Control circuit diagram (XMD series) LRC ON at spring charged Xb Xb LS X OFF at spring charged Xa OFF at spring charged On ON OFF (RESET) Off Switch Switch E- E- HS:Handle switch X:Anti-pumping relay Y:Motor drive relay LRC:Latch release coil (closing coil) M:Motor Y LS ON at spring charged Ya OFF HS at MCCB: ONorTRIP Position AUTO RESET SWITCH (OPTION) :Field coil :Resistor M Yc Ya ON at MCCB: ONorTRIP Position Yc MP1 MP + SOURCE OFF at locked E Operation Precautions Ensure that the actual operation voltage ranges from 5% to 110% for AC or 75% to 110% for DC of the rated one. The currents shown are the maximum values at the maximum rated operational voltage. When conducting the dielectric withstand voltage test, apply voltage between the control terminal group and ground. Ensure that the test voltage does not exceed AC 00 V (AC 0 V if the rated operation voltage is DC V). If the breaker is equipped with the UVT device, ensure that the UVT device is reset before providing a closing signal to the breaker. It takes up to three seconds to complete motorized OFF operation. If the breaker requires to be immediately opened from a remote location in an emergency, add the SHT or UVT device to the breaker for remote electrical tripping. When a thermal-magnetic breaker is tripped by the thermal OCR, wait for a few minutes; then reset the breaker. Make sure that the current and switching capacities of the operation switch are appropriate for the application. Avoid repeated and continuous applications of the operation power supply to the motor operator. Use noise filters if the control power supply of the motor operator is shared by peripheral devices. Otherwise, power supply noise may cause malfunction of the peripheral devices. Be sure to apply power to control power terminal MP1. If the breaker is turned ON or OFF manually without power applied to MP1, the auto charge/discharge feature is disabled, and thus the motor operator will not be activated next time. In such a case, applying the rated operation voltage between control power terminals MP1 and MP will enable the auto charge/discharge feature. Accessories -9

100 Accessories Molded Case Circuit Breakers cexternally mounted accessories 5. External operating handles 5-1. Breaker-mounted The external operating handle is a tool that allows the breaker installed in a switchboard to be operated from outside and complies with IEC The breaker-mounted type external operating handle is designed to be mounted directly to the breaker body. Outer view Mounting instructions The external operating handle has not been mounted on the breakers. For details on how to mount the handle, see the Operating Instructions packaged with the product. Make sure that the breaker is in the OFF position. Put the external operating handle assembly onto the breaker in place so that the breaker handle is engaged with the handle catch of the assembly. Tighten the screw to secure the handle assembly. Slide lever Breaker handle Screw OFF SIDE Screw Drill holes in the panel according to the panel cutout dimensions. Sandwich the panel between the handle escutcheon and latch plate and temporarily tighten using the supplied screws. Close the panel. Make adjustment so that the gap between the handle assembly and handle escutcheon is even and the assembly is not inclined against the breaker. Dustproof packing (optional) Gap (Incorrect) Breaker Handle frame Handle escutcheon Handle escutcheon Breaker Breaker mounting direction The ON and OFF positions of the handle and the positions of drilled holes in the panel do not need to be changed depending on the breaker mounting direction. The upper power supply type is standard. If a non-standard type is required, state the type when ordering. R : Right power supply type U: Upper power supply type (standard) Power supply L: Left power supply type Load Power supply Power supply Load Load For a change in mounting direction, see the Operating Instructions packaged with the product. -

101 Panel lock mechanism The external operating handle keeps the panel door locked when in the ON position. There are two types, RESET, Open and OFF, Open. (1) Reset, Open (Standard type) The handle is turned to the RESET/OPEN COVER position to open the panel door. () OFF, Open The handle is turned to the OFF position to open the panel door. Panel lock release knob The release knob enables the panel door to be opened with the handle in the ON position. To release: turn the release knob in the direction of anti-clockwise with a flat-bladed screwdriver. Safety interlock (Standard) The safety interlock prevents the breaker from turning ON as long as the panel is open. This interlock can be released using the hook lever. Toggle lock mechanism Padlock (Standard) This mechanism allows the breaker to be padlocked in the OFF position. Padlocks are not supplied. Up to three padlocks can be installed. Dia. Padlock dimensions (mm) Type of handle A Dia. THB 13 min ø5.5- Protection degree EC 059 IP IP IP55 A standard specification optional, with a dust proof packing special specification Key lock (Optional) Key locking is possible in the OFF position. Key lock is not available for the breakers markde by 1 in the following table. Handle Panel lock release Hook lever Key lock Possible combinations of breaker and external operating handle Frame size Type of breaker Type of external operating handle S-SF THB1L S-GF THB1 S-NF S-GF H-NF L-NF S-NM S-NN THB1 THB5 THB5 THB1 S-SF THB1L 5 S-NF S-GF H-NF L-NF S-SN S-NN E5-NF S5-NF S5-GF S5-GE H5-NF L5-NF S5-NM E-SF S-SF S-NF S-GF S-SN THB1 THB1 THB5 THB5 THB1L THB1 THB5 THB5L THB5L THB5 THB5 THB5L Frame size Type of breaker Type of external operating handle 00 S00-CF S00-NF S00-NE S00-GF S00-GE S00-PF THB0 S00-PE H00-NE L00-NE S00-NN S-CF S-NF S-NE S-RF S-RE 00 H-NE L-NE S-GN S00-CF THB0 S00-NF S00-NE S00-RF S00-RE H00-NE L00-NE S00-NN 0 S0-NE S0-GE S0-NN THBX 100 S100-NE S100-NN Note 1 : Key lock is not available. Accessories To be stated when ordering Order code THB1 U R 3 B T Type of external operating handle Breaker mounting direction Panel lock Protection degree Colour Key lock THB1 THB5 THB0 THB0 THB1L THB5L THBX : standard specification U: Upper power supply type R: Right power supply type L: Left power supply type R : RESET open F : OFF open 3 : IP 5 : IP S : IP55 (special spec.) B : Black handle (Light gray base) R : Red handle (Yellow base) W : with key lock T : without key lock -31

102 Accessories Molded Case Circuit Breakers cexternally mounted accessories 5. External operating handles : Arrangement Standard Line : Handle Frame Centre Line : Handle Centre Line Outline dimensions THB1L Applicable breaker types S-SF S-SF S-SN Outline dimensions Panel cutout dimensions 75 LH ± 0 LH -ø10 ON Handle escutcheon 75 Panel lock release ø Hook lever Panel Plate thickness Positions of the hinge and handle as seen from the load side of the breaker. Ensure that the hinge is positioned in the area

103 : Arrangement Standard Line : Handle Frame Centre Line : Handle Centre Line THB5L Applicable breaker types E-SF S-SF S-SN Outline dimensions Panel cutout dimensions 75 LH ± 0 LH -ø10 ON Handle escutcheon 75 Panel lock release 0 ø5 Hook lever Panel Plate thickness Positions of the hinge and handle as seen from the load side of the breaker. Ensure that the hinge is positioned in the area Accessories -33

104 Accessories Molded Case Circuit Breakers cexternally mounted accessories 5. External operating handles : Arrangement Standard Line : Handle Frame Centre Line : Handle Centre Line Outline dimensions THB1 Applicable breaker types S-GF S-NF S-GF S-NM S-NN S-NF S-GF S-NN Outline dimensions Indicator Panel cutout dimensions ± 7 LH -ø10 ON Handle escutcheon TRIP 105 OFF Hook lever 7 ø5 OPEN RESET Panel lock release Key for key lock (optional) 5 Panel Plate thickness Breaker Positions of the hinge and handle as seen from the load side of the breaker. Ensure that the hinge is positioned in the area

105 : Arrangement Standard Line : Handle Frame Centre Line : Handle Centre Line THB5 Applicable breaker types E5-NF S5-NF S5-NF S5-NM E-NF S-NF S-GF H-NF H5-NF L-NF L5-NF S5-GE H-NF L-NF A Outline dimensions Indicator Panel cutout dimensions A 7 LH -ø10 ON Handle escutcheon TRIP 105 OFF Hook lever 7 ø5 OPEN RESET Panel lock release 5 Key for key lock (optional) Panel Plate thickness Breaker Positions of the hinge and handle as seen from the load side of the breaker. Ensure that the hinge is positioned in the area Accessories -35

106 Accessories Molded Case Circuit Breakers cexternally mounted accessories 5. External operating handles Outline dimensions THB0 Applicable breaker types A B S00-CF S00-NF S00-NE S00-GF S00-GE S00-PF S00-PE S00-NN 0 97 H00-NE L00-NE : Arrangement Standard Line : Handle Frame Centre Line : Handle Centre Line Outline dimensions 1 Indicator A Panel cutout dimensions 105 M -ø ON Handle escutcheon TRIP ø110 B OFF OPEN Hook lever RESET Panel lock release Key for key lock (optional) Panel Breaker Positions of the hinge and handle as seen from the load side of the breaker. Ensure that the hinge is positioned in the area

107 : Arrangement Standard Line : Handle Frame Centre Line : Handle Centre Line THB0 Applicable breaker types S-CF S-NF S-RF S-NE S-RE S-GN S00-CF S00-NF S00-RF S00-NE S00-RE S00-NN H-NE L-NE H00-NE L00-NE A 0 17 Outline dimensions Handle escutcheon Indicator Panel cutout dimensions -ø10 ø110 Hook lever A Panel lock release Positions of the hinge and handle as seen from the load side of the breaker. Ensure that the hinge is positioned in the area Accessories -37

Accessories Molded Case Circuit Breakers cexternally mounted accessories 5. External operating handles 5-.

The breaker-mounted type external operating handle is designed to be mounted directly to the breaker body.

For details on how to mount the handle, see the Operating Instructions packaged with the product.

108 Accessories Molded Case Circuit Breakers cexternally mounted accessories 5. External operating handles 5-. Breaker-mounted The external operating handle is a tool that allows the breaker installed in a switchboard to be operated from outside. The breaker-mounted type external operating handle is designed to be mounted directly to the breaker body. Outer view ON OFF Mounting instructions The external operating handle has not been mounted on the breakers. For details on how to mount the handle, see the Operating Instructions packaged with the product. [1] Mounting of external operating handle assembly [] Installation of handle escutcheon and latch plate 1.1 Secured to backing plate (TFJ1B / TFJ1XH) Make sure that the breaker is in the OFF position. Put the external operating handle assembly onto the breaker in place so that the breaker toggle is engaged with the slide lever of the assembly. Secure the assembly together with the breaker to the backing plate. Drill holes in the panel according to the panel cutout dimensions. Sandwich the panel between the handle escutcheon and latch plate and temporarily tighten using the supplied screws. Close the panel. Make adjustment so that the gap between the handle assembly and handle escutcheon is even and the assembly is not inclined against the breaker. Slide lever Breaker Toggle 1. Secured to breaker cover (TFJ3X / THBX) Make sure that the breaker is in the OFF position. Remove the four breaker cover mounting screws at the positions where the external operating handle assembly is secured. Put the handle assembly onto the breaker in place so that the breaker toggle is engaged with the slide lever of the assembly. Use the supplied mounting screws to secure the assembly to the breaker. Gap (Incorrect) Breaker Breaker Handle frame Handle escutcheon Handle escutcheon Hook holder Panel Handle escutcheon Breaker mounting direction The ON and OFF positions of the handle and the positions of drilled holes in the panel do not need to be changed depending on the breaker mounting direction. The upper power supply type is standard. If a non-standard type is required, state the type when ordering. R : Right power supply type U: Upper power supply type (standard) L: Left power supply type Power supply Load Power supply Power supply Load Load -3 For a change in mounting direction, see the Operating Instructions packaged with the product.

Panel lock mechanism The external operating handle keeps the panel door locked when in the ON position. There are two types, RESET, Open and OFF, Open.

Toggle lock mechanism Padlock (Standard) This mechanism allows the breaker to be padlocked in the ON or OFF position. Padlocks are not supplied. Up to three padlocks can be installed. Dia.

109 Panel lock mechanism The external operating handle keeps the panel door locked when in the ON position. There are two types, RESET, Open and OFF, Open. (1) Reset, Open (Standard type) The handle is turned to the RESET/OPEN COVER position to open the panel door. () OFF, Open The handle is turned to the OFF position to open the panel door. Toggle lock mechanism Padlock (Standard) This mechanism allows the breaker to be padlocked in the ON or OFF position. Padlocks are not supplied. Up to three padlocks can be installed. Dia. A Padlock dimensions (mm) Type of handle A Dia. TFJ1B TFJ3X THBX 13 min 19 min ø3.5- Panel lock release knob The release knob enables the panel door to be opened with the handle in the ON position. To release: turn the release knob in the direction of anti-clockwise with a flat-bladed screwdriver. Safety interlock (Standard) The safety interlock prevents the breaker from turning ON as long as the panel is open. This interlock can be released using the hook lever. Padlock Handle Panel lock release Hook lever Protection degree EC 059 IP IP IP55 standard specification optional, with a dust proof packing special specification Dustproof packing for IP (oprional) mm Type of handle Type of dustproof packing A B C TFJ1B Dustproof packing / TFJ3X THBX Dustproof packing / C B A Dustoproof packing Possible combinations of breaker and external operating handle Type of external operating handle TFJ1B TFJ1XH TFJ3X THBX Type of breaker E-SF,E-CM E-SF TL-0NE,TL-NE S0-NE,S0-GE,S0-NN S100-NE,S100-NN To be stated when ordering Accessories Order code U R 3 B Type of external operating handle Breaker mounting direction Panel lock Protection degree Colour TFJ1B TFJ3X THBX U: Upper power supply type R: Right power supply type L: Left power supply type R : RESET open F : OFF open 3 : IP 5 : IP 55 : IP55 (special spec.) B : Black handle (Black base) R : Red handle (Yellow base) : standard specification -39

110 Accessories Molded Case Circuit Breakers cexternally mounted accessories 5. External operating handles Outline dimensions THBX Applicable breaker types A (mm) S0-NE, S0-GE 197 S0-NN M110, pcs S100-NE, S100-NN 17 Secured to breaker cover. : Arrangement Standard Line : Handle Frame Centre Line : Handle Centre Line Outline dimensions 0 Panel cutout dimensions -ø ø13 0 Hook lever 11 Panel lock release Lock lever 1.-3.t M screw A 1 11 H>0 H>0 Toggle extension for THBX (optional) 1 Order Code THAX Left hinge 3H+ 3H+1 Right hinge -0

111 H>0 : Arrangement Standard Line : Handle Frame Centre Line : Handle Centre Line TFJ1B TFJ1XH Applicable breaker types E-SF, E-CM Secured to backing plate. M7, pcs Applicable breaker types E-SF Secured to backing plate. M75, pcs Outline dimensions Panel cutout dimensions Relative positions of the hinge and handle as seen from the Plate thickness1.-3. load side of the breaker 105 Breaker Panel Handle escutcheon 105 Hook lever, ø 7 H>0 1 max Panel lock release Lock lever 3 10± 7 -ø (5H+) min (5H+) min Accessories -1

112 Accessories Molded Case Circuit Breakers H>0 cexternally mounted accessories 5. External operating handles : Arrangement Standard Line : Handle Frame Centre Line : Handle Centre Line Outline dimensions TFJ3X Applicable breaker types TL-0NE TL-NE Secured to breaker cover. M110, pcs Outline dimensions 0 Plate thickness1.-3. Breaker Panel cutout dimensions Panel Handle escutcheon 0 Hook lever ø13 11 Panel lock release -ø Lock lever max 51 17± 11 Relative positions of the hinge and handle as seen from the load side of the breaker Toggle extension for TFJ3X (optional) 1 Order code THC5 H>0 (3H+) min (3H+1) min -

113 OFF OPEN RESET TRIP ON OFF OPEN RESET TRIP ON OFF OPEN RESET TRIP ON 5-3. Door-mounted (depth adjustable) (HP) Door-mounted type external operating handles allow breakers installed in control centers or switchboards to be manually operated from outside and complies with IEC This handle assembly consists of an operation mechanism section which is to be installed in the breaker body, a handle section which is to be installed in a panel and a square shaft which couples both the sections. Outer view Operation direction of handles Rotate the operating handle clockwise to turn the breaker on. Rotate clockwise to turn the breaker ON Breaker mounting direction The ON and OFF positions of the handle and the positions of drilled holes in the panel do not need to be changed depending on the breaker mounting direction. Horizontal mounting / ON to move the breaker handle right Line (ON) Vertical mounting / ON to move the breaker handle up Line (ON) Horizontal mounting / ON to move the breaker handle left Line (ON) Accessories -3

114 Accessories Molded Case Circuit Breakers cexternally mounted accessories 5. External operating handles Panel lock mechanism The external operating handle keeps the panel door locked when in the ON position. There are two types, RESET, Open and OFF, Open. (1) Reset, Open (Standard type) The handle is turned to the RESET/OPEN COVER position to open the panel door. () OFF, Open The handle is turned to the OFF position to open the panel door. Panel lock release knob The release knob enables the panel door to be opened with the handle in the ON position. To release: turn the release knob in the direction of anti-clockwise with a flat-bladed screwdriver. Toggle lock mechanism Padlock (Standard) This mechanism allows the breaker to be padlocked in the OFF position. Padlocks are not supplied. Up to three padlocks can be installed. Dia A Padlock dimensions (mm) Type of handle A Dia. THP 13 min ø5.5- Key lock (Optional) Key locking is possible in the OFF position. Protection degree EC 059 IP5 standard specification IP5 special specification Dimensions of square shafts available There are the following shaft dimensions available. Select an appropriate shaft depending on the mounting position of the breaker. Cut the shaft to an appropriate length if required. Coat the cut end faces of the shaft with an anti-corrosion paint. LB LA LB Shafts order codes LA (mm) LB (mm) TPS51 TPS5 TPS53 TPS5 TPS01 TPS0 TPS03 TPS To be stated when ordering Order code Type of external operating handle Panel lock Protection degree Colour Key lock THP1 THP5 THP0 THP0 THPX THP1L THP5L T1HP05 T1HP10 T1HPX R : RESET open F : OFF open 5 : IP5 : IP5 B : Black handle (Light gray base) R : Red handle (Yellow base) W : with key lock T : without key lock - : standard specification

115 Possible combinations of breaker and external operating handle Frame size Type of breaker Type of external operating handle E-SF, E-CM T1HP05 S-SF THP1L S-GF THP1 E-SF T1HP10X 5 S-NF S-GF H-NF L-NF S-NM S-NN S-SF S-NF S-GF H-NF L-NF S-SN S-NN E5-NF S5-NF S5-GF S5-GE H5-NF L5-NF S5-NM E-SF S-SF THP1 THP5 THP1 THP1L THP1 THP5 THP1L THP1 THP5 THP5L S-NF S-GF THP5 S-SN THP5L 00 S00-CF S00-NF S00-NE S00-GF S00-GE S00-PF THP0 S00-PE H00-NE L00-NE S00-NN S-CF S-NF S-RF S-NE S-RE H-NE L-NE S-GN 00 S00-CF THP0 S00-NF S00-RF S00-NE S00-RE H00-NE L00-NE S00-NN 0 TL-0NE T1HPX TL-NE T1HPX 0 S0-NE S0-GE S0-NN THPX 100 S100-NE S100-NN Accessories -5

116 Accessories Molded Case Circuit Breakers cexternally mounted accessories 5. External operating handles : Arrangement Standard Line : Handle Frame Centre Line : Handle Centre Line Outline dimensions THP1L Outline dimensions A D ON Handle escutcheon TRIP 105 OFF OPEN RESET Panel lock release Key for key lock (optional) Panel B C Panel cutout dimensions M5 (Nominal size of Allen key applicable:.5) 7 Positions of the hinge and handle as seen from the load side of the breaker. Ensure that the hinge is positioned in the area. 7 LC ø ø Applicable breaker types A B C D Square shaft applicable Shaft support S-SF 9 min TPS51 S-SF S-SN 3 max max TPS5 3 max TPS53 53 max TPS5 Note q: Min (minimum) means the minimum possible distance from the panel surface to the breaker mounting surface, which can be formed by cutting the square shaft. Max (maximum) means the maximum distance of the same section, which is formed with no cutting of the square shaft. A: Distance from the panel surface to the breaker mounting surface B: Length of the tube used to cover the square shaft C: Length of the square shaft used D: Distance from the tip of the shaft support to the breaker mounting surface -

117 Outline dimensions THP5L : Arrangement Standard Line : Handle Frame Centre Line : Handle Centre Line Outline dimensions A D Handle escutcheon ON TRIP 105 OFF OPEN RESET Panel lock release Key for key lock (optional) Panel C B M5 (Nominal size of Allen key applicable:.5) Panel cutout dimensions 7 Positions of the hinge and handle as seen from the load side of the breaker. Ensure that the hinge is positioned in the area. 7 LC ø ø Applicable breaker types A B C D Square shaft applicable Shaft support E-SF S-SF S-SN 9 min TPS51 3 max max TPS5 3 max TPS53 53 max TPS5 Note q: Min (minimum) means the minimum possible distance from the panel surface to the breaker mounting surface, which can be formed by cutting the square shaft. Max (maximum) means the maximum distance of the same section, which is formed with no cutting of the square shaft. A: Distance from the panel surface to the breaker mounting surface B: Length of the tube used to cover the square shaft C: Length of the square shaft used D: Distance from the tip of the shaft support to the breaker mounting surface Accessories -7

118 Accessories Molded Case Circuit Breakers cexternally mounted accessories 5. External operating handles Outline dimensions THP1 : Arrangement Standard Line : Handle Frame Centre Line : Handle Centre Line Outline dimensions A D Indicator ON Handle escutcheon TRIP 105 OFF OPEN RESET Panel cutout dimensions Panel lock release Key for key lock (optional) B C Panel M5 (Nominal size of Allen key applicable:.5) 7 Positions of the hinge and handle as seen from the load side of the breaker. Ensure that the hinge is positioned in the area. 7 LC ø ø Applicable breaker types A B C D Square shaft applicable Shaft support S-GF 9 min TPS51 S-NF S-GF S-NM 3 max S-NN S-NF S-GF 33 max TPS5 S-NN 3 max TPS53 53 max TPS5 Note q: Min (minimum) means the minimum possible distance from the panel surface to the breaker mounting surface, which can be formed by cutting the square shaft. Max (maximum) means the maximum distance of the same section, which is formed with no cutting of the square shaft. A: Distance from the panel surface to the breaker mounting surface B: Length of the tube used to cover the square shaft C: Length of the square shaft used D: Distance from the tip of the shaft support to the breaker mounting surface -

119 Outline dimensions THP5 : Arrangement Standard Line : Handle Frame Centre Line : Handle Centre Line Outline dimensions A D Indicator Handle escutcheon ON TRIP 105 OFF OPEN RESET Panel lock release B C Key for key lock (optional) Panel Panel cutout dimensions 7 M5 (Nominal size of Allen key applicable:.5) Positions of the hinge and handle as seen from the load side of the breaker. Ensure that the hinge is positioned in the area. 7 LC ø ø Applicable breaker types A B C D Square shaft applicable Shaft support E5-NF S5-NF S5-GF 9 min TPS51 S-NF S-GF 3 max max TPS5 3 max TPS53 53 max TPS5 S5-GE min TPS51 H-NF L-NF H-NF 7 max H5-NF L5-NF L-NF 37 max TPS5 7 max TPS53 57 max TPS5 Note q: Min (minimum) means the minimum possible distance from the panel surface to the breaker mounting surface, which can be formed by cutting the square shaft. Max (maximum) means the maximum distance of the same section, which is formed with no cutting of the square shaft. Accessories A: Distance from the panel surface to the breaker mounting surface B: Length of the tube used to cover the square shaft C: Length of the square shaft used D: Distance from the tip of the shaft support to the breaker mounting surface -9

120 Accessories Molded Case Circuit Breakers cexternally mounted accessories 5. External operating handles Outline dimensions THP0 : Arrangement Standard Line : Handle Frame Centre Line : Handle Centre Line Outline dimensions A Indicator D M Handle escutcheon ON TRIP 1 OFF OPEN LC RESET Key for key lock (optional) B Panel lock release C M (Nominal size of Allen key applicable: 3) Panel cutout dimensions 105 Positions of the hinge and handle as seen from the load side of the breaker. Ensure that the hinge is positioned in the area. -ø ø Applicable breaker types A B C D Square shaft applicable Shaft support S00-CF S00-NF S00-NE min S00-GF S00-GE S00-PF 310 max H00-NE 7 min L00-NE 37 max TPS min max TPS0 57 max TPS03 7 max TPS0 Notes: q. Min (minimum) means the minimum possible distance from the panel surface to the breaker mounting surface, which can be formed by cutting the square shaft. Max (maximum) means the maximum distance of the same section, which is formed with no cutting of the square shaft. w. When dimension A is in a range of 310 mm to 30 mm, cut square shaft TPS0 to an appropriate length and use the shaft without shaft support. e. When dimension A is in a range of 37mm to 377mm, cut square shaft TPS0 to an appropriate length and use the shaft without shaft support. A: Distance from the panel surface to the breaker mounting surface B: Length of the tube used to cover the square shaft C: Length of the square shaft used D: Distance from the tip of the shaft support to the breaker mounting surface TPS01 S00-PE S00-NN 30 min max TPS0 510 max TPS03 10 max TPS0 Non Non -

121 Outline dimensions THP0 Outline dimensions Handle escutcheon D A : Arrangement Standard Line : Handle Frame Centre Line : Handle Centre Line Indicator Shaft support 105 B Key for key lock (optional) C 105 Panel lock release M (Nominal size of Allen key applicable: 3) Panel cutout dimensions -ø10 Positions of the hinge and handle as seen from the load side of the breaker. Ensure that the hinge is positioned in the area. ø Applicable breaker types A B C D Square shaft applicable Shaft support S-CF S-NF S-RF min S-NE S-RE S-GN 310 max S00-CF S00-NF S00-RF 30 min S00-NE S00-RE S00-NN 10 max max TPS03 10 max TPS0 H-NE L-NE 7 min H00-NE L00-NE 37 max min max max TPS03 7 max TPS0 TPS01 Non TPS0 TPS01 Non TPS0 Accessories Notes: q. Min (minimum) means the minimum possible distance from the panel surface to the breaker mounting surface, which can be formed by cutting the square shaft. Max (maximum) means the maximum distance of the same section, which is formed with no cutting of the square shaft. w. When dimension A is in a range of 310 mm to 30 mm, cut square shaft TPS0 to an appropriate length and use the shaft without shaft support. e. When dimension A is in a range of 37mm to 377mm, cut square shaft TPS0 to an appropriate length and use the shaft without shaft support. A: Distance from the panel surface to the breaker mounting surface B: Length of the tube used to cover the square shaft C: Length of the square shaft used D: Distance from the tip of the shaft support to the breaker mounting surface -51

122 Accessories Molded Case Circuit Breakers cexternally mounted accessories 5. External operating handles Outline dimensions THPX Outline dimensions 1 A : Arrangement Standard Line : Handle Frame Centre Line : Handle Centre Line D Handle escutcheon Shaft support 1 LC Panel lock release B C Key for key lock (optional) M (Nominal size of Allen key applicable: 3) M mounting screw 1 Panel cutout dimensions Positions of the hinge and handle as seen from the load side of the breaker. Ensure that the hinge is positioned in the area ø LC ø Applicable breaker types A B C D Square shaft applicable Shaft support S0-NE S0-GE S0-NN 37min TPS01 Non 7max TPS0 57max TPS03 7max TPS0 S100-NE S100-NN 37min TPS01 Non 7max TPS0 57max TPS03 7max TPS0 Note q: Min (minimum) means the minimum possible distance from the panel surface to the breaker mounting surface, which can be formed by cutting the square shaft. Max (maximum) means the maximum distance of the same section, which is formed with no cutting of the square shaft. A: Distance from the panel surface to the breaker mounting surface B: Length of the tube used to cover the square shaft C: Length of the square shaft used D: Distance from the tip of the shaft support to the breaker mounting surface -5

123 Outline dimensions : Arrangement Standard Line : Handle Frame Centre Line : Handle Centre Line T1HP05, T1HP10X Outline dimensions A D ON Handle escutcheon TRIP 105 OFF OPEN RESET Panel cutout dimensions 7 Panel lock release Key for key lock (optional) B C Panel M5 (Nominal size of Allen key applicable:.5) Positions of the hinge and handle as seen from the load side of the breaker. Ensure that the hinge is positioned in the area. 7 LC ø ø Applicable breaker types A B C D Square shaft applicable Shaft support E-SF, E-CMT1HP05 E-SFT1HP10X Note q: Min (minimum) means the minimum possible distance from the panel surface to the breaker mounting surface, which can be formed by cutting the square shaft. Max (maximum) means the maximum distance of the same section, which is formed with no cutting of the square shaft. A: Distance from the panel surface to the breaker mounting surface B: Length of the tube used to cover the square shaft C: Length of the square shaft used D: Distance from the tip of the shaft support to the breaker mounting surface 3min TPS51 max max TPS5 max TPS53 5max TPS5 Accessories -53

124 OFF OPEN RESET TRIP ON Accessories Molded Case Circuit Breakers cexternally mounted accessories 5. External operating handles Outline dimensions T1HPX : Arrangement Standard Line : Handle Frame Centre Line : Handle Centre Line Outline dimensions 1 A D Handle escutcheon 1 LC Panel lock release B C Key for key lock (optional) M (Nominal size of Allen key applicable: 3) M mounting screw 1 Panel cutout dimensions Mounting dimensions Positions of the hinge and handle as seen from the load side of the breaker. Ensure that the hinge is positioned in the area. -ø ø LC ø Applicable breaker types A B C D Square shaft applicable Shaft support TL-0NE TL-NE 37min TPS01 Non 7max TPS0 57max TPS03 7max TPS0 Notes: q. Min (minimum) means the minimum possible distance from the panel surface to the breaker mounting surface, which can be formed by cutting the square shaft. Max (maximum) means the maximum distance of the same section, which is formed with no cutting of the square shaft. A: Distance from the panel surface to the breaker mounting surface B: Length of the tube used to cover the square shaft C: Length of the square shaft used D: Distance from the tip of the shaft support to the breaker mounting surface -5

125 () Door-mounted (depth fixed) (HP) Door-mounted type external operating handles allow breakers installed in control centers or switchboards to be manually operated from outside. Outer view Nameplate Operation mechanism ON Turn the handle clockwise to the ON position on the indication plate. Panel lock release Handle Padlock (not supplied) OFF Turn the handle anti-clockwise to the OFF position on the indication plate. RESET When the breaker trips, the handle indicates tripped turn the handle anti-clockwise to the RESET position. This will reset the breaker. OPENING THE PANEL Turn the handle anti-clockwise to OPEN COVER. The lock is released and the panel can be opened. Panel lock mechanism The external operating handle keeps the panel door locked when in the ON, OFF or TRIP position. Hook holder shown in the outline dimension drawing should be provided. Panel lock release knob When the release knob is turned clockwise the panel door can be opened irrespective of the handle being in the ON, OFF or TRIP position. Toggle lock mechanism Padlock (Standard) This mechanism allows the breaker to be padlocked in the ON or OFF position. Padlocks are not supplied. Up to three padlocks can be installed. Padlock dimensions ø Outline dimensions XFE10 Applicable breaker types XS000NE XS000NN Accessories Panel Mounting hole ø11 Mounting plate M3 0.5 tapped hole for indication plate ø Hook holder Hook ø13 Release Hook holder (not supplied) Panel (Rear type) -55

126 Accessories Molded Case Circuit Breakers cexternally mounted accessories. Terminal covers CF/CR/CS Terminal covers prevent live parts of the breaker from being exposed to the external environment. There are three types of terminal covers available: CF for front-connected breakers, CR for rear-connected and plug-in breakers, and CS for front-connected breakers with cable clamps. Select appropriate terminal covers depending on the type and application of the breaker. (1) CF for front-connected breakers A C D B Plug-in mounted version This version can be mounted simply by being plugged in the breaker body. ø Hole for Megger measurement (at each terminal) To be stated when ordering Please state the order codes on the next page. One set includes one terminal cover for the ON side and one for the OFF side. For the terminal covers for 0AF, please order with the breakers. A B C D Screw-mounted version The terminal covers for to 00AF are mounted to the breakers using tapping screws. The terminal cover for 0AF is mounted to insert nuts of the breaker cover using screws. The insert nuts do not come standard with the breaker. Please be sure to state with terminal cover (CF) when ordering the breaker. ø Hole for Megger measurement (at each terminal) -5

127 Types and dimensions of terminal covers, units in mm CF for front-connected breakers Frame Terminal cover A B C D Colour of cover size Types of breakers G:Gray (A) Size Note: Order codes 1 Marking codes poles 3 poles poles /3 poles poles /3 poles poles /3 poles poles C :Clear E-SF, E-CM TPR1SG Large G TPR1SC C Small TPT1SG G TPT1SC C S-SF Large TCF1LSLNG G TCF1LSLNC C Small TCF1LSSNG G TCF1LSSNC C S-GF TCF1SLNG Large G TCF1SL TCF1SLNC C Small TCF1SSNG G TCF1SS TCF1SSNC C E-SF XPR1G Large G XPR1C C Small TPT1G G TPT1C C S-NF, S-GF TCF1SLNG Large G TCF1SL S-NM, S-NN TCF1SLNC C Small TCF1SSNG G TCF1SS TCF1SSNC C H-NF, L-NF TCF5LLNG Large G TCF5LL TCF5LLNC C S-SF, S-SN TCF1LSLNG Large G TCF1LSLNC C Small TCF1LSSNG G TCF1LSSNC C S-NF, S-GF TCF1SLNG Large G TCF1SL S-NN TCF1SLNC C Small TCF1SSNG G TCF1SS TCF1SSNC C H-NF, L-NF TCF5LLNG Large G TCF5LL TCF5LLNC C 5 E5-NF, S5-NF S5-GF, S5-NM 00 S00-CF, S00-NF S00-GF S00-NE, S00-GE S00-PF, S00-PE S00-NN H00-NE, L00-NE 0 H5-NF, L5-NF S5-GE E-SF S-SF, S-SN S-NF, S-GF S-CF, S-NF S-RF, S-NE S-RE, S-GN H-NE, L-NE 00 S00-CF, S00-NF S00-RF, S00-NE S00-RE, S00-GN H00-NE, L00-NE S0-NE, S0-GE Large TCF5SLNG G TCF5SL TCF5SLNC C Small TCF5SSNG G TCF5SS TCF5SSNC C Large TCF5LLNG G TCF5LL TCF5LLNC C Small TCF5LSSNG G TCF5LSS TCF5LSSNC C Large TCF5LSWNG G TCF5LSW TCF5LSWNC C Large TCF5LSLNG G TCF5LSL TCF5LSLNC C Small TCF5LSSNG G TCF5LSS TCF5LSSNC C Large TCF5LSWNG G TCF5LSW TCF5LSWNC C Large TCF5LSLNG G TCF5LSL TCF5LSLNC C Large TCF5SLNG G TCF5SL TCF5SLNC C Small TCF5SSNG G TCF5SS TCF5SSNC C Large TCF0SWNG G TCF0SW TCF0SWNC C Large TCF0SLNG G TCF0SL TCF0SLNC C Large TCF0SWNG G TCF0SW TCF0SWNC C Large TCF0SLNG G TCF0SL TCF0SLNC C Large TCF0SLG G TPR-5BA TCF0SLC C Large TCF0SLG G TPR-5BA TCF0SLC C Large TCF0SLG G TPR-5BA TCF0SLC C Large TCF0SLG G TPR-5BA TCF0SLC C Large G TPR-5BA C Notes:. The asterisk indicates the number of poles. Please state the number of poles at the asterisk position when ordering.. Not applicable to 3-pole breakers with extension bars.. Applicable to 3-pole breakers with spread extension bars.. There will be an approx. 0 mm gap between the bottom of the terminal cover and the breaker mounting surface. Mounting version Plug-in Screwmounted mounted. Values in parentheses indicate the distance to the head of terminal cover mounting screws.. For poles, Gray colour only. (1) Terminal covers for motor protection breakers are 3-pole type only. () Terminal covers for switch-disconnectors are 3-pole and -pole type only. Accessories -57

128 Accessories Molded Case Circuit Breakers cexternally mounted accessories. Terminal covers CF/CR/CS () CR for rear-connected and plug-in breakers CS for front-connected breakers with cable clamps A B C D B Plug-in mounted version This version can be mounted simply by being plugged in the breaker body. ø Hole for Megger measurement (at each terminal) To be stated when ordering Please state with CR if ordering along with the breaker. Please state the order codes on the next page if ordering separately from the breaker. One set includes one terminal cover for the ON side and one for the OFF side. A E C D Screw-mounted version The terminal covers for to 00AF are mounted to the breakers using tapping screws. B ø Hole for Megger measurement Mounting screw ø Hole for Megger measurement (at each terminal) -5

129 Types and dimensions of terminal covers, units in mm CR for rear-connected and plug-in breakers Frame size (A) Types of breakers Order codes 1 Terminal cover Marking codes A poles 3 poles poles /3 poles poles B B C /3 poles poles /3 poles poles D Colour of cover G: Gray Mounting version Plug-in mounted Screw-mounted 5 00 S-SF TCR1LSG G S-GF TCR1SG TCR1S G S-NF, S-GF TCR1SG TCR1S G S-NM, S-NN H-NF, L-NF TCR5SG TCR5S G S-SF, S-SN TCR1LSG G S-NF, S-GF TCR1SG TCR1S G H-NF, L-NF TCR5SG TCR5S G E5-NF, S5-NF TCR5SG TCR5S G S5-GF, S5-NM H5-NF, L5-NF TCR5SG TCR5S G S5-GE E-SF TCR5LSG TCR5L G S-SF, S-SN TCR5LSG TCR5L G S-NF, S-GF TCR5SG TCR5S G S00-CF, S00-NF S00-GF S00-NE, S00-GE S00-PF, S00-PE S00-NN TCR0SG TCR0S G H00-NE, L00-NE TCR0SG TCR0S G Terminal cover A B E C D Mounting version Frame size (To Colour of cover Types of breakers (A) Order codes 1 Marking codes poles 3 poles poles /3 poles poles screw /3 poles poles /3 poles poles G: Gray Plug-in mounted Screw-mounted head) E-SF, E-CM TPS1SG G E-SF XPS1G G S-CF, S-NF TCR0SG XPS G S-RF, S-RE S-NE, S-NN 00 H-NE, L-NE TCR0LG S00-CF, S00-NF S00-RF, S00-RE S00-NE, S00-NN TCR0SG XPS Notes:. The asterisk indicates the number of poles. Please state the number of poles at the asterisk position when ordering. One set includes one terminal cover fot the ON side and one for the OFF side.. Values in parentheses indicate the distance to the head of terminal cover mounting screws.. There will be an approx. 0 mm gap between the bottom of the terminal cover and the breaker mounting surface H00-NE, L00-NE TCR0LG (1) Terminal covers for motor protection breakers are 3-pole type only. () Terminal covers for switch-disconnectors are 3-pole and -pole type only. G G G CS for front-connected with cable clamps breakers Frame size (A) 5 00 Types of breakers Order codes 1 Marking codes 3 poles poles B Colour of cover G: Gray S-GF TCS1SG TCS1S G S-NF, S-GF TCS1SG TCR1S G S-NM, S-NN H-NF, L-NF TCS5SG TCS5S G S-NF, S-GF TCS1SG TCS1S G S-NN H-NF, L-NF TCR5SG TCR5S G E5-NF, S5-NF TCS5SG TCS5S G S5-GF, S5-NM H5-NF, L5-NF S5-GE Terminal cover A TCS5SG TCS5S G S-NF, S-GF TCS5SG TCS5S G S00-CF, S00-NF TCS0SG TCS0S G S00-GF S00-NE, S00-GE S00-PF, S00-PE S00-NN B C D Mounting version Plug-in mounted Screw-mounted Accessories H00-NE, L00-NE TCS0SG TCS0S G Notes:. The asterisk indicates the number of poles. Please state the number of poles at the asterisk position when ordering. One set includes one terminal cover fot the ON side and one for the OFF side. (1) Terminal covers for motor protection breakers are 3-pole type only. -59

130 Accessories Molded Case Circuit Breakers cexternally mounted accessories 7. Interpole barriers (BA) Interpole barriers serve to enhance electrical insulation between poles and prevent short-circuit due to electrically conductive foreign matter. Combined use of interpole barriers and terminal covers (standard type) is not possible. P 3 P P B Slide interpole barriers into the grooves located on the breaker. A N A Black B To be stated when ordering Please state the type when ordering. One set contains two barriers. Caution: Be sure to use the interpole barriers supplied with the breaker in order to prevent accidents. -0 Types and dimensions of interpole barriers, units in mm Frame Interpole barrier Types of breakers size Type Code A B E-SF,E-CM TQQ-CC 3 S-SF TBA1L3SH 55 S-GF TBA13SH TBA1S 7 53 E-SF TQQ-CC 3 S-NF,S-GF TBA13SH TBA1S 7 53 S-NM,S-NN H-NF,L-NF TBA53LH TBA5L S-SF,S-SN TBA1L3SH 55 S-NF,S-GF TBA13SH TBA1S 7 53 H-NF,L-NF TBA53LH TBA5L 5 E5-NF,S5-NF S5-GF,S5-NM TBA53SH TBA5S 53 H5-NF,L5-NF S5-GE TBA53LH TBA5L S-NF,S-GF TBA53SH TBA5S S00-CF,S00-NF S00-GF S00-NE,S00-GE S00-PF,S00-OE H00-NE,L00-NE TBA03SH TQQ-5BA E-SF,S-SF S-SN S-CF,S-NF S-RF,S-NE S-RE,S-GN H-NE,L-NE S00-CF,S00-NF S00-RF,S00-NE S00-RE,S00-GN H00-NE,L00-NE TBA5L3SH TBA5LS TBA03SH TQQ-5BA TBA03SH TQQ-5BA TL-0NE TQQ-5BA TQQ-5BA TL-NE TQQ-5BA TQQ-5BA S0-NE,S0-GE TBA03SH TQQ-5BA S0-NN 100 S100-NE,S100-NN TBA03SH TQQ-5BA Note: Lime side interpole barriers are supplied as standard for all front connected breakres except E-SF, E-CM and E-SF.

131 . Terminal blocks (TF) terminals Vertical leading type with /A frame Mounting position/typical terminal arrangement Dimensions, mm Left terminal arrangement Ex. 1 Ex. AXc1 AXc1 AXb1 AXb1 AXa1 AXa1 AXc ALc1 AXb ALb1 AXa ALa1 3/ poles ON OFF Leading direction Right terminal arrangement Ex. 1 Ex. C1 C D1 D A Frame size (A) Types of breakers A B S-GF.5 7 S-NF,S-GF S-NM,S-NN.5 7 S-NF,S-GF,S-NN.5 7 Notes: 1) Tightening torque of M3.5 terminal screws: N m ) Applicable wire size: 1.5mm max 3) Horizontal leading type with max applicable wire size of.0 mm is available on request. Contact us for details. M3.5 screw Leading direction 11.5 Terminal cover (clear) 0 B poles ON OFF Leading direction Right terminal arrangement Ex. 1 Ex. Ex. 3 Ex. AXc1 AXb1 AXa1 AXc AXb AXa AXc1 AXb1 AXa1 ALc1 ALb1 ALa1 C1 C D1 D A 11.5 M3.5 screw Terminal cover (clear) 0 B 11 terminals Vertical leading type with /A frame Mounting position/typical terminal arrangement Left terminal arrangement Ex. 1 Ex. AXc1 AXb1 AXa1 AXc AXb AXa ALc1 ALb1 ALa1 D1 D M3.5 screw Leading direction Leading direction 3/ poles ON OFF Fig Terminal cover (clear) Right terminal arrangement Dimensions, mm Frame size (A) Types of breakers A B C D Fig S-GF (3/ poles) S-NF,S-GF ( poles) S-NF,S-GF S-NN (3/ poles) S-NM S-NF,S-GF ( poles) S-NN (3/ poles) Notes: 1) Tightening torque of M3.5 terminal screws: N m ) Applicable wire size:.0mm max 1 : Special specification. Not applicable to Plug-in (High-performance) type. Accessories poles ON OFF Fig. B M3.5 screw Terminal cover (clear) Ex. 1 Ex. Ex. 3 AXc1 AXb1 AXa1 AXc AXb AXa ALc1 ALb1 ALa1 C1 C D1 D -1

132 Accessories Molded Case Circuit Breakers cexternally mounted accessories. Terminal blocks (TF) terminals Vertical leading type with /A frame Mounting position/typical terminal arrangement Left terminal arrangement Ex. 1 3/ poles ON OFF Right terminal arrangement Ex. 1 Ex. 3 A.5 Dimensions, mm Frame size (A) Types of breakers A S-SF (/3 poles) 9 S-SF (/3/ poles) 9 Notes: 1) Tightening torque of M3.5 terminal screws: N m ) Applicable wire size:.0mm max 1 Terminal cover (clear) 55 poles Right terminal arrangement ON OFF 5 7 Ex. 1 Ex. A.5 1 Terminal cover (clear) 55 terminals Vertical leading type with A frame Mounting position/typical terminal arrangement Dimensions, mm Frame size (A) Types of breakers A E-SF (3 poles) 7 S-SF,S-SN (3/ poles) 7 3/ poles Notes: 1) Tightening torque of M3.5 terminal screws: N m ) Applicable wire size:.0mm max Left terminal arrangement Ex. 1 Ex. ALa1 ALa1 ALb1 ALb1 ALc1 ALc1 AXc AXc1 AXc1 AXb AXb1 AXb1 AXa AXa1 AXa1 ON OFF 5 7 Right terminal arrangement Ex. 1 Ex. Ex. 3 ALa ALb ALc ALa ALb ALc AXc3 AXb3 AXa3 C C1 AXc3 AXc AXb3 AXb AXa3 AXa 1 55 Terminal cover (clear) A.5 pieces of terminal blocks can be fitted side by side. -

133 terminals Vertical leading type with //5/A frame Mounting position/typical terminal arrangement Left terminal arrangement Ex. 1 Ex. AXc1 AXc1 AXb1 AXb1 AXa1 AXa1 AXc ALc1 AXb ALb1 AXa ALa1 3/ poles ON OFF Leading direction Right terminal arrangement Ex. 1 Ex. C1 C D1 D A M3.5 screw Leading direction B Terminal cover (clear) Dimensions, mm Frame size (A) Types of breakers A B H-NF,L-NF 77.5 H-NF,L-NF E5-NF,S5-NF,S5-GF S5-NM.5 7 S5-GE,H5-NF,L5-NF S-NF,S-GF.5 7 Notes: 1) Tightening torque of M3.5 terminal screws: N m ) Applicable wire size: 1.5mm max 3) Horizontal leading type with max applicable wire size of.0 mm is available on request. Contact us for details. 11 terminals Vertical leading type with /5/A frame Mounting position/typical terminal arrangement Left terminal arrangement Ex. 1 Ex. AXc1 AXc1 AXb1 AXb1 AXa1 AXa1 AXc AXc AXb AXb AXa AXa ALc1 ALc1 ALb1 ALb1 ALa1 ALa1 C1 D1 C D M3.5 screw Leading direction 3/ poles ON OFF 0 Terminal cover (clear) Accessories Dimensions, mm Frame size (A) Types of breakers A C D H-NF,L-NF H-NF,L-NF E5-NF,S5-NF,S5-GF,S5-NM S5-GE,H5-NF,L5-NF S-NF,S-GF Notes: 1) Tightening torque of M3.5 terminal screws: N m ) Applicable wire size:.0mm max -3

134 Accessories Molded Case Circuit Breakers cexternally mounted accessories. Terminal blocks (TF) terminals Vertical leading type with 00A frame Mounting position/typical terminal arrangement 3/ poles A Left terminal arrangement Ex. 1 Ex. AXc1 AXc1 AXb1 AXb1 AXa1 AXa1 AXc ALc1 AXb ALb1 AXa ALa1 ON OFF Leading direction Right terminal arrangement Ex. 1 Ex. PALc PALc PALa PALa k k R R C1 D1 C D M3.5 screw Leading direction Dimensions, mm Frame size (A) Types of breakers A B 00 S00-CF,S00-NF S00-NE,S00-GF,S00-GE,S00-PF,S00-PE S00-NN H00-NE,L00-NE Terminal cover (clear) B Notes: 1) Tightening torque of M3.5 terminal screws: N m ) Applicable wire size: 1.5mm max 3) Horizontal leading type with max applicable wire size of.0 mm is available on request. Contact us for details. 11 terminals Vertical leading type with 00A frame Mounting position/typical terminal arrangement Left terminal arrangement Ex. 1 AXc1 AXb1 AXa1 AXc AXb AXa ALc1 ALb1 ALa1 AXc3 AXb M3.5 screw Leading direction 3/ poles ON OFF Leading direction Right terminal arrangement Ex. 1 Ex. PALc PALa k R C1 C PALc PALa k R D1 D 0 Terminal cover (clear) Dimensions, mm Frame size (A) Types of breakers A C D 00 S00-CF,S00-NF S00-NE,S00-GF,S00-GE,S00-PF,S00-PE S00-NN H00-NE,L00-NE Notes: 1) Tightening torque of M3.5 terminal screws: N m ) Applicable wire size:.0mm max -

135 terminals Vertical leading type with /00A frame Mounting position/typical terminal arrangement 3/ poles A Left terminal arrangement Ex. 1 Ex. AXc1 AXc1 AXb1 AXb1 AXa1 AXa1 AXc ALc1 AXb ALb1 AXa ALa1 ON OFF Leading direction Right terminal arrangement Ex. 1 Ex. PALc PALc PALa PALa k k R R C1 D1 C D M3.5 screw Leading direction Dimensions, mm Frame size (A) Types of breakers A B S-CF,S-NF,S-RF,S-NE,S-RE,S-GN H-NE,L-NE S00-CF,S00-NF,S00-RF,S00-NE,S00-RE,S00-NN H00-NE,L00-NE Terminal cover (clear) B Notes: 1) Tightening torque of M3.5 terminal screws: N m ) Applicable wire size: 1.5mm max 3) Horizontal leading type with max applicable wire size of.0 mm is available on request. Contact us for details. ) Contact us for details if alarm switches are required. 11 terminals Vertical leading type with /00A frame Mounting position/typical terminal arrangement Left terminal arrangement Ex. 1 AXc1 AXb1 AXa1 AXc AXb AXa ALc1 ALb1 ALa1 AXc3 AXb M3.5 screw Leading direction 3/ poles ON OFF Leading direction Right terminal arrangement Ex. 1 Ex. PALc PALa k R C1 C PALc PALa k R D1 D 0 Terminal cover (clear) Accessories Dimensions, mm Frame size (A) Types of breakers A C D S-CF,S-NF,S-RF,S-NE,S-RE,S-GN 31.5 H-NE,L-NE S00-CF,S00-NF,S00-RF,S00-NE,S00-RE,S00-NN 31.5 H00-NE,L00-NE Notes: 1) Tightening torque of M3.5 terminal screws: N m ) Applicable wire size:.0mm max -5

136 Accessories Molded Case Circuit Breakers cexternally mounted accessories. Terminal blocks (TF) Vertical leading type with A frame Mounting position/typical terminal arrangement Dimensions, mm Frame size (A) Types of breakers A B C D E-SF,E-CM Left terminal arrangement Ex. 1 Ex. 3 poles Leading direction Right terminal arrangement Ex. 3 Ex. w 0 Notes: 1) Tightening torque of M3.5 terminal screws: N. m ) Applicable wire size: 1.5mm max (Vinyl-coated wire) AXb1 AXb U S AXa1 AXa AXc1 ALb1 AXc AXb ON U S ALa1 AXa1 OFF ALc1 AXc M screw Leading direction Leading direction poles Right terminal arrangement Terminal cover (clear) Ex. 1 Ex. Ex. 3 Ex. U S AXb1 AXb AXa1 AXa ON U S AXc1 ALb1 AXc AXb1 OFF ALa1 AXa1 10 ALc1 AXc M screw Terminal cover (clear) Vertical leading type with A frame Mounting position/typical terminal arrangement Dimensions, mm Frame size (A) Types of breakers A B C D Left terminal arrangement U S 10 Leading direction 3/ poles 7.5 Right terminal arrangement Ex. 1 Ex. Ex. 3 Ex. AXb1 AXa1 AXb AXa 0 E-SF Notes: : Terminal block cannot be mounted on the breaker which is equipped with the motor operator. 1) Tightening torque of M3.5 terminal screws: N. m ) Applicable wire size: 1.5mm max (Vinyl-coated wire) U S ON AXc1 ALb1 AXc AXb1 OFF ALa1 AXa1 7.5 Left terminal arrangement Leading direction 10 poles ALc1 M screw AXc1 Terminal cover (clear) 0 Ex. 1 Ex. Ex. 3 Ex. U S AXb1 AXb 10 AXa1 AXa U S AXc1 ALb1 AXc AXb ON ALa1 AXa1 OFF ALc1 AXc Leading direction Terminal cover (clear) -

137 Horizontal leading type with 0/100A frame Mounting position/typical terminal arrangement Dimensions, mm Frame size (A) Types of breakers A B C D Left terminal arrangement Ex. 1 Ex. AXc1 AXc1 AXb1 AXb1 AXa1 AXa1 AXc AXc AXb AXb AXa AXa C 7. D A M screw 1 1 ON OFF 1 B Right terminal arrangement Ex. 3 Ex. ALc1 ALc1 ALb1 ALb1 ALa1 ALa1 ALc PALc ALb PALa ALa S0-NE S0-GE 51 S0-NN S100-NE S100-NN Notes: 1) Values in parentheses applies to -pole breakers. ) Tightening torque of M3.5 terminal screws: N. m 3) Applicable wire size:.0mm max x AXc3 AXb3 AXc AXb D1 D AXc3 AXb3 AXc AXb C1 C Horizontal leading type with 0 to 000A frame Mounting position/typical terminal arrangement Dimensions, mm Left terminal arrangement Ex. 1 Ex. U U S S ON 1 Right terminal arrangement Ex. 3 Ex. PALa AXb3 AXa3 7.5 Frame size (A) Types of breakers A B C D 0 TL-0NE TL-NE XS000NE,XS000NN Notes: : The terminal arrangement example shown in the figure applies to type XS000NE breakers only. 1) Values in parentheses applies to -pole breakers. ) Tightening torque of M3.5 terminal screws: N. m 3) Applicable wire size:.0mm max x Accessories M screw OFF PALc AXb AXc3 AXb AXa AXa AXc AXc 1 AXb1 AXa1 AXb1 AXa1 AXc1 ALb1 AXc1 ALb1 ALa1 ALc1 ALa1 ALc

138 Accessories Molded Case Circuit Breakers cexternally mounted accessories 9. Mechanical interlock Slide interlock (MS) The slide interlock provides a mechanical interlock between two breakers so that only one of the two can be closed. Moving the slide on the front of the breaker left and right allows activation or deactivation of the interlock. Dimensions mm Frame size (A) Types of breakers S-SF S-SF,S-SN Number of poles Breaker connection method Interlock Order codes 3 FC,RC TMS1L3SF : Arrangement Standard Line : Handle Frame Centre Line : Handle Centre Line FC,RC TMS1LSF Panel cutout (front view) R1 R1 5 5 The cutout dimensions allow for a side clearance of 1.0 mm from the bank of the breaker M 0.7 Tapped hole M 0.7 Tapped hole 5 0 -

139 Dimensions mm : Arrangement Standard Line : Handle Frame Centre Line : Handle Centre Line Frame size (A) Types of breakers S-SF S-SF,S-SN Number of poles Breaker connection method Interlock Order codes 3 PMC TMS1L3SC Panel cutout (front view) R1 5 The cutout dimensions allow for a side clearance of 1.0 mm from the bank of the breaker ± Conductor M Stud 3 17 (max.) ø.5 1 (max.) M Accessories -ø M 0.7 Tapped hole -9

140 Accessories Molded Case Circuit Breakers cexternally mounted accessories 9. Mechanical interlock : Arrangement Standard Line : Handle Frame Centre Line Dimensions mm : Handle Centre Line Frame size (A) Types of breakers S-GF S-NF,S-GF,S-NN S-NF,S-GF,S-NN Number of poles Breaker connection method Interlock Order codes 3 FC,RC TMS13SF FC,RC TMS1SF Notes: (1) The interlock cannot be applied to breakers equipped with a terminal block. Panel cutout (front view) R1 R1 5 5 The cutout dimensions allow for a side clearance of 1.0 mm from the bank of the breaker M 0.7 Tapped hole M 0.7 Tapped hole

141 Dimensions mm : Arrangement Standard Line : Handle Frame Centre Line : Handle Centre Line Frame size (A) Types of breakers S-GF S-NF,S-GF,S-NN S-NF,S-GF,S-NN Number of poles Breaker connection method Interlock Order codes 3 PMB TMS13SP PMB TMS1SP Panel cutout (front view) R1 5 The cutout dimensions allow for a side clearance of 1.0 mm from the bank of the breaker M 0.7 Tapped hole ø Mounting plate Accessories ø1 for accessory wiring when necessary

142 Accessories Molded Case Circuit Breakers cexternally mounted accessories 9. Mechanical interlock : Arrangement Standard Line : Handle Frame Centre Line Dimensions mm : Handle Centre Line Frame size (A) Types of breakers S-GF S-NF,S-GF,S-NN S-NF,S-GF,S-NN Number of poles Breaker connection method Interlock Order codes 3 PMC TMS13SC Panel cutout (front view) R1 5 The cutout dimensions allow for a side clearance of 1.0 mm from the bank of the breaker M 0.7 Tapped hole -ø Mounting plate

143 Dimensions mm : Arrangement Standard Line : Handle Frame Centre Line : Handle Centre Line Frame size (A) 5 Types of breakers Number of poles Breaker connection method Interlock Order codes H-NF,L-NF 3 FC,RC TMS53LF H-NF,L-NF FC,RC TMS5LF S5-NF,S5-GF 3 FC,RC TMS53SF S-NF,S-GF FC,RC TMS5SF H5-NF,L5-NF,S5-GE 3 FC,RC TMS53LF FC,RC TMS5LF A Panel cutout (front view) 5 R1 5 R1 The cutout dimensions allow for a side clearance of 1.0 mm from the bank of the breaker A Accessories 1 1 Tapped hole Tapped hole

144 Accessories Molded Case Circuit Breakers cexternally mounted accessories 9. Mechanical interlock : Arrangement Standard Line : Handle Frame Centre Line Dimensions mm : Handle Centre Line Frame size (A) 5 Types of breakers Number of poles Breaker connection method Interlock Order codes H-NF,L-NF 3 PMB TMS53LP H-NF,L-NF PMB TMS5LP S5-NF,S5-GF 3 PMB TMS53SP S-NF,S-GF PMB TMS5SP H5-NF,L5-NF,S5-GE 3 PMB TMS53LP PMB TMS5LP A Panel cutout (front view) R1 5 The cutout dimensions allow for a side clearance of 1.0 mm from the bank of the breaker H H M 0.7 Tapped hole ø Mounting plate

145 Dimensions mm : Arrangement Standard Line : Handle Frame Centre Line : Handle Centre Line Frame size (A) 5 Types of breakers H-NF,L-NF H-NF,L-NF S5-NF,S5-GF S-NF,S-GF H5-NF,L5-NF,S5-GE Number of poles Breaker connection method Interlock Order codes 3 PMC TMS53LC 3 PMC TMS53SC 3 PMC TMS53LC A Panel cutout (front view) R1 5 The cutout dimensions allow for a side clearance of 1.0 mm from the bank of the breaker A 10 5 M 0.7 Tapped hole -ø 13 Accessories 75 Mounting plate

146 Accessories Molded Case Circuit Breakers cexternally mounted accessories 9. Mechanical interlock Dimensions mm : Arrangement Standard Line : Handle Frame Centre Line : Handle Centre Line Frame size (A) 5 Types of breakers E-SF,S-SF S-SN Number of poles Breaker connection method Interlock Order codes 3 FC,RC TMS5L3SF FC,RC TMS5LSF Panel cutout (front view) 5 R1 5 R1 The cutout dimensions allow for a side clearance of 1.0 mm from the bank of the breaker M 0.7 Tapped hole M 0.7 Tapped hole

147 Dimensions mm : Arrangement Standard Line : Handle Frame Centre Line : Handle Centre Line Frame size (A) Types of breakers Number of poles Breaker connection method Interlock Order codes 5 E-SF,S-SF S-SN 3 PMC TMS5L3SC Panel cutout (front view) R1 5 The cutout dimensions allow for a side clearance of 1.0 mm from the bank of the breaker M 0.7 Tapped hole -ø 13 Accessories 75 Mounting plate

148 Accessories Molded Case Circuit Breakers cexternally mounted accessories 9. Mechanical interlock Dimensions mm Frame size Types of breakers (A) 00 S00-CF,S00-NF,S00-NE S00-GF,S00-GE,S00-NN S00-PF,S00-PE Number of poles Breaker connection method Interlock Order codes 3 FC,RC TMS03SF FC,RC TMS0SF H00-NE,L00-NE 3 FC,RC TMS03LF FC,RC TMS0LF A : Arrangement Standard Line : Handle Frame Centre Line : Handle Centre Line Notes: (1) The interlock cannot be applied to breakers equipped with front extension bars due to the shortage of the insulating distance. () The interlock cannot be applied to breakers equipped with terminal block. (3) A terminal cover cannot be mounted. 9 9 The cutout dimensions allow for a side clearance of 1.0 mm from the bank of the breaker. R R1 R A M M M M Tapped hole Tapped hole Tapped hole Tapped hole

149 Dimensions mm : Arrangement Standard Line : Handle Frame Centre Line : Handle Centre Line Frame size (A) Types of breakers 00 S00-CF,S00-NF,S00-NE S00-GF,S00-GE,S00-NN S00-PF,S00-PE Number of poles Breaker connection method Interlock Order codes 3 PMB TMS03SP PMB TMS0SP A 13.5 H00-NE,L00-NE 3 PMB TMS03LP PMB TMS0LP 0.5 Panel cutout (front view) R1 9 The cutout dimensions allow for a side clearance of 1.0 mm from the bank of the breaker. R1 R A Mounting angle Accessories M Tapped hole -ø -79

150 Accessories Molded Case Circuit Breakers cexternally mounted accessories 9. Mechanical interlock Dimensions mm : Arrangement Standard Line : Handle Frame Centre Line : Handle Centre Line Frame size (A) Types of breakers 00 S00-CF,S00-NF,S00-NE S00-GF,S00-GE,S00-NN S00-PF,S00-PE Number of poles Breaker connection method Interlock Order codes 3 PMC TMS03SC A.5 H00-NE,L00-NE 3 PMC TMS03LC Panel cutout (front view) R1 9 The cutout dimensions allow for a side clearance of 1.0 mm from the bank of the breaker M Tapped hole A ø Mounting angle -0

151 Dimensions mm : Arrangement Standard Line : Handle Frame Centre Line : Handle Centre Line Frame size (A) Types of breakers Number of poles Breaker connection method Interlock Order codes A 00 S-CF,S-NF,S-RF S-NE,S-RE,S-GN S00-CF,S00-NF,S00-RF S00-NE,S00-RE,S00-NN 3 FC,RC TMS03SF FC,RC TMS0SF H-NE,L-NE H00-NE,L00-NE 3 FC,RC TMS03LF FC,RC TMS0LF 17.5 Notes: (1) The interlock cannot be applied to breakers equipped with terminal block. Panel cutout (front view) 9 9 The cutout dimensions allow for a side clearance of 1.0 mm from the bank of the breaker M Tapped hole M Tapped hole M Tapped hole M Tapped hole Accessories -1

152 Accessories Molded Case Circuit Breakers cexternally mounted accessories 9. Mechanical interlock Dimensions mm : Arrangement Standard Line : Handle Frame Centre Line : Handle Centre Line Frame size (A) 00 Types of breakers S-CF,S-NF,S-RF S-NE,S-RE,S-GN S00-CF,S00-NF,S00-RF S00-NE,S00-RE,S00-NN H-NE,L-NE H00-NE,L00-NE Number of poles Breaker connection method Interlock Order codes 3 PMB TMS03SP PMB TMS0SP 3 PMB TMS03LP PMB TMS0LP A 17 Panel cutout (front view) ø9 M ø9 Tapped hole The cutout dimensions allow for a side clearance of 1.0 mm from the bank of the breaker A M Tapped hole

153 Dimensions mm : Arrangement Standard Line : Handle Frame Centre Line : Handle Centre Line Frame size (A) 00 Types of breakers S-CF,S-NF,S-RF S-NE,S-RE,S-GN S00-CF,S00-NF,S00-RF S00-NE,S00-RE,S00-NN Number of poles Breaker connection method Interlock Order codes 3 PMC TMS03SC A 3.5 H-NE,L-NE H00-NE,L00-NE 3 PMC TMS03LC 1.5 Panel cutout (front view) 9 The cutout dimensions allow for a side clearance of 1.0 mm from the bank of the breaker Accessories A ø11 M Tapped hole -3

154 f Accessories Molded Case Circuit Breakers cexternally mounted accessories 9. Mechanical interlock R h g d a d d e R R C a b k r Slide knob stroke r Slide knob stroke m m f Dimensions mm : Arrangement Standard Line : Handle Frame Centre Line : Handle Centre Line Frame size (A) Types of molded case circuit breakers Interlock Order codes Number of poles a b, E-SF,E-CM,E-SF XLF TL-0NE XLF TL-NE 0 S0-NE,S0-GE S0-NN XLF9 c d e f g h k m R R TMSX3SF TMSXSF S100-NE,S100-NN TMSX3SF TMSXSF XS000NE XLF10 Notes: 1 : Please order with the breakers. (1) The interlock cannot be applied to breakers equipped with a terminal block, UVT controller or OCR controller. () See the outline dimensions of the breaker for the drilling plan. 3 Contact us for the detailed dimensions. R h g a d e C a b k -

155 10. Door Flange (D.F) Door flanges are recommended to be used to cover the cutout of a switchboard panel. Fig. 1 Fig. Breaker outline M3 0.5 Flat head screw Panel M3 0.5 Flat head screw Panel drilling plan Breaker outline M 0.7 Flat head screw Panel Panel drilling plan tapped hole d tapped hole Dimensions mm Frame size (A) 5 Types of breakers Order codes Fig. A B C D E F G H Min Max Min Max Min Max S-SF TDF K d t E-SF,E-CM XAA M.5 3 S-GF TDF M.5 E-SF XAA M.5 3 S-NF,S-GF S-NM,S-NN H-NF,L-NF S-SF,S-SN S-NF,S-GF S-NN H-NF,L-NF TDF5 TDF5 TDF5 TDF M.5 M.5 M.5 M.5 S5-NF,S5-GF S5-NM S5-GE H5-NF,L5-NF TDF M.5 TDF M.5 M.5 TDF M.5 00 E-SF,S-SF S-SN S-NF,S-GF S00-CF,S00-NF S00-GF S00-NE,S00-GE S00-PF,S00-PE S00-NN TDF M.5 TDF M.5 00 H00-NE,L00-NE TDF M.5 S-CF,S-NF S-RF,S-NE S-RE,S-GN Notes: 1 : Handle centre line is applied. : Arrangement standard line is applied. TDF M.5 H-NE,L-NE TDF M.5 S00-CF,S00-NF S00-RF,S00-NE S00-RE,S00-NN TDF M.5 H00-NE,L00-NE TDF M.5 0 TL-0NE TAA M.5 5 TL-NE TAA M S0-NE,S0-GE S0-NN TDFX M S100-NE,S100-NN TDFX M XS000NE,XS000NN TAA M0.7 5 Accessories -5

156

157 7 Characteristics and Outline Dimensions Molded Case Circuit Breakers E-SF7- E-SF 7- S-SF 7- S-SF 7- S-NF, S-GF, S-GF 7-10 S-NF, S-GF 7-1 S5-NF, S5-GF 7-1 E-SF, S-SF7-1 S-NF, S-GF 7-1 S00-CF, S00-NF, S00-GF, S00-PF7-0 H-NF, L-NF 7- H-NF, L-NF 7- H5-NF, L5-NF 7- S5-GE 7- S00-NE, S00-GE, S00-PE 7- H00-NE, L00-NE 7-3 S-CF, S-NF, S-RF 7-3 S-NE, S-RE 7-3 H-NE, L-NE 7-3 S00-CF, S00-NF, S00-RF7-0 S00-NE, S00-RE 7- H00-NE, L00-NE 7- S0-NE, S0-GE 7- S100-NE 7- E-CM 7- S-NM 7-5 S5-NM 7-5 S-NN 7-5 S-SN 7-5 S-NN 7-0 S-SN 7- S00-NN 7- S-GN 7- S00-NN 7- S0-NN 7- S100-NN 7-7 TL-0NE, TL-NE 7-7 XS000NE 7-7 XS000NN7-7 TB-5S 7-0 TB-5P 7- TB-5D 7- Mounting bases, branching bars and other accessories 7-7 S-GF, S, S 7- S5, S-NF, S-GF 7-9 E-SF, S-SF, S-SN7- H, H, H5, L, L, L S H00, L S, S Motor operators H, H00, L, L TL-0NE, TL-NE 7-9 S S XS E-SF7- E-SF Characteristics and Outline Dimensions 7-1

158 Type Number of poles Ratings Rated current, A Calibrated at 5 C Rated insulation voltageu i V AC Rated impulse withstand voltage U imp kv Rated breaking capacity, ka NK AC V I cu /I cs (sym) V 0V q DC V IEC097- AC V I cu /I cs (sym) 0V 0V V V 0V q DC V V Rated short time withstand current, ka Weight ( marked standard type) kg Connections and Mountings Front-connected (FC) Terminal screws With extension bars Rear-connected (RC) Bolt studs Flat bar studs Plug-in (PM) For switchboards Standard (PMC) High-performance (PMB) For distribution boards (PMC) Flush-mounted (FP) Draw-out type (DR) TemPlug (PG) TemPlug5B (PG) DIN rail mount Clip-in chassis mount Accessories (optional) Symbol Motor operator External operating Breaker-mounted handle Door-mounted (variable depth) Toggle extension Mechanical interlock Slide type Toggle holder Toggle lock Terminal cover For front-connected For rear-connected and plug-in Interpole barrier Terminal block for lead Door flange Standard specifications Overcurrent trip mechanism Trip button (color) Handle position indication (ON: Red, OFF: Green) Suitability for isolation CE marking Externally mounted 7 A Ratings and Specifications E-SF /-!3 5/-! 7.5/- 7.5/3. 10/5 10/5 1/ 5/13 7.5/3. / Bolt studs Thermal-magnetic7 (Red) Non Non Characteristics and Outline Dimensions Molded Case Circuit Breakers E-SF Notes: : Standard. This configuration used unless otherwise specified. : Optional standard. Specify when ordering. : yes or available. : no or not available. 1 : DC rating available on request. 7 : Hydraulic-magnetic type for below 10A rating.!3 : at 0V AC.! : at V AC. Frame Time/Current characteristic curves Tripping Time second minute hour Ambient Compensating Curves Percent current rating Percent current rating Min Min.(,0,,0,) A -A Rated Magnetic trip Current (A) current AC (A) Max. (,0,,0,) Max.10A 000 Percent Rated Current A 110 A A 0A 0A 0± 5±75 0± ±0 00±00 7± Magnetic trip setting 0% 000% 00 Calibrated temperature Ambient temperature ( C) Calibrated temperature Ambient temperature ( C) Combinations of Internally Mounted AccessoriesOptional Poles Auxiliary switch Alarm switch Shunt trip Under voltage trip 3 Toggle Left pole Right pole NOTE: -pole type breaker may incorporate only one combination of AX (max.c), AL, SH, UV, AX NOTE: The UV Controller is installed externally when provided with AC UV. AL into the right pole. 7-

159 : Arrangement Standard Line : Handle Frame Centre Line : Handle Centre Line Outline dimensions (mm) E-SF Front-connected 1.5 P 37.5 Mounting hole M5 0. screw Preparation of conductor (max.) ø (max.) max.t5 P M M 0.7 Tapped hole Rear-connected Insulated bushing ø1 P M 0.7 P Tapped hole M 0.7 Tapped hole 5 Panel cutout (front view) P ø R1 5 Mounting plate (max. t3.) M screw 5 5 M ø1 ø for accessory wiring when necessary Panel cutout dimensions shown give an allowance of 1.0mm around the handle escutcheon. Plug-in (For Switch board) Flush-mounted Detail of connecting part 3 The mounting plate is not supplied. 11 M screw P 1.5 C M5 0. L C L M Mounting plate (t=max.) 3 Mounting base (rear view) P ø (max.) 1(max.) Drilling plan (front view) P 75 1 Mounting plate (t=3.mm min) ø Allow a space of 5mm from adjacent breaker when the breaker is fitted with internal accessories. M screw Preparation of conductor P ø Characteristics and Outline Dimensions 7-3

Type Number of poles Ratings Rated current, A Calibrated at 5 C Rated insulation voltageu i V AC Rated impulse withstand voltage U imp kv Rated breaking capacity, ka NK AC V I cu /I cs (sym) V 0V q

160 Type Number of poles Ratings Rated current, A Calibrated at 5 C Rated insulation voltageu i V AC Rated impulse withstand voltage U imp kv Rated breaking capacity, ka NK AC V I cu /I cs (sym) V 0V q DC V IEC097- AC V I cu /I cs (sym) 0V 0V V V 0V q DC V V Rated short time withstand current, ka Weight ( marked standard type) kg Connections and Mountings Front-connected (FC) Terminal screws With extension bars Rear-connected (RC) Bolt studs Flat bar studs Plug-in (PM) For switchboards Standard (PMC) High-performance (PMB) For distribution boards (PMC) Flush-mounted (FP) Draw-out type (DR) TemPlug (PG) TemPlug5B (PG) DIN rail mount Clip-in chassis mount Accessories (optional) Symbol Motor operator External operating Breaker-mounted handle Door-mounted (variable depth) Toggle extension Mechanical interlock Slide type Toggle holder Toggle lock Terminal cover For front-connected For rear-connected and plug-in Interpole barrier Terminal block for lead Door flange Standard specifications Overcurrent trip mechanism Trip button (color) Handle position indication (ON: Red, OFF: Green) Suitability for isolation CE marking Externally mounted 7 A Ratings and Specifications E-SF /-!3 5/-! 7.5/- 7.5/3. 10/5 10/5 1/ 5/13 7.5/3. / Bolt studs Thermal-magnetic7 (Red) Non Non Characteristics and Outline Dimensions Molded Case Circuit Breakers E-SF Notes: : Standard. This configuration used unless otherwise specified. : Optional standard. Specify when ordering. : yes or available. : no or not available. 1 : DC rating available on request. 7 : Hydraulic-magnetic type for below 10A rating.!3 : at 0V AC.! : at V AC. Frame Time/Current characteristic curves Tripping Time second minute hour Ambient Compensating Curves Percent current rating Percent current rating Min. 10A Min. (0,75,A) Max. (0,75,A) Min.(,0,,0,A) Magnetic trip setting 0% 100% Rated Current (A) Max.10A Magnetic trip current AC (A) 0± 5±75 0± ±0 00±00 7± ±10 975±5 10±0 Max. (,0,,0,A) Percent Rated Current Ambient temperature ( C) A 75A A Calibrated 0A temperature 0A 0A A A Calibrated temperature Magnetic trip setting 0% 000% Ambient temperature ( C) Combinations of Internally Mounted AccessoriesOptional Poles Auxiliary switch Alarm switch Shunt trip 1 Under voltage trip Toggle Left pole Right pole NOTE: -pole type breaker may incorporate only one combination of AX (max.c), AL, SH, UV, AX NOTE: 1 Shunt trip is provided with anti-burnout switch. NOTE: The UV Controller is installed externally when provided with AC UV. AL into the left pole. 7-

161 : Arrangement Standard Line : Handle Frame Centre Line : Handle Centre Line Outline dimensions (mm) E-SF Front-connected P Mounting hole 3.(10-A) (0-A) M5 0. screw(10-a) M screw(0-a) Preparation of conductor ON side (max.) (max.) ø5.5(10-a) ø9(0-a) P OFF side C.5 ø5.5(10-a) ø9(0-a) (max.) (max.) M M 0.7 Tapped hole Rear-connected Insulated bushing ø P M 0.7 Tapped hole P M Tapped hole Panel cutout (front view) P ø17 Detail of connecting part P Mounting plate Rated Current (A) A The mounting plate is not supplied. 11 A Plug-in (For Switch board) Flush-mounted Rated Current (A) M screw M5 0. C screw A A B1 3.1 B B1 A1 B B Mounting plate (t=max.) C M M C M M Mounting base (rear view) Preparation of conductor 75 P 75 ø M5 0. M B A 1.5 Left and right poles (Left pole for P)A1 Left and right poles (Left pole for P)B1 110 P Center pole(right pole for P)B Center pole(right pole for P)A ø for accessory wiring when necessary (max.) C screw 10(max.) Mounting plate (t=3.mm min) P ø17 ø Allow a space of 5mm from adjacent breaker when the breaker is fitted with internal accessories. R ø Panel cutout dimensions shown give an allowance of 1.0mm around the handle escutcheon Characteristics and Outline Dimensions 7-5

Type Number of poles Ratings Rated current, A Calibrated at 5 C Externally mounted 7 A S-SF Ratings and Specifications S-SF 0 0 Rated insulation voltageu i V AC Rated impulse withstand voltage U imp

162 Type Number of poles Ratings Rated current, A Calibrated at 5 C Externally mounted 7 A S-SF Ratings and Specifications S-SF 0 0 Rated insulation voltageu i V AC Rated impulse withstand voltage U imp kv Rated breaking capacity, ka NK AC V I cu /I cs (sym) V 0V q DC V IEC097- AC V I cu /I cs (sym) 0V 0V V V 0V q DC V V Rated short time withstand current, ka Weight ( marked standard type) kg Connections and Mountings Front-connected (FC) Terminal screws With extension bars Rear-connected (RC) Bolt studs Flat bar studs Plug-in (PM) For switchboards Standard (PMC) High-performance (PMB) For distribution boards (PMC) Flush-mounted (FP) With flat bar studs Draw-out type (DR) TemPlug (PG) TemPlug5B (PG) DIN rail mount Clip-in chassis mount Accessories (optional) Symbol Motor operator External operating Breaker-mounted handle Door-mounted (variable depth) Toggle extension Mechanical interlock Slide type Toggle holder Toggle lock Terminal cover For front-connected For rear-connected and plug-in Interpole barrier Terminal block for lead Door flange Standard specifications Overcurrent trip mechanism Trip button (color) Handle position indication (ON: Red, OFF: Green) Suitability for isolation CE marking 5/13 /5 5/13 /3 1/ 5/13 / / /5 5/13 0/ (BAR) Thermal-magnetic (Red) Characteristics and Outline Dimensions Molded Case Circuit Breakers Notes: : Standard. This configuration used unless otherwise specified. : Optional standard. Specify when ordering. : yes or available. : no or not available. 1 : DC rating available on request. 3 : Line side interpole barriers are supplied as standard. (Front connection only)!1 : Provided with DIN rail adaptor. Frame Time/Current characteristic curves Tripping Time hour minute second Ambient Compensating Curves Percent current rating Min. A Rated Current (A) 0 0 Percent Rated Current 0A 0A A A A Max. Calibrated temperature Ambient temperature ( C) Magnetic trip current AC (A) 00±10 00±10 00±10 00±10 00±10 A 000 Combinations of Internally Mounted AccessoriesOptional Poles Auxiliary switch Alarm switch Shunt trip Under voltage trip 7- Toggle Left pole Right pole

163 : Arrangement Standard Line : Handle Frame Centre Line : Handle Centre Line Outline dimensions (mm) S-SF Front-connected Interpole barrier P (removable) LH LH Mounting hole M5 0. screw ø9 Preparation of conductor.5(max.) ø9 9(max.) With extension bars (optional) 1.5(max.) 1(max.) max.t5 max.t5 M 0.7 P 5 ø Drilling plan (front view) P LH LH M 0.7 Tapped hole Rear-connected Detail of connecting part B C A B A D C Mounting plate (max. t3.) D E P LH P LH LH Panel cutout (front view) P LH LH R M 0.7 Studs are horizontal direction only ø0 M 0.7 Tapped hole 1 1 Rated current (A) A B C D E Panel cutout dimensions shown give an allowance of 1.0mm around the handle escutcheon. Plug-in (Standard) Detail of connecting part Conductor 3 0 Preparation of conductor 1(max.) ø.5 17(max.) M screw Mounting base (rear view) LH M Mounting plate (t=3.mm min) 3 Drilling plan (front view) LH 75 ø Flush-mounted 1.5 P LH M Mounting plate (t=max) 0 B 107 M5 0. Detail of connecting part C 7 A B A D C D E 11 Rated current (A) A B C D E ø Mounting hole 5 P Characteristics and Outline Dimensions 7-7

Type Number of poles Ratings Rated current, A Calibrated at 5 C Externally mounted 7 A Characteristics and Outline Dimensions Molded Case Circuit Breakers S-SF Ratings and Specifications S-SF 0 0 75

164 Type Number of poles Ratings Rated current, A Calibrated at 5 C Externally mounted 7 A Characteristics and Outline Dimensions Molded Case Circuit Breakers S-SF Ratings and Specifications S-SF Rated insulation voltageu i V AC Rated impulse withstand voltage U imp kv Rated breaking capacity, ka NK AC V I cu /I cs (sym) V 0V q DC V IEC097- AC V I cu /I cs (sym) 0V 0V V V 0V q DC V V Rated short time withstand current, ka Weight ( marked standard type) kg Connections and Mountings Front-connected (FC) Terminal screws With extension bars Rear-connected (RC) Bolt studs Flat bar studs Plug-in (PM) For switchboards Standard (PMC) High-performance (PMB) For distribution boards (PMC) Flush-mounted (FP) With flat bar studs Draw-out type (DR) TemPlug (PG) TemPlug5B (PG) DIN rail mount Clip-in chassis mount Accessories (optional) Symbol Motor operator External operating Breaker-mounted handle Door-mounted (variable depth) Toggle extension Mechanical interlock Slide type Toggle holder Toggle lock Terminal cover For front-connected For rear-connected and plug-in Interpole barrier Terminal block for lead Door flange Standard specifications Overcurrent trip mechanism Trip button (color) Handle position indication (ON: Red, OFF: Green) Suitability for isolation CE marking 5/13 /5 5/13 /3 1/ 5/13 / / /5 5/13 0/ (BAR) Thermal-magnetic (Red) 5/13 /5 5/13 /3 1/ 5/13 / / /5 5/13 0/ (BAR) Thermal-magnetic (Red) Notes: : Standard. This configuration used unless otherwise specified. : Optional standard. Specify when ordering. : yes or available. : no or not available. 1 : DC rating available on request. 3 : Line side interpole barriers are supplied as standard. (Front connection only)!1 : Provided with DIN rail adaptor. Frame Time/Current characteristic curves Tripping Time hour minute second Min. 00 A, A Rated Current (A) Max Percent Rated Current Magnetic trip current AC (A) 00±10 00±10 00±10 00±10 00±10 0±00 0±00 00±0 00± Ambient Compensating Curves Percent current rating A, 0A 0A A, A 75A A A Calibrated temperature A Ambient temperature ( C) A 000 Combinations of Internally Mounted AccessoriesOptional Poles Auxiliary switch Alarm switch Shunt trip Under voltage trip 7- Toggle Left pole Right pole

165 : Arrangement Standard Line : Handle Frame Centre Line : Handle Centre Line Outline dimensions (mm) S-SF Interpole barrier (removable) P LH LH LH 1.5 Mounting hole Front-connected Rear-connected Detail of connecting part B C A B 75 D C A Mounting plate (max. t3.) D E 11 M5 0. screw (-A) M screw (0-A) LH P 7.7 ø9 LH.5(max.) 1.5(max.) max.t5 M 0.7 Preparation of conductor P ø9 9(max.) 1(max.) max.t5 LH P 5 With extension bars (optional) ø.3 LH P LH Drilling plan (front view) LH 5 LH 5 Panel cutout (front view) P LH LH M 0.7 Tapped hole F R M 0.7 Studs are horizontal direction only ø0 M 0.7 Tapped hole 1 1 Rated current (A) A B C D E F 5 Panel cutout dimensions shown give an allowance of 1.0mm around the handle escutcheon. Plug-in (Standard) Detail of connecting part Conductor 3 0 Preparation of conductor 1(max.) ø.5 17(max.) M screw Mounting base (rear view) LH M Mounting plate (t=3.mm min) 3 Drilling plan (front view) LH 75 ø Flush-mounted 1.5 P LH M Mounting plate (t=max) 0 B 107 M5 0. Detail of connecting part C 7 A B D C A F D E 11 Rated current (A) A B C D E ø Mounting hole F 5 5 P Characteristics and Outline Dimensions 7-9

166 Type Number of poles Ratings Rated current, A Calibrated at 5 C Externally mounted Ratings and Specifications Characteristics and Outline Dimensions Molded Case Circuit Breakers 7S-NF, S-GF, S-GF S-NF Rated insulation voltageu i V AC Rated impulse withstand voltage U imp kv Rated breaking capacity, ka NK AC V I cu /I cs (sym) V 0V q DC V IEC097- AC V I cu /I cs (sym) 0V 0V V V 0V q DC V V Rated short time withstand current, ka Weight ( marked standard type) kg Connections and Mountings Front-connected (FC) Terminal screws With extension bars Rear-connected (RC) Bolt studs Flat bar studs Plug-in (PM) For switchboards Standard (PMC) High-performance (PMB) For distribution boards (PMC) Flush-mounted (FP) With flat bar studs Draw-out type (DR) TemPlug (PG) TemPlug5B (PG) DIN rail mount Clip-in chassis mount Accessories (optional) Symbol Motor operator External operating Breaker-mounted handle Door-mounted (variable depth) Toggle extension Mechanical interlock Slide type Toggle holder Toggle lock Terminal cover For front-connected For rear-connected and plug-in Interpole barrier Terminal block for lead Door flange Standard specifications Overcurrent trip mechanism Trip button (color) Handle position indication (ON: Red, OFF: Green) Suitability for isolation CE marking / 5/5 / 5/19 / / 5/5 / / / 5/19 0/ BAR Thermal-magnetic (Red) S-GF 0 0 / /5 5/5 0/0 / 5/ /5 5/33 5/33 5/5 0/0 0/ BAR e Thermal-magnetic (Red) S-GF / /5 5/5 0/0 / 5/ /5 5/33 5/33 5/5 0/0 0/ BAR e Thermal-magnetic (Red) Notes: : Standard. This configuration used unless otherwise specified. : Optional standard. Specify when ordering. : yes or available. : no or not available. 1 : DC rating available on request. 3 : Line side interpole barriers are supplied as standard. (Front connection only)!1 : Provided with DIN rail adaptor. AA Frame Time/Current characteristic curves Tripping Time second minute hour Min.(0 A) Min.( A) 00 Max.(0 A) Max.(0 A) Max.( A) Percent Rated Current Magnetic trip setting % 10% Ambient Compensating Curves Calibrated at 5 C Percent current rating A A,0A A 75A,0A 0A A Calibrated temperature Ambient temperature ( C) Combinations of Internally Mounted AccessoriesOptional Poles Auxiliary switch Alarm switch Shunt trip Under voltage trip Toggle Left pole Right pole NOTE: -pole type breaker may incorporate only one combination of AX (max.c), AL, SH, UV, AX (max.c) AL into the right pole. 7-10

167 : Arrangement Standard Line : Handle Frame Centre Line : Handle Centre Line Outline dimensions (mm) S-NF, S-GF, S-GF Front-connected P Interpole barrier (removable) LH Mounting hole 7 Mscrew Preparation of conductor ø9 17(max.) max.t5.5(max.) With extension bars (optional) ø P LHC L LC M 0.7 LC M 0.7 Tapped hole Rear-connected LC Mounting plate (max. t3.) 5 13 Detail of connecting part 13.5 Conductor overlap, max P P LH Panel cutout (front view) P LH H 5 L 5 R Plug-in (Standard) Mounting hole LH LC Stud can be turned 5 or Detail of connecting part M Preparation of conductor ø.5 Mounting base (rear view) LH ø1 M 0.7 Tapped hole Note: Studs are factory installed in horizontal direction both on the line and load sides. Mscrew 3 Conductor (max.) 10(max.) 1 LH 7 ø 75 1 Panel cutout dimensions shown give an allowance of 1.0mm or more around the handle escutcheon M M Mounting plate Plug-in (High-performance) 1 LC P 55 Mounting hole Detail of connecting part Mscrew Conductor P only LC Mounting base (rear view) P 0 LH LH Preparation of conductor ø.5 (max.) 10(max.) P ø Flush-mounted P L C 1 M M5 0. Mounting plate (max. t) Left and right poles (Left pole for P) M Detail of connecting part 13.5 Conductor overlap, max Stud can be turned 5 or ø P Mounting hole Mounting plate.5 35 ø1 for accessory wiring when necessary Panel cutout (front view) Center pole, Neutral pole 37 (Left pole for P)7 Note: Studs are factory installed in horizontal direction both on the line and load sides Characteristics and Outline Dimensions

168 Type Number of poles Ratings Rated current, A Calibrated at 5 C Externally mounted Ratings and Specifications Characteristics and Outline Dimensions Molded Case Circuit Breakers 7S-NF, S-GF S-NF Rated insulation voltageu i V AC Rated impulse withstand voltage U imp kv Rated breaking capacity, ka NK AC V I cu /I cs (sym) V 0V q DC V IEC097- AC V I cu /I cs (sym) 0V 0V V V 0V q DC V V Rated short time withstand current, ka Weight ( marked standard type) kg Connections and Mountings Front-connected (FC) Terminal screws With extension bars Rear-connected (RC) Bolt studs Flat bar studs Plug-in (PM) For switchboards Standard (PMC) High-performance (PMB) For distribution boards (PMC) Flush-mounted (FP) With flat bar studs Draw-out type (DR) TemPlug (PG) TemPlug5B (PG) DIN rail mount Clip-in chassis mount Accessories (optional) Symbol Motor operator External operating Breaker-mounted handle Door-mounted (variable depth) Toggle extension Mechanical interlock Slide type Toggle holder Toggle lock Terminal cover For front-connected For rear-connected and plug-in Interpole barrier Terminal block for lead Door flange Standard specifications Overcurrent trip mechanism Trip button (color) Handle position indication (ON: Red, OFF: Green) Suitability for isolation CE marking / 5/5 / 5/19 / / 5/5 / / / 5/19 0/ BAR Thermal-magnetic (Red) S-GF / /5 5/5 0/0 / 5/ /5 5/33 5/33 5/5 0/0 0/ BAR e Thermal-magnetic (Red) Notes: : Standard. This configuration used unless otherwise specified. : Optional standard. Specify when ordering. : yes or available. : no or not available. 1 : DC rating available on request. 3 : Line side interpole barriers are supplied as standard. (Front connection only)!1 : Provided with DIN rail adaptor. Tripping Time A Frame Time/Current characteristic curves hour minute second Min Max. Magnetic trip setting 00% % Percent Rated Current Ambient Compensating Curves Percent current rating Calibrated temperature Ambient temperature ( C) 000 Combinations of Internally Mounted AccessoriesOptional Poles Auxiliary switch Alarm switch Shunt trip Under voltage trip Toggle Left pole Right pole NOTE: -pole type breaker may incorporate only one combination of AX (max.c), AL, SH, UV, AX (max.c) AL into the right pole. 7-1

169 : Arrangement Standard Line : Handle Frame Centre Line : Handle Centre Line Outline dimensions (mm) S-NF, S-GF Front-connected P Interpole barrier (removable) LH Mounting hole 7 Mscrew Preparation of conductor ø9 17(max.) max.t5.5(max.) With extension bars (optional) ø P LHC L LC M 0.7 LC M 0.7 Tapped hole Rear-connected LC Mounting plate (max. t3.) 5 13 Detail of connecting part 13.5 Conductor overlap, max P P LH Panel cutout (front view) P LH H 5 L 5 R Plug-in (Standard) Mounting hole LH LC Stud can be turned 5 or Detail of connecting part M Preparation of conductor ø.5 Mounting base (rear view) LH ø1 M 0.7 Tapped hole Note: Studs are factory installed in horizontal direction both on the line and load sides. Mscrew 3 Conductor (max.) 10(max.) 1 LH 7 ø 75 1 Panel cutout dimensions shown give an allowance of 1.0mm or more around the handle escutcheon M M Mounting plate Plug-in (High-performance) 1 LC P 55 Mounting hole Detail of connecting part Mscrew Conductor P only LC Mounting base (rear view) P 0 LH LH Preparation of conductor ø.5 (max.) 10(max.) P ø Flush-mounted P L C 1 M M5 0. Mounting plate (max. t) Left and right poles (Left pole for P) M Detail of connecting part 13.5 Conductor overlap, max Stud can be turned 5 or ø P Mounting hole Mounting plate.5 35 ø1 for accessory wiring when necessary Panel cutout (front view) Center pole, Neutral pole 37 (Left pole for P)7 Note: Studs are factory installed in horizontal direction both on the line and load sides Characteristics and Outline Dimensions

170 Type Number of poles Ratings Rated current, A Calibrated at 5 C center pole omitted Rated insulation voltageu i V AC Rated impulse withstand voltage U imp kv Rated breaking capacity, ka NK AC V I cu /I cs (sym) V 0V q DC V IEC097- AC V I cu /I cs (sym) 0V 0V V V 0V q DC V V Rated short time withstand current, ka Weight ( marked standard type) kg Connections and Mountings Front-connected (FC) Terminal screws With extension bars Rear-connected (RC) Bolt studs Flat bar studs Plug-in (PM) For switchboards Standard (PMC) High-performance (PMB) For distribution boards (PMC) Flush-mounted (FP) With flat bar studs Draw-out type (DR) TemPlug (PG) TemPlug5B (PG) DIN rail mount Clip-in chassis mount Accessories (optional) Symbol Motor operator External operating Breaker-mounted handle Door-mounted (variable depth) Toggle extension Mechanical interlock Slide type Toggle holder Toggle lock Terminal cover For front-connected For rear-connected and plug-in Interpole barrier Terminal block for lead Door flange Standard specifications Overcurrent trip mechanism Trip button (color) Handle position indication (ON: Red, OFF: Green) Suitability for isolation CE marking Externally mounted Ratings and Specifications Characteristics and Outline Dimensions Molded Case Circuit Breakers 7S5-NF, S5-GF S5-NF /7.5 5/5 5/5 0/0 7.5/7.5 5/5 5/5 35/35 35/35 5/5 0/0 0/ BAR 3 Thermal-magnetic (Red) S5-GF /7.5 /5 5/5 0/0 7.5/7.5 5/5 /5 5/35 5/35 5/5 0/0 0/ BAR 3 Thermal-magnetic (Red) Notes: : Standard. This configuration used unless otherwise specified. : Optional standard. Specify when ordering. : yes or available. : no or not available. 1 : DC rating available on request. 3 : Line side interpole barriers are supplied as standard. (Front connection only) 5A Frame Time/Current characteristic curves Tripping Time second minute hour Min Max. Percent Rated Current Magnetic trip setting 100% 0% Ambient Compensating Curves Percent current rating A 5A,A 00A 0A Calibrated temperature Ambient temperature ( C) 000 Combinations of Internally Mounted AccessoriesOptional Poles Auxiliary switch Alarm switch Shunt trip Under voltage trip Toggle Left pole Right pole 7-1

171 : Arrangement Standard Line : Handle Frame Centre Line : Handle Centre Line Outline dimensions (mm) S5-NF, S5-GF Front-connected Interpole barrier (removable) 9 9 Mounting hole Preparation of conductor With extension bars (optional) ø Mscrew 5(max.) max.t7 ø11 10(max.) M 0.7 LC ø Conductor overlap, max M 0.7 Tapped hole Rear-connected Mounting plate (max. t3.) ø Panel cutout (front view) 5.5 R1 1 Conductor overlap, max ø Plug-in (Standard) Mounting hole LH Stud can be turned 5 or Detail of connecting part M (max.) LH M 0.7 Tapped hole Note: Studs are factory installed in horizontal direction both on the line and load sides. Mounting plate Conductor width, max.5 M screw Auxiliary circuit terminals Mounting base (rear view) Panel cutout dimensions shown give an allowance of 1.0mm or more around the handle escutcheon. LH 75 ø M M 105 Mounting plate Plug-in (High-performance) 00 LH 9 Mounting hole LH Detail of connecting part (max.) Conductor width, max. M screw Mounting base (rear view) Preparation of conductor ø (max.) (max.) LC H L Drilling plan (front view) H L ø Flush-mounted H L 17.5 Conductor overlap, max 7 M M5 0. Mounting plate (max. t) ø9 Left and right poles1 37 Center pole, Neutral pole Stud can be turned 5 or M -ømounting hole Note: Studs are factory installed in horizontal direction both on the line and load sides Panel cutout (front view) Mounting plate Characteristics and Outline Dimensions 7-

Type Number of poles Ratings Rated current, A Calibrated at 5 C center pole omitted Rated insulation voltageu i V AC Rated impulse withstand voltage U imp kv Rated breaking capacity, ka NK AC V I cu

172 Type Number of poles Ratings Rated current, A Calibrated at 5 C center pole omitted Rated insulation voltageu i V AC Rated impulse withstand voltage U imp kv Rated breaking capacity, ka NK AC V I cu /I cs (sym) V 0V q DC V IEC097- AC V I cu /I cs (sym) 0V 0V V V 0V q DC V V Rated short time withstand current, ka Weight ( marked standard type) kg Connections and Mountings Front-connected (FC) Terminal screws With extension bars Rear-connected (RC) Bolt studs Flat bar studs Plug-in (PM) For switchboards Standard (PMC) High-performance (PMB) For distribution boards (PMC) Flush-mounted (FP) With flat bar studs Draw-out type (DR) TemPlug (PG) TemPlug5B (PG) DIN rail mount Clip-in chassis mount Accessories (optional) Symbol Motor operator External operating Breaker-mounted handle Door-mounted (variable depth) Toggle extension Mechanical interlock Slide type Toggle holder Toggle lock Terminal cover For front-connected For rear-connected and plug-in Interpole barrier Terminal block for lead Door flange Standard specifications Overcurrent trip mechanism Trip button (color) Handle position indication (ON: Red, OFF: Green) Suitability for isolation CE marking Externally mounted 7 A Ratings and Specifications E-SF (BAR) Thermal-magnetic (Red) E-SF, S-SF Notes: : Standard. This configuration used unless otherwise specified. : Optional standard. Specify when ordering. : yes or available. : no or not available. 1 : DC rating available on request. 3 : Line side interpole barriers are supplied as standard. (Front connection only) Characteristics and Outline Dimensions Molded Case Circuit Breakers (BAR) Thermal-magnetic (Red) S-SF BAR Thermal-magnetic (Red) BAR Thermal-magnetic (Red) Tripping Time Frame Time/Current characteristic curves hour minute second Min Max Percent Rated Current Magnetic trip setting A 0% 130% Magnetic trip setting A 5A 100% 0% Ambient Compensating Curves Percent current rating A A 0A A 175A 5A Calibrated temperature Ambient temperature ( C) 000 Combinations of Internally Mounted AccessoriesOptional Poles Auxiliary switch Alarm switch Shunt trip Under voltage trip Toggle Left pole Right pole 7-1

173 : Arrangement Standard Line : Handle Frame Centre Line : Handle Centre Line Outline dimensions (mm) E-SF, S-SF Preparation of With extension bars conductor (optional) Interpole barrier Mounting hole (removable) Interpole barrier LH LH Conductor (removable) Conductor overlap, max overlap, max 5(max.) Mounting hole max.t7 M screw LH LH Front-connected 101 ø9 11(max.) LH Drilling plan (front view) LH M ø11 ø M 0.7 Tapped hole For the extension bars, straight bars or spread bars can be supplied. Rear-connected Panel cutout (front view) Detail of connecting part Mounting plate (max. t3.) LH LH ø LH LH 10 5 Conductor overlap, max 5 ø9 0 7 Plug-in (Standard) Detail of connecting part M 0.7 Stud can be turned or Mounting plate Conductor width, max.5 1.5(max.) 9 M screw 0 1 M5 0. Auxiliary circuit terminals Mounting base (rear view) 10 LH M 0.7 Tapped hole Drilling plan (front view) LH R1 1 Panel cutout dimensions shown give an allowance of 1.0mm around the handle escutcheon. ø (0) M Mounting plate Flush-mounted M Mounting plate (max.t) 17 1 Conductor overlap, max ø ø Mounting hole 11 Stud can be turned 5 or Characteristics and Outline Dimensions 7-17

174 Type Number of poles Ratings Rated current, A Calibrated at 5 C center pole omitted Rated insulation voltageu i V AC Rated impulse withstand voltage U imp kv Rated breaking capacity, ka NK AC V I cu /I cs (sym) V 0V q DC V IEC097- AC V I cu /I cs (sym) 0V 0V V V 0V q DC V V Rated short time withstand current, ka Weight ( marked standard type) kg Connections and Mountings Front-connected (FC) Terminal screws With extension bars Rear-connected (RC) Bolt studs Flat bar studs Plug-in (PM) For switchboards Standard (PMC) High-performance (PMB) For distribution boards (PMC) Flush-mounted (FP) With flat bar studs Draw-out type (DR) TemPlug (PG) TemPlug5B (PG) DIN rail mount Clip-in chassis mount Accessories (optional) Symbol Motor operator External operating Breaker-mounted handle Door-mounted (variable depth) Toggle extension Mechanical interlock Slide type Toggle holder Toggle lock Terminal cover For front-connected For rear-connected and plug-in Interpole barrier Terminal block for lead Door flange Standard specifications Overcurrent trip mechanism Trip button (color) Handle position indication (ON: Red, OFF: Green) Suitability for isolation CE marking Externally mounted Ratings and Specifications Characteristics and Outline Dimensions Molded Case Circuit Breakers 7S-NF, S-GF S-NF 3 7.5/7.5 5/5 5/5 0/0 7.5/7.5 5/5 5/5 35/35 35/35 5/5 0/0 0/ BAR Thermal-magnetic (Red) S-GF 3 7.5/7.5 /5 5/5 0/0 7.5/7.5 5/5 /5 5/35 5/35 5/5 0/0 0/ BAR e Thermal-magnetic (Red) Notes: : Standard. This configuration used unless otherwise specified. : Optional standard. Specify when ordering. : yes or available. : no or not available. 1 : DC rating available on request. 3 : Line side interpole barriers are supplied as standard. (Front connection only) Tripping Time A Frame Time/Current characteristic curves hour minute second Min Max. Magnetic trip setting 00% % Percent Rated Current Ambient Compensating Curves Percent current rating Calibrated temperature Ambient temperature ( C) 000 Combinations of Internally Mounted AccessoriesOptional Poles Auxiliary switch Alarm switch Shunt trip Under voltage trip Toggle Left pole Right pole 7-1

175 : Arrangement Standard Line : Handle Frame Centre Line : Handle Centre Line Outline dimensions (mm) S-NF, S-GF Front-connected Interpole barrier (removable) 9 9 Mounting hole Preparation of conductor With extension bars (optional) ø Mscrew 5(max.) max.t7 ø11 10(max.) M 0.7 LC ø Conductor overlap, max M 0.7 Tapped hole Rear-connected Mounting plate (max. t3.) ø Panel cutout (front view) 5.5 R1 1 Conductor overlap, max ø Plug-in (Standard) Mounting hole LH Stud can be turned 5 or Detail of connecting part M (max.) LH M 0.7 Tapped hole Note: Studs are factory installed in horizontal direction both on the line and load sides. Mounting plate Conductor width, max.5 M screw Auxiliary circuit terminals Mounting base (rear view) Panel cutout dimensions shown give an allowance of 1.0mm or more around the handle escutcheon. LH 75 ø M M 105 Mounting plate Plug-in (High-performance) 00 LH 9 Mounting hole LH Detail of connecting part (max.) Conductor width, max. M screw Mounting base (rear view) Preparation of conductor ø (max.) (max.) LC H L Drilling plan (front view) H L ø Flush-mounted H L 17.5 Conductor overlap, max 7 M M5 0. Mounting plate (max. t) ø9 Left and right poles1 37 Center pole, Neutral pole Stud can be turned 5 or M -ømounting hole Note: Studs are factory installed in horizontal direction both on the line and load sides Panel cutout (front view) Mounting plate Characteristics and Outline Dimensions 7-19

176 Type Number of poles Ratings Rated current, A Calibrated at 5 C Rated insulation voltageu i V AC Rated impulse withstand voltage U imp kv Rated breaking capacity, ka NK AC V I cu /I cs (sym) V 0V q DC V IEC097- AC V I cu /I cs (sym) 0V 0V V V 0V q DC V V Rated short time withstand current, ka Weight ( marked standard type) kg Connections and Mountings Front-connected (FC) Terminal screws With extension bars Rear-connected (RC) Bolt studs Flat bar studs Plug-in (PM) For switchboards Standard (PMC) High-performance (PMB) For distribution boards (PMC) Flush-mounted (FP) With flat bar studs Draw-out type (DR) TemPlug (PG) TemPlug5B (PG) DIN rail mount Clip-in chassis mount Accessories (optional) Symbol Motor operator External operating Breaker-mounted handle Door-mounted (variable depth) Toggle extension Mechanical interlock Slide type Toggle holder Toggle lock Terminal cover For front-connected For rear-connected and plug-in Interpole barrier Terminal block for lead Door flange Standard specifications Overcurrent trip mechanism Trip button (color) Handle position indication (ON: Red, OFF: Green) Suitability for isolation CE marking Externally mounted Ratings and Specifications Characteristics and Outline Dimensions Molded Case Circuit Breakers 7S00-CF, S00-NF, S00-GF, S00-PF S00-CF / / / 0/0 / / / 3/3 3/3 / 0/0 0/0. 5. BAR Thermal-magnetic (Red) S00-NF / 5/5 5/5 0/ / 5/5 / / 5/5 0/0 0/0. 5. BAR e Thermal-magnetic (Red) S00-GF / 5/ /5 0/ / 5/ / / /5 0/0 0/0. 5. BAR e Thermal-magnetic (Red) Notes: : Standard. This configuration used unless otherwise specified. : Optional standard. Specify when ordering. : Semi-standard. : yes or available. : no or not available. 1 : DC rating available on request. 3 : Line side interpole barriers are supplied as standard. (Front connection only) 9 : The mechanical interlock is not applicable to the draw-out type (DR). S00-PF / / 0/0 5/5 5/5 /5 0/0 0/0. 5. BAR e Thermal-magnetic (Red) 00A Frame Time/Current characteristic curves Tripping Time second minute hour Max.(0 00A) Max.( A) Min.(0 00A) Min.( A) 1 0. Setting tolerance(x) Setting tolerance(x1) 0. X1 0. X Adjustable setting 0.1 range of magnetic 0.0 trip(notes:.) Percent Rated Current Ambient Compensating Curves Percent current rating A A 175A 5A 0A 00A 00,,0A Calibrated temperature Ambient temperature ( C) Magnetic trip pickup current Rated current Magnetic trip pickup current (A) Adjustable range (A) Notes: 1. Setting tolerance: ±0%.. The protection characteristic curves assume that the magnetic trip current is adjustable. 3. Unless otherwise stated when ordering, the selector dial is factory set to position 1.. The trip pickup current of DC models is not adjustable; the dial position corresponding to the trip pickup current is marked with a white point. 000 Combinations of Internally Mounted AccessoriesOptional Poles Auxiliary switch Alarm switch Shunt trip Under voltage trip Toggle Left pole Right pole 7-0

177 : Arrangement Standard Line : Handle Frame Centre Line : Handle Centre Line Outline dimensions (mm) S00-CF, S00-NF, S00-GF, S00-PF Front-connected Interpole barrier (removable) Mounting hole H L Preparation of conductor With extension bars (optional) ON side:3 OFF side:35 ø M10 screw 5 3 (max.) H L H L 1 (max.) ø M Trip button (red) M Tapped hole Rear-connected Mounting plate Stud can be turned 5 or H L 103 H L H L Groove for dissipating heat generated by eddy current Panel cutout (front view) Plug-in (Standard) ø Conductor overlap, max 39 ø Conductor overlap, max M Tapped hole Note: Studs are factory installed in horizontal direction both on the line and load sides. Detail of connecting part M Conductor width, max. 35 M10screw 1 ø3 Mounting base (rear view) Auxiliary circuit terminals ø9 R Panel cutout dimensions shown give an allowance of 1.0mm around the handle escutcheon Mounting plate Plug-in (High-performance) LC H L H M10screw L H L H L H L H L (max.) H L.5 3 M (max.) LC t max. ø13 Preparation of conductor ø Flush-mounted Detail of connecting part M5 Conductor width, max. Mounting plate Mounting base (rear view) 0 Stud can be turned 5 or Note: Studs are factory installed in horizontal direction both on the line and load sides (max.) -ø Panel cutout (front view) LC 5 Mounting angle ø7 Mounting hole Characteristics and Outline Dimensions

178 Type Number of poles Ratings Rated current, A Calibrated at 5 C Rated insulation voltageu i V AC Rated impulse withstand voltage U imp kv Rated breaking capacity, ka NK AC V I cu /I cs (sym) V 0V q DC V IEC097- AC V I cu /I cs (sym) 0V 0V V V 0V q DC V V Rated short time withstand current, ka Weight ( marked standard type) kg Connections and Mountings Front-connected (FC) Terminal screws With extension bars Rear-connected (RC) Bolt studs Flat bar studs Plug-in (PM) For switchboards Standard (PMC) High-performance (PMB) For distribution boards (PMC) Flush-mounted (FP) With flat bar studs Draw-out type (DR) TemPlug (PG) TemPlug5B (PG) DIN rail mount Clip-in chassis mount Accessories (optional) Symbol Motor operator External operating Breaker-mounted handle Door-mounted (variable depth) Toggle extension Mechanical interlock Slide type Toggle holder Toggle lock Terminal cover For front-connected For rear-connected and plug-in Interpole barrier Terminal block for lead Door flange Standard specifications Overcurrent trip mechanism Trip button (color) Handle position indication (ON: Red, OFF: Green) Suitability for isolation CE marking Externally mounted Ratings and Specifications Characteristics and Outline Dimensions Molded Case Circuit Breakers 7H-NF, L-NF H-NF / 10/0 0/0 0/ 5/5 10/0 /5 /5 0/0 0/0 0/0. 3. BAR e Thermal-magnetic (Red) L-NF /0 10/135 00/0#1 5/0 5/5 10/135 00/0 00/0 00/0 0/0 0/0. 3. BAR e Thermal-magnetic (Red) Notes: : Standard. This configuration used unless otherwise specified. : Optional standard. Specify when ordering. : Semi-standard. : yes or available. : no or not available. 1 : DC rating available on request. 3 : Line side interpole barriers are supplied as standard. (Front connection only) #1 : Also applicable to ACV. A Frame Time/Current characteristic curves Tripping Time second minute hour Max.(0 A) Max.( A) Min.(0 A) 1 Min.( A) Percent Rated Current Magnetic trip setting % 10% Ambient Compensating Curves Percent current rating A,A 75A A Calibrated temperature 0A 0A,A 0A Ambient temperature ( C) 000 Combinations of Internally Mounted AccessoriesOptional Poles Auxiliary switch Alarm switch Shunt trip Under voltage trip Toggle Left pole Right pole 7-

179 : Arrangement Standard Line : Handle Frame Centre Line : Handle Centre Line Outline dimensions (mm) H-NF, L-NF Front-connected 9 Interpole barrier (removable) 9 Mounting hole M screw Preparation of conductor 59 ø9 5(max.) max.t7 10(max.) H L 9 With extension bars (optional) Mounting hole H L M 0.7 ø M M 0.7 Tapped hole Rear-connected Mounting plate (max. t3.) H L H L ø Panel cutout (front view) H 5.5 L R Conductor overlap, max Plug-in (Standard) Mounting hole H L ø Detail of connecting part 9 Stud can be turned 5 or (max.) M M Tapped hole Note: Studs are factory installed in horizontal direction both on the line and load sides. Mounting plate M screw Conductor width, max.5 Mounting base (rear view) H L Panel cutout dimensions shown give an allowance of 1.0mm or more around the handle escutcheon. H L ø M M Mounting plate Plug-in (High-performance) Detail of connecting part 7 5 Conductor width, max. 105 Mounting 35 H L hole H L M screw H L.5 (max.) Mounting base (rear view) Preparation of conductor ø9 (max.).5(max.) H L Drilling plan (front view) H L ø LC Flush-mounted 7 19 M5 0. H L Mounting hole M 17.5 M Mounting plate (max.t) 0 1 Conductor overlap, max -ø Mounting hole 11 Stud can be turned 1 ø9 5 or 13 Left and right poles11 37 Center pole, Neutral pole19 Note: Studs are factory installed in horizontal direction both on the line and load sides. Panel cutout (front view) Mounting plate Characteristics and Outline Dimensions 7-3

180 Type Number of poles Ratings Rated current, A Calibrated at 5 C Rated insulation voltageu i V AC Rated impulse withstand voltage U imp kv Rated breaking capacity, ka NK AC V I cu /I cs (sym) V 0V q DC V IEC097- AC V I cu /I cs (sym) 0V 0V V V 0V q DC V V Rated short time withstand current, ka Weight ( marked standard type) kg Connections and Mountings Front-connected (FC) Terminal screws With extension bars Rear-connected (RC) Bolt studs Flat bar studs Plug-in (PM) For switchboards Standard (PMC) High-performance (PMB) For distribution boards (PMC) Flush-mounted (FP) With flat bar studs Draw-out type (DR) TemPlug (PG) TemPlug5B (PG) DIN rail mount Clip-in chassis mount Accessories (optional) Symbol Motor operator External operating Breaker-mounted handle Door-mounted (variable depth) Toggle extension Mechanical interlock Slide type Toggle holder Toggle lock Terminal cover For front-connected For rear-connected and plug-in Interpole barrier Terminal block for lead Door flange Standard specifications Overcurrent trip mechanism Trip button (color) Handle position indication (ON: Red, OFF: Green) Suitability for isolation CE marking Externally mounted 7 A Ratings and Specifications H-NF 0/ 10/0 0/0 0/ 5/5 10/0 /5 /5 0/0 0/0 0/0. 3. BAR e Thermal-magnetic (Red) L-NF 5/0 10/135 00/0 5/0 5/5 10/135 00/0 00/0 00/0 0/0 0/0. 3. Characteristics and Outline Dimensions Molded Case Circuit Breakers BAR e H-NF, L-NF Thermal-magnetic (Red) Notes: : Standard. This configuration used unless otherwise specified. : Optional standard. Specify when ordering. : Semi-standard. : yes or available. : no or not available. 1 : DC rating available on request. 3 : Line side interpole barriers are supplied as standard. (Front connection only) Frame Time/Current characteristic curves Tripping Time hour minute second Ambient Compensating Curves Percent current rating Percent Rated Current Calibrated temperature Magnetic trip setting % 10% Ambient temperature ( C) 000 Combinations of Internally Mounted AccessoriesOptional Poles Auxiliary switch Alarm switch Shunt trip Under voltage trip Toggle Left pole Right pole 7-

181 : Arrangement Standard Line : Handle Frame Centre Line : Handle Centre Line Outline dimensions (mm) H-NF,L-NF Front-connected 9 Interpole barrier (removable) 9 Mounting hole M screw Preparation of conductor 59 ø9 5(max.) max.t7 10(max.) H L 9 With extension bars (optional) Mounting hole H L M 0.7 ø M M 0.7 Tapped hole Rear-connected Mounting plate (max. t3.) H L H L ø Panel cutout (front view) H 5.5 L R Conductor overlap, max Plug-in (Standard) Mounting hole H L ø Detail of connecting part 9 Stud can be turned 5 or (max.) M M Tapped hole Note: Studs are factory installed in horizontal direction both on the line and load sides. Mounting plate M screw Conductor width, max.5 Mounting base (rear view) H L Panel cutout dimensions shown give an allowance of 1.0mm or more around the handle escutcheon. H L ø M M Mounting plate Plug-in (High-performance) Detail of connecting part 7 5 Conductor width, max. 105 Mounting 35 H L hole H L M screw H L.5 (max.) Mounting base (rear view) Preparation of conductor ø9 (max.).5(max.) H L Drilling plan (front view) H L ø LC Flush-mounted 7 19 M5 0. H L Mounting hole M 17.5 M Mounting plate (max.t) 0 1 Conductor overlap, max -ø Mounting hole 11 Stud can be turned 1 ø9 5 or 13 Left and right poles11 37 Center pole, Neutral pole19 Note: Studs are factory installed in horizontal direction both on the line and load sides. Panel cutout (front view) Mounting plate Characteristics and Outline Dimensions 7-5

182 Type Number of poles Ratings Rated current, A Calibrated at 5 C Rated insulation voltageu i V AC Rated impulse withstand voltage U imp kv Rated breaking capacity, ka NK AC V I cu /I cs (sym) V 0V q DC V IEC097- AC V I cu /I cs (sym) 0V 0V V V 0V q DC V V Rated short time withstand current, ka Weight ( marked standard type) kg Connections and Mountings Front-connected (FC) Terminal screws With extension bars Rear-connected (RC) Bolt studs Flat bar studs Plug-in (PM) For switchboards Standard (PMC) High-performance (PMB) For distribution boards (PMC) Flush-mounted (FP) With flat bar studs Draw-out type (DR) TemPlug (PG) TemPlug5B (PG) DIN rail mount Clip-in chassis mount Accessories (optional) Symbol Motor operator External operating Breaker-mounted handle Door-mounted (variable depth) Toggle extension Mechanical interlock Slide type Toggle holder Toggle lock Terminal cover For front-connected For rear-connected and plug-in Interpole barrier Terminal block for lead Door flange Standard specifications Overcurrent trip mechanism Trip button (color) Handle position indication (ON: Red, OFF: Green) Suitability for isolation CE marking Externally mounted Ratings and Specifications Characteristics and Outline Dimensions Molded Case Circuit Breakers 7H5-NF, L5-NF H5-NF / 10/0 0/0 0/ 5/5 10/0 /5 /5 0/0 0/0 0/0. 3. BAR e Thermal-magnetic (Red) L5-NF /0 10/135 00/0#1 5/0 5/5 10/135 00/0 00/0 00/0 0/0 0/0. 3. BAR e Thermal-magnetic (Red) Notes: : Standard. This configuration used unless otherwise specified. : Optional standard. Specify when ordering. : Semi-standard. : yes or available. : no or not available. 1 : DC rating available on request. 3 : Line side interpole barriers are supplied as standard. (Front connection only) #1 : Also applicable to ACV. 5A Frame Time/Current characteristic curves Tripping Time second minute hour Min Max. Percent Rated Current Magnetic trip setting 100% 0% Ambient Compensating Curves Percent current rating A 0A 175A 00A 5A Calibrated temperature Ambient temperature ( C) 000 Combinations of Internally Mounted AccessoriesOptional Poles Auxiliary switch Alarm switch Shunt trip Under voltage trip Toggle Left pole Right pole 7-

183 : Arrangement Standard Line : Handle Frame Centre Line : Handle Centre Line Outline dimensions (mm) H5-NF, L5-NF Front-connected 9 Interpole barrier (removable) 9 Mounting hole M screw Preparation of conductor 59 ø9 5(max.) max.t7 10(max.) H L 9 With extension bars (optional) Mounting hole H L M 0.7 ø M M 0.7 Tapped hole Rear-connected Mounting plate (max. t3.) H L H L ø Panel cutout (front view) H 5.5 L R Conductor overlap, max Plug-in (Standard) Mounting hole H L ø Detail of connecting part 9 Stud can be turned 5 or (max.) M M Tapped hole Note: Studs are factory installed in horizontal direction both on the line and load sides. Mounting plate M screw Conductor width, max.5 Mounting base (rear view) H L Panel cutout dimensions shown give an allowance of 1.0mm or more around the handle escutcheon. H L ø M M Mounting plate Plug-in (High-performance) Detail of connecting part 7 5 Conductor width, max. 105 Mounting 35 H L hole H L M screw H L.5 (max.) Mounting base (rear view) Preparation of conductor ø9 (max.).5(max.) H L Drilling plan (front view) H L ø LC Flush-mounted 7 19 M5 0. H L Mounting hole M 17.5 M Mounting plate (max.t) 0 1 Conductor overlap, max -ø Mounting hole 11 Stud can be turned 1 ø9 5 or 13 Left and right poles11 37 Center pole, Neutral pole19 Note: Studs are factory installed in horizontal direction both on the line and load sides. Panel cutout (front view) Mounting plate Characteristics and Outline Dimensions 7-7

184 Type Number of poles Ratings Rated current, A Calibrated at 5 C Rated insulation voltageu i V AC Rated impulse withstand voltage U imp kv Rated breaking capacity, ka NK AC V I cu /I cs (sym) V 0V DC V IEC097- AC V I cu /I cs (sym) 0V 0V V V 0V DC V V Rated short time withstand current, ka Weight ( marked standard type) kg Connections and Mountings Front-connected (FC) Terminal screws With extension bars Rear-connected (RC) Bolt studs Flat bar studs Plug-in (PM) For switchboards Standard (PMC) High-performance (PMB) For distribution boards (PMC) Flush-mounted (FP) With flat bar studs Draw-out type (DR) TemPlug (PG) TemPlug5B (PG) DIN rail mount Clip-in chassis mount Accessories (optional) Symbol Motor operator External operating Breaker-mounted handle Door-mounted (variable depth) Toggle extension Mechanical interlock Slide type Toggle holder Toggle lock Terminal cover For front-connected For rear-connected and plug-in Interpole barrier Terminal block for lead Door flange Standard specifications Overcurrent trip mechanism Trip button (color) Handle position indication (ON: Red, OFF: Green) Suitability for isolation CE marking Externally mounted 7S5-GE Ratings and Specifications S5-GE (Adjustable) /7.5 /5 5/5 7.5/7.5 5/5 /5 5/35 5/35 5/ BAR e Electronic (Red) Notes: : Standard. This configuration used unless otherwise specified. : Optional standard. Specify when ordering. : Semi-standard. : yes or available. : no or not available. 3 : Line side interpole barriers are supplied as standard. (Front connection only)! : Being or will be : Optional pretrip alarm function available on request. Characteristics and Outline Dimensions Molded Case Circuit Breakers 5A Frame Time/Current characteristic curves Tripping Time second minute hour , Percent Rated Current 3 T I p 5 I R t R t p I g Isd t sd Overcurrent tripping characteristics Characteristics No Long time-delay pick-up current (A) : (I R ) Long time-delay time settings (s) : (t R ) Short time-delay (I R ) pick-up current (A) : (I sd ) Short time-delay time settings (s) : (t sd ) t g I i I 000 CT rated current : (I CT ) = A, 0, 175, 00, at 00%(I R ) at 00%(I R ) Setting tolerance ±0% Setting tolerance ±% Total clearing time +ms, resettable time 0ms Instantaneous trip pick-up (I R )100% current (A) : (I i ) Setting tolerance ±0% Preferential trip alarm Pick-up current (A) : (I p) (I R )0% Setting tolerance ±10% Time-settings (s) : (t Definite time-delay characteristic, 0sec. p) Setting tolerance ±10% Neutral protection Pick-up current (A) : (I N ) (I R )% Time-settings (s) : (t N ) (t N )=(t R ) Same as Long time-delay time settings Option Note: Characteristic No. will be applied as standard setting unless otherwise specified. Combinations of Internally Mounted AccessoriesOptional Poles Auxiliary switch Alarm switch Shunt trip Under voltage trip Toggle Left pole Right pole 7-

185 : Arrangement Standard Line : Handle Frame Centre Line : Handle Centre Line Outline dimensions (mm) S5-GE 7 Characteristics and Outline Dimensions 7-9

186 Type Number of poles Ratings Rated current, A Calibrated at 5 C Rated insulation voltageu i V AC Rated impulse withstand voltage U imp kv Rated breaking capacity, ka NK AC V I cu /I cs (sym) V 0V DC V IEC097- AC V I cu /I cs (sym) 0V 0V V V 0V DC V V Rated short time withstand current, ka Weight ( marked standard type) kg Connections and Mountings Front-connected (FC) Terminal screws With extension bars Rear-connected (RC) Bolt studs Flat bar studs Plug-in (PM) For switchboards Standard (PMC) High-performance (PMB) For distribution boards (PMC) Flush-mounted (FP) With flat bar studs Draw-out type (DR) TemPlug (PG) TemPlug5B (PG) DIN rail mount Clip-in chassis mount Accessories (optional) Symbol Motor operator External operating Breaker-mounted handle Door-mounted (variable depth) Toggle extension Mechanical interlock Slide type Toggle holder Toggle lock Terminal cover For front-connected For rear-connected and plug-in Interpole barrier Terminal block for lead Door flange Standard specifications Overcurrent trip mechanism Trip button (color) Handle position indication (ON: Red, OFF: Green) Suitability for isolation CE marking Externally mounted Ratings and Specifications Characteristics and Outline Dimensions Molded Case Circuit Breakers 7S00-NE, S00-GE, S00-PE S00-NE / 5/5 5/5 0/ / 5/5 / / 5/5.3sec BAR e Electronic! (Red) S00-GE / 5/ /5 0/ / 5/ / / /5.3sec BAR e Electronic! (Red) S00-PE (Adjustable) (Adjustable) (Adjustable) (Adjustable) (Adjustable) (Adjustable) / / 0/0 5/5 5/5 /5.3sec BAR e Electronic! (Red) Notes: : Standard. This configuration used unless otherwise specified. : Optional standard. Specify when ordering. : Semi-standard. : yes or available. : no or not available. 3 : Line side interpole barriers are supplied as standard. (Front connection only) 9 : The mechanical interlock is not applicable to the draw-out type (DR).! : Optional pretrip alarm or ground fault trip function available on request. Combinations of Internally Mounted AccessoriesOptional 00A Frame Time/Current characteristic curves Tripping Time second minute hour , Percent Rated Current 3 T I p 5,,7 I R t R t p I g Isd t sd t g I i Overcurrent tripping characteristics Characteristics No Long time-delay pick-up current (A) : (I R ) CT rated current : (I CT ) = A, 0, 175, 00, 5 CT rated current : (I CT ) = 00A 175, 00, 5,, 0, 3, Long time-delay time settings (s) : (t R ) at 00%(I R ) at 00%(I R ) Setting tolerance ±0% Short time-delay (I R ) pick-up current (A) : (I sd ) Setting tolerance ±% Short time-delay time settings (s) : (t sd ) I Total clearing time +ms, resettable time 0ms Instantaneous trip pick-up (I R )100% Max: (I CT )10% current (A) : (I i ) Setting tolerance ±0% Option Preferential trip alarm Pick-up current (A) : (I p) (I R )0% Setting tolerance ±10% Time-settings (s) : (t Definite time-delay characteristic, 0sec. p) Setting tolerance ±10% Ground falut trip Pick-up current (A) : (I g ) (I CT )0% Setting tolerance ±% 1 Time-settings (s) : (t g ) Difinite time-delay characteristic, 0.sec. Total tripping time +ms, resettable time 0ms. Neutral protection Pick-up current (A) : (I N ) (I R )% or % selectable Time-settings (s) : (t N ) (t N )=(t R ) Same as Long time-delay time settings Note: 1. Ground fault trip is not available when (I CT ) is A.. In case of (I R )(I CT ), the setting tolerance becomes big when (I N ) is set at (I R )%. Characteristic No. will be applied as standard setting unless otherwise specified. Poles Auxiliary switch Alarm switch Shunt trip Under voltage trip Toggle Left pole Right pole 7-

187 : Arrangement Standard Line : Handle Frame Centre Line : Handle Centre Line Outline dimensions (mm) S00-NE, S00-GE, S00-PE Front-connected Interpole barrier (removable) Mounting hole H L ON side:3 OFF side:35 M10 screw Preparation of conductor With extension bars (optional) 1 (max.) ø11 5 (max.) ø H L H L M Trip button (red) M Tapped hole Rear-connected Mounting plate Stud can be turned 5 or H L 103 H L H L Groove for dissipating heat generated by eddy current Panel cutout (front view) Plug-in (Standard) ø13 0 Conductor overlap, max 39 ø Conductor overlap, max M Tapped hole Note: Studs are factory installed in horizontal direction both on the line and load sides. Detail of connecting part ø3 Mounting base (rear view) R Panel cutout dimensions shown give an allowance of 1.0mm around the handle escutcheon M Conductor width, max. 35 M10screw Auxiliary circuit terminals ø Mounting plate Plug-in (High-performance) LC H L H M10screw L H L H L H L H L (max.) LC Flush-mounted (max.) M Detail of connecting part M5 Conductor width, max Mounting plate LC t max. Mounting base (rear view) ø13 Preparation of conductor ø11 0 Stud can be turned 5 or Note: Studs are factory installed in horizontal direction both on the line and load sides (max.) -ø Panel cutout (front view) LC 5 Mounting angle ø7 Mounting hole Characteristics and Outline Dimensions

188 Type Number of poles Ratings Rated current, A Calibrated at 5 C Rated insulation voltageu i V AC Rated impulse withstand voltage U imp kv Rated breaking capacity, ka NK AC V I cu /I cs (sym) V 0V DC V IEC097- AC V I cu /I cs (sym) 0V 0V V V 0V DC V V Rated short time withstand current, ka Weight ( marked standard type) kg Connections and Mountings Front-connected (FC) Terminal screws With extension bars Rear-connected (RC) Bolt studs Flat bar studs Plug-in (PM) For switchboards Standard (PMC) High-performance (PMB) For distribution boards (PMC) Flush-mounted (FP) With flat bar studs Draw-out type (DR) TemPlug (PG) TemPlug5B (PG) DIN rail mount Clip-in chassis mount Accessories (optional) Symbol Motor operator External operating Breaker-mounted handle Door-mounted (variable depth) Toggle extension Mechanical interlock Slide type Toggle holder Toggle lock Terminal cover For front-connected For rear-connected and plug-in Interpole barrier Terminal block for lead Door flange Standard specifications Overcurrent trip mechanism Trip button (color) Handle position indication (ON: Red, OFF: Green) Suitability for isolation CE marking Externally mounted Ratings and Specifications Characteristics and Outline Dimensions Molded Case Circuit Breakers 7H00-NE, L00-NE H00-NE /35 10/0 0/0 35/35 5/5 10/0 /5 /5 0/0.3sec BAR e Electronic! (Red) L00-NE (Adjustable) (Adjustable) (Adjustable) (Adjustable) / 10/135 00/0 #1 / 5/5 10/135 00/0 00/0 00/0.3sec BAR e Electronic! (Red) Notes: : Standard. This configuration used unless otherwise specified. : Optional standard. Specify when ordering. : Semi-standard. : yes or available. : no or not available. 3 : Line side interpole barriers are supplied as standard. (Front connection only) 9 : The mechanical interlock is not applicable to the draw-out type (DR).! : Optional pretrip alarm or ground fault trip function available on request. #1 : Also applicable to ACV. Combinations of Internally Mounted AccessoriesOptional 00A Frame Time/Current characteristic curves Tripping Time second minute hour , Percent Rated Current 3 T I p 5,,7 I R t R t p I g Isd t sd t g I i Overcurrent tripping characteristics Characteristics No Long time-delay pick-up current (A) : (I R ) CT rated current : (I CT ) = A, 0, 175, 00, 5 CT rated current : (I CT ) = 00A 175, 00, 5,, 0, 3, Long time-delay time settings (s) : (t R ) at 00%(I R ) at 00%(I R ) Setting tolerance ±0% Short time-delay (I R ) pick-up current (A) : (I sd ) Setting tolerance ±% Short time-delay time settings (s) : (t sd ) I Total clearing time +ms, resettable time 0ms Instantaneous trip pick-up (I R )100% Max: (I CT )10% current (A) : (I i ) Setting tolerance ±0% Option Preferential trip alarm Pick-up current (A) : (I p) (I R )0% Setting tolerance ±10% Time-settings (s) : (t Definite time-delay characteristic, 0sec. p) Setting tolerance ±10% Ground falut trip Pick-up current (A) : (I g ) (I CT )0% Setting tolerance ±% 1 Time-settings (s) : (t g ) Difinite time-delay characteristic, 0.sec. Total tripping time +ms, resettable time 0ms. Neutral protection Pick-up current (A) : (I N ) (I R )% or % selectable Time-settings (s) : (t N ) (t N )=(t R ) Same as Long time-delay time settings Note: 1. Ground fault trip is not available when (I CT ) is A.. In case of (I R )(I CT ), the setting tolerance becomes big when (I N ) is set at (I R )%. Characteristic No. will be applied as standard setting unless otherwise specified. Poles Auxiliary switch Alarm switch Shunt trip Under voltage trip Toggle Left pole Right pole 7-3

189 : Arrangement Standard Line : Handle Frame Centre Line : Handle Centre Line Outline dimensions (mm) H00-NE, L00-NE Front-connected Preparation of conductor With extension bars (optional) Interpole barrier (removable) H L Mounting hole H L 110 ON side:75 OFF side:7 M10 screw 1 (max.) ø11 5 (max.) ø LH 75 H L LC M L C Trip button (red) M Tapped hole Rear-connected Mounting plate Stud can be turned 5 or H L H L Groove for dissipating heat generated by eddy current Panel cutout (front view) Plug-in (Standard) H L ø13 0 Conductor overlap, max 39 ø M Conductor width, max. 35 M10 screw Conductor overlap, max M Tapped hole Note: Studs are factory installed in horizontal direction both on the line and load sides. Detail of connecting part 1 ø3 Mounting base (rear view) Auxiliary circuit terminals 0 H L 0 -ø9 5 R Panel cutout dimensions shown give an allowance of 1.0mm around the handle escutcheon. H L Mounting plate Plug-in (High-performance) L C Flush-mounted LC LH M Detail of connecting part M5 Conductor width, max. 0(max.) M10 screw 7 3 Mounting plate LC 0 57 t max ø13 Mounting base (rear view) H L H L Preparation of conductor ø Stud can be turned 5 or (max.) 5 Note: Studs are factory installed in horizontal direction both on the line and load sides (max.) LC -ø Panel cutout (front view) H L H L 10 LC Mounting angle 17 -ø7 Mounting hole Characteristics and Outline Dimensions

190 Type Number of poles Ratings Rated current, A Calibrated at 5 C 7 A Ratings and Specifications S-CF 0 00 Rated insulation voltageu i V AC Rated impulse withstand voltage U imp kv Rated breaking capacity, ka NK AC V I cu /I cs (sym) V 0V q DC V IEC097- AC V I cu /I cs (sym) 0V 0V V V 0V q DC V V Rated short time withstand current, ka Weight ( marked standard type) kg Connections and Mountings Front-connected (FC) Terminal screws With extension bars Rear-connected (RC) Bolt studs Flat bar studs Plug-in (PM) For switchboards Standard (PMC) High-performance (PMB) For distribution boards (PMC) Flush-mounted (FP) With flat bar studs Draw-out type (DR) TemPlug (PG) TemPlug5B (PG) DIN rail mount Clip-in chassis mount Accessories (optional) Symbol Motor operator External operating Breaker-mounted handle Door-mounted (variable depth) Toggle extension Mechanical interlock Slide type Toggle holder Toggle lock Terminal cover For front-connected For rear-connected and plug-in Interpole barrier Terminal block for lead Door flange Standard specifications Overcurrent trip mechanism Trip button (color) Handle position indication (ON: Red, OFF: Green) Suitability for isolation CE marking Externally mounted /10 / / 3/3 3/3 / / / e Thermal-magnetic(adjustable) (Red) S-NF 0 00 Characteristics and Outline Dimensions Molded Case Circuit Breakers S-CF, S-NF, S-RF 00 / 55 0/0 / / / / 5/5 / / e Thermal-magnetic(adjustable) (Red) S-RF /0! 5/! /75! 5/0 5/3 5/ / / /75 / / e Thermal-magnetic (Red) Notes: : Standard. This configuration used unless otherwise specified. : Optional standard. Specify when ordering. : Semi-standard. : yes or available. : no or not available. 1 : DC rating available on request. 3 : Line side interpole barriers are supplied as standard. (Front connection only) 9 : The mechanical interlock is not applicable to the draw-out type (DR).! : Being or will be applied. Frame Time/Current characteristic curves Tripping Time hour minute second Setting tolerance(x5) Min Ambient Compensating Curves Percent current rating Calibrated at 5 C Magnetic trip pickup current X5 Max Rated current Magnetic trip pickup current (A) Adjustable range (A) Notes: 1. Setting tolerance: ±0%.. Unless otherwise stated when ordering, the selector dial is factory set to position The trip pickup current of DC models is not adjustable; the dial position corresponding to the trip pickup current is marked with a white point. X10 Percent Rated Current 0A A 00A Setting tolerance(x10) Adjustable setting range of magnetic trip Calibrated temperature Ambient temperature ( C) Combinations of Internally Mounted AccessoriesOptional Poles Auxiliary switch Alarm switch Shunt trip Under voltage trip Toggle Left pole Right pole 7-3

191 : Arrangement Standard Line : Handle Frame Centre Line : Handle Centre Line Outline dimensions (mm) S-CF, S-NF, S-RF Front-connected ø13 13 Trip button (red) Interpole barrier (removable) Mounting hole Conductor overlap, max 3 Toggle extension (removable) M M Tapped hole Rear-connected Toggle extension (removable) Plug-in (Standard) Stud can be turned M Detail of connecting part 13 ø13 1 ø for accessory wiring when necessary Conductor overlap, max 1 ø M Tapped hole Groove for dissipating heat generated by eddy current Note: Studs are factory installed in horizontal direction both on the line and load sides. 5 Panel cutout (front view) 53 9 Panel cutout dimensions shown give an allowance of 1.0mm around the handle escutcheon Trip button (red) Toggle extension (removable) M1 screw 7 5 Conductor width, max.0 Auxiliary circuit terminals M10 Mounting base (rear view) ø11 Drilling plan (front view) 5 5 Detail of connecting part and Preparation of conductor 3 0 ø Plug-in (High-performance).5 [max.] Mounting hole Toggle extension (removable) Trip button (red) Flush-mounted Drilling plan (front view) Mounting hole Toggle extension (removable) Stud can be turned.5 M1 screw 33 M Mounting base (rear view) Trip button (red) Note: Studs are factory installed in horizontal direction both on the line and load sides Drilling plan (front view) ø9 ø Characteristics and Outline Dimensions

192 Type Number of poles Ratings Rated current, A Calibrated at 5 C Rated insulation voltageu i V AC Rated impulse withstand voltage U imp kv Rated breaking capacity, ka NK AC V I cu /I cs (sym) V 0V DC V IEC097- AC V I cu /I cs (sym) 0V 0V V V 0V DC V V Rated short time withstand current, ka Weight ( marked standard type) kg Connections and Mountings Front-connected (FC) Terminal screws With extension bars Rear-connected (RC) Bolt studs Flat bar studs Plug-in (PM) For switchboards Standard (PMC) High-performance (PMB) For distribution boards (PMC) Flush-mounted (FP) With flat bar studs Draw-out type (DR) TemPlug (PG) TemPlug5B (PG) DIN rail mount Clip-in chassis mount Accessories (optional) Symbol Motor operator External operating Breaker-mounted handle Door-mounted (variable depth) Toggle extension Mechanical interlock Slide type Toggle holder Toggle lock Terminal cover For front-connected For rear-connected and plug-in Interpole barrier Terminal block for lead Door flange Standard specifications Overcurrent trip mechanism Trip button (color) Handle position indication (ON: Red, OFF: Green) Suitability for isolation CE marking Externally mounted 7 A Ratings and Specifications S-NE (Adjustable) / 55 0/0 / / / / 5/ e Electronic! (Red) S-RE Characteristics and Outline Dimensions Molded Case Circuit Breakers S-NE, S-RE (Adjustable) /0 5/3 5/ / / /75.3sec e Electronic! (Red) Notes: : Standard. This configuration used unless otherwise specified. : Optional standard. Specify when ordering. : Semi-standard. : yes or available. : no or not available. 3 : Line side interpole barriers are supplied as standard. (Front connection only) 9 : The mechanical interlock is not applicable to the draw-out type (DR).! : Being or will be applied.! : Optional pretrip alarm or ground fault trip function available on request. Frame Time/Current characteristic curves Overcurrent tripping characteristics Characteristics No Long time-delay pick-up current (A) : (I R ) CT rated current : (I CT ) = A, 0, 3, 00, 0, 00, Long time-delay time settings (s) : (t R ) at 00%(I R ) at 00%(I R ) Setting tolerance ±0% Short time-delay (I R ) pick-up current (A) : (I sd ) Setting tolerance ±% Short time-delay time settings (s) : (t sd ) Total clearing time +ms, resettable time 0ms Instantaneous trip pick-up (I R )100% Max: (I CT )% current (A) : (I i ) Setting tolerance ±0% Option Tripping Time second minute hour Preferential trip alarm Pick-up current (A) : (I p) (I R )0% Setting tolerance ±10% Time-settings (s) : (t Definite time-delay characteristic, 0sec. p) Setting tolerance ±10% Ground falut trip Pick-up current (A) : (I g ) (I CT )0% Setting tolerance ±% Time-settings (s) : (t g ) Difinite time-delay characteristic, 0.sec. Total tripping time +ms, resettable time 0ms. Neutral protection Pick-up current (A) : (I N ) (I R )% or % selectable Time-settings (s) : (t N ) (t N )=(t R ) Same as Long time-delay time settings Characteristic No. will be applied as standard setting unless otherwise specified. Note:. In case of (I R )(I CT ), the setting tolerance becomes big when (I N ) is set at (I R )%. 1, 5 3 T I p 5,,7 I R t R t p I g Isd t sd t g Percent Rated Current I i I 000 Combinations of Internally Mounted AccessoriesOptional Poles Auxiliary switch Alarm switch Shunt trip Under voltage trip Toggle Left pole Right pole 7-3

193 : Arrangement Standard Line : Handle Frame Centre Line : Handle Centre Line Outline dimensions (mm) S-NE, S-RE Front-connected ø13 13 Interpole barrier (removable) Trip button (red) Mounting hole Conductor overlap, max 3 Toggle extension (removable) M M Tapped hole Rear-connected Toggle extension (removable) Plug-in (Standard) Stud can be turned M Detail of connecting part 13 ø ø for accessory wiring when necessary Conductor overlap, max 1 ø M Tapped hole Groove for dissipating heat generated by eddy current Note: Studs are factory installed in horizontal direction both on the line and load sides. 5 Panel cutout (front view) 53 9 Panel cutout dimensions shown give an allowance of 1.0mm around the handle escutcheon Trip button (red) Toggle extension (removable) M1 screw 7 5 Conductor width, max.0 Auxiliary circuit terminals ø11 Detail of connecting part and Preparation of conductor 3 0 ø13 7 M10 Mounting base (rear view) Drilling plan (front view) Plug-in (High-performance) Drilling plan (front view) Mounting hole Toggle extension (removable) Stud can be turned.5 [max.] Trip button (red) Flush-mounted.5 M1 screw 33 M Trip button (red) Note: Studs are factory installed in horizontal direction both on the line and load sides. Mounting base (rear view) Drilling plan (front view) Mounting hole Toggle extension (removable) ø9 ø Characteristics and Outline Dimensions

194 Type Number of poles Ratings Rated current, A Calibrated at 5 C Rated insulation voltageu i V AC Rated impulse withstand voltage U imp kv Rated breaking capacity, ka NK AC V I cu /I cs (sym) V 0V DC V IEC097- AC V I cu /I cs (sym) 0V 0V V V 0V DC V V Rated short time withstand current, ka Weight ( marked standard type) kg Connections and Mountings Front-connected (FC) Terminal screws With extension bars Rear-connected (RC) Bolt studs Flat bar studs Plug-in (PM) For switchboards Standard (PMC) High-performance (PMB) For distribution boards (PMC) Flush-mounted (FP) With flat bar studs Draw-out type (DR) TemPlug (PG) TemPlug5B (PG) DIN rail mount Clip-in chassis mount Accessories (optional) Symbol Motor operator External operating Breaker-mounted handle Door-mounted (variable depth) Toggle extension Mechanical interlock Slide type Toggle holder Toggle lock Terminal cover For front-connected For rear-connected and plug-in Interpole barrier Terminal block for lead Door flange Standard specifications Overcurrent trip mechanism Trip button (color) Handle position indication (ON: Red, OFF: Green) Suitability for isolation CE marking Externally mounted 7 A Ratings and Specifications H-NE (Adjustable) /0 /9 0/0 5/0 5/3 /9 /9 /9 0/0.3sec e Electronic! (Red) L-NE Characteristics and Outline Dimensions Molded Case Circuit Breakers H-NE, L-NE (Adjustable) /0 10/135 00/0 5/0 5/3 10/135 00/0 00/0 00/0.3sec e Electronic! (Red) Notes: : Standard. This configuration used unless otherwise specified. : Optional standard. Specify when ordering. : Semi-standard. : yes or available. : no or not available. 3 : Line side interpole barriers are supplied as standard. (Front connection only) 9 : The mechanical interlock is not applicable to the draw-out type (DR).! : Optional pretrip alarm or ground fault trip function available on request. Frame Time/Current characteristic curves Tripping Time second minute hour , Overcurrent tripping characteristics 5 3 T I p 5,,7 I R t R t p I g Isd t sd t g Percent Rated Current Characteristics No Long time-delay pick-up current (A) : (I R ) CT rated current : (I CT ) = A, 0, 3, 00, 0, 00, Long time-delay time settings (s) : (t R ) at 00%(I R ) at 00%(I R ) Setting tolerance ±0% Short time-delay (I R ) pick-up current (A) : (I sd ) Setting tolerance ±% Short time-delay time settings (s) : (t sd ) I i I Total clearing time +ms, resettable time 0ms Instantaneous trip pick-up (I R )100% Max: (I CT )% current (A) : (I i ) Setting tolerance ±0% Option Preferential trip alarm Pick-up current (A) : (I p) (I R )0% Setting tolerance ±10% Time-settings (s) : (t Definite time-delay characteristic, 0sec. p) Setting tolerance ±10% Ground falut trip Pick-up current (A) : (I g ) (I CT )0% Setting tolerance ±% Time-settings (s) : (t g ) Difinite time-delay characteristic, 0.sec. Total tripping time +ms, resettable time 0ms. Neutral protection Pick-up current (A) : (I N ) (I R )% or % selectable Time-settings (s) : (t N ) (t N )=(t R ) Same as Long time-delay time settings Characteristic No. will be applied as standard setting unless otherwise specified. Note:. In case of (I R )(I CT ), the setting tolerance becomes big when (I N ) is set at (I R )%. Combinations of Internally Mounted AccessoriesOptional Poles Auxiliary switch Alarm switch Shunt trip Under voltage trip Toggle Left pole Right pole 7-3

195 : Arrangement Standard Line : Handle Frame Centre Line : Handle Centre Line Outline dimensions (mm) H-NE, L-NE Front-connected 1 51 ø13 13 Interpole barrier (removable) 110 Trip button (red) Toggle extension (removable) 51 Mounting hole Conductor overlap, max M M Tapped hole Rear-connected 0.5 Toggle extension (removable) Plug-in (Standard) Stud can be turned M Detail of connecting part 13 1 ø ø for accessory wiring when necessary Conductor overlap, max M Tapped hole Note: Studs are factory installed in horizontal direction both on the line and load sides. Groove for dissipating Panel cutout (front view) heat generated by eddy ø current Panel cutout dimensions shown give an allowance of 1.0mm around the handle escutcheon Trip button (red) Toggle extension (removable) M1 screw 7 5 Conductor width, max.0 Auxiliary circuit terminals M Mounting base (rear view) ø11 Drilling plan (front view) Plug-in (High-performance) Detail of connecting part and Preparation of conductor 3 [max.] 0 ø13 Mounting base Drilling plan M1 screw (rear view) (front view) Mounting hole M Trip button (red) Flush-mounted [max.] Panel cutout (front view) Mounting hole Toggle extension (removable) Stud can be turned Trip button (red) Note: Studs are factory installed in horizontal direction both on the line and load sides LC ø9 ø Characteristics and Outline Dimensions

Type Number of poles Ratings Rated current, A Calibrated at 5 C 7 00A Ratings and Specifications S00-CF 0 00 Rated insulation voltageu i V AC Rated impulse withstand voltage U imp kv Rated breaking

196 Type Number of poles Ratings Rated current, A Calibrated at 5 C 7 00A Ratings and Specifications S00-CF 0 00 Rated insulation voltageu i V AC Rated impulse withstand voltage U imp kv Rated breaking capacity, ka NK AC V I cu /I cs (sym) V 0V q DC V IEC097- AC V I cu /I cs (sym) 0V 0V V V 0V q DC V V Rated short time withstand current, ka Weight ( marked standard type) kg Connections and Mountings Front-connected (FC) Terminal screws With extension bars Rear-connected (RC) Bolt studs Flat bar studs Plug-in (PM) For switchboards Standard (PMC) High-performance (PMB) For distribution boards (PMC) Flush-mounted (FP) With flat bar studs Draw-out type (DR) TemPlug (PG) TemPlug5B (PG) DIN rail mount Clip-in chassis mount Accessories (optional) Symbol Motor operator External operating Breaker-mounted handle Door-mounted (variable depth) Toggle extension Mechanical interlock Slide type Toggle holder Toggle lock Terminal cover For front-connected For rear-connected and plug-in Interpole barrier Terminal block for lead Door flange Standard specifications Overcurrent trip mechanism Trip button (color) Handle position indication (ON: Red, OFF: Green) Suitability for isolation CE marking Externally mounted /10 / / 3/3 3/3 / / / e Thermal-magnetic(adjustable) (Red) S00-NF 0 00 Characteristics and Outline Dimensions Molded Case Circuit Breakers S00-CF, S00-NF, S00-RF 00 / 55 0/0 / / / / 5/5 / / e Thermal-magnetic(adjustable) (Red) S00-RF /0 5/3 5/ / / /75 / / e Thermal-magnetic(adjustable) (Red) Notes: : Standard. This configuration used unless otherwise specified. : Optional standard. Specify when ordering. : Semi-standard. : yes or available. : no or not available. 1 : DC rating available on request. 3 : Line side interpole barriers are supplied as standard. (Front connection only) 9 : The mechanical interlock is not applicable to the draw-out type (DR).! : Being or will be applied. Frame Time/Current characteristic curves Tripping Time hour minute second Min. Setting tolerance(x5) X Ambient Compensating Curves Percent current rating Calibrated at 5 C X5 Max. Percent Rated Current 00A 0A Setting tolerance(x10) Adjustable setting range of magnetic trip Magnetic trip pickup current Calibrated temperature Rated current Magnetic trip pickup current (A) Adjustable range (A) Notes: 1. Setting tolerance: ±0%.. Unless otherwise stated when ordering, the selector dial is factory set to position The trip pickup current of DC models is not adjustable; the dial position corresponding to the trip pickup current is marked with a white point Ambient temperature ( C) Combinations of Internally Mounted AccessoriesOptional Poles Auxiliary switch Alarm switch Shunt trip Under voltage trip Toggle Left pole Right pole 7-0

197 : Arrangement Standard Line : Handle Frame Centre Line : Handle Centre Line Outline dimensions (mm) S00-CF, S00-NF, S00-RF Front-connected ø13 13 Trip button (red) Interpole barrier (removable) Mounting hole Conductor overlap, max 10 3 Toggle extension (removable) M M Tapped hole Rear-connected Toggle extension (removable) Plug-in (Standard) Stud can be turned M Detail of connecting part 13 ø13 1 ø for accessory wiring when necessary Conductor overlap, max 1 ø M Tapped hole Groove for dissipating heat generated by eddy current Note: Studs are factory installed in horizontal direction both on the line and load sides. 5 Panel cutout (front view) 53 9 Panel cutout dimensions shown give an allowance of 1.0mm around the handle escutcheon Trip button (red) Toggle extension (removable) M1 screw 7 5 Conductor width, max.0 Auxiliary circuit terminals ø11 Detail of connecting part and Preparation of conductor 3 0 ø M10 Mounting base (rear view) Drilling plan (front view) Plug-in (High-performance) Drilling plan Mounting hole Toggle extension (front view) (removable) Stud can be turned.5 [max.] Trip button (red) Flush-mounted 1 51 Mounting hole.5 M1 screw 33 Toggle extension (removable) M Mounting base (rear view) Trip button (red) Note: Studs are factory installed in horizontal direction both on the line and load sides Drilling plan (front view) ø9 ø Characteristics and Outline Dimensions

198 Type Number of poles Ratings Rated current, A Calibrated at 5 C Rated insulation voltageu i V AC Rated impulse withstand voltage U imp kv Rated breaking capacity, ka NK AC V I cu /I cs (sym) V 0V DC V IEC097- AC V I cu /I cs (sym) 0V 0V V V 0V DC V V Rated short time withstand current, ka Weight ( marked standard type) kg Connections and Mountings Front-connected (FC) Terminal screws With extension bars Rear-connected (RC) Bolt studs Flat bar studs Plug-in (PM) For switchboards Standard (PMC) High-performance (PMB) For distribution boards (PMC) Flush-mounted (FP) With flat bar studs Draw-out type (DR) TemPlug (PG) TemPlug5B (PG) DIN rail mount Clip-in chassis mount Accessories (optional) Symbol Motor operator External operating Breaker-mounted handle Door-mounted (variable depth) Toggle extension Mechanical interlock Slide type Toggle holder Toggle lock Terminal cover For front-connected For rear-connected and plug-in Interpole barrier Terminal block for lead Door flange Standard specifications Overcurrent trip mechanism Trip button (color) Handle position indication (ON: Red, OFF: Green) Suitability for isolation CE marking Externally mounted 7 00A Ratings and Specifications S00-NE (Adjustable) /0 / 5/5 0/0 / / / / 5/ e Electronic! (Red) S00-RE Characteristics and Outline Dimensions Molded Case Circuit Breakers S00-NE, S00-RE (Adjustable) /0 5/3 5/ / / /75.3sec e Electronic! (Red) Notes: : Standard. This configuration used unless otherwise specified. : Optional standard. Specify when ordering. : Semi-standard. : yes or available. : no or not available. 3 : Line side interpole barriers are supplied as standard. (Front connection only) 9 : The mechanical interlock is not applicable to the draw-out type (DR).! : Being or will be applied.! : Optional pretrip alarm or ground fault trip function available on request. Frame Time/Current characteristic curves Tripping Time second minute hour , Overcurrent tripping characteristics 5 3 T I p 5,,7 I R t R t p I g Isd t sd t g Percent Rated Current Characteristics No Long time-delay pick-up current (A) : (I R ) CT rated current : (I CT ) = 00A 3, 00,, 0, 00, 0, Long time-delay time settings (s) : (t R ) at 00%(I R ) at 00%(I R ) Setting tolerance ±0% Short time-delay (I R ) pick-up current (A) : (I sd ) Setting tolerance ±% Short time-delay time settings (s) : (t sd ) I i I Total clearing time +ms, resettable time 0ms Instantaneous trip pick-up (I R )100% Max: (I CT )% current (A) : (I i ) Setting tolerance ±0% Option Preferential trip alarm Pick-up current (A) : (I p) (I R )0% Setting tolerance ±10% Time-settings (s) : (t Definite time-delay characteristic, 0sec. p) Setting tolerance ±10% Ground falut trip Pick-up current (A) : (I g ) (I CT )0% Setting tolerance ±% Time-settings (s) : (t g ) Difinite time-delay characteristic, 0.sec. Total tripping time +ms, resettable time 0ms. Neutral protection Pick-up current (A) : (I N ) (I R )% or % selectable Time-settings (s) : (t N ) (t N )=(t R ) Same as Long time-delay time settings Characteristic No. will be applied as standard setting unless otherwise specified. Note:. In case of (I R )(I CT ), the setting tolerance becomes big when (I N ) is set at (I R )%. Combinations of Internally Mounted AccessoriesOptional Poles Auxiliary switch Alarm switch Shunt trip Under voltage trip Toggle Left pole Right pole 7-

199 : Arrangement Standard Line : Handle Frame Centre Line : Handle Centre Line Outline dimensions (mm) S00-NE, S00-RE Front-connected ø13 13 Trip button (red) Interpole barrier (removable) Mounting hole Conductor overlap, max 10 3 Toggle extension (removable) M M Tapped hole Rear-connected Toggle extension (removable) Plug-in (Standard) Stud can be turned M Detail of connecting part 13 ø13 1 ø for accessory wiring when necessary Conductor overlap, max 1 ø M Tapped hole Groove for dissipating heat generated by eddy current Note: Studs are factory installed in horizontal direction both on the line and load sides. 5 Panel cutout (front view) 53 9 Panel cutout dimensions shown give an allowance of 1.0mm around the handle escutcheon Trip button (red) Toggle extension (removable) M1 screw 7 5 Conductor width, max.0 Auxiliary circuit terminals ø11 Detail of connecting part and Preparation of conductor 3 0 ø13 7 M10 Mounting base (rear view) Drilling plan (front view) Plug-in (High-performance) Drilling plan Mounting hole Toggle extension (front view) (removable) Stud can be turned.5 [max.] Trip button (red) Flush-mounted 1 51 Mounting hole.5 M1 screw 33 Toggle extension (removable) M Mounting base (rear view) Trip button (red) Note: Studs are factory installed in horizontal direction both on the line and load sides Drilling plan (front view) ø9 ø Characteristics and Outline Dimensions

200 Type Number of poles Ratings Rated current, A Calibrated at 5 C Rated insulation voltageu i V AC Rated impulse withstand voltage U imp kv Rated breaking capacity, ka NK AC V I cu /I cs (sym) V 0V DC V IEC097- AC V I cu /I cs (sym) 0V 0V V V 0V DC V V Rated short time withstand current, ka Weight ( marked standard type) kg Connections and Mountings Front-connected (FC) Terminal screws With extension bars Rear-connected (RC) Bolt studs Flat bar studs Plug-in (PM) For switchboards Standard (PMC) High-performance (PMB) For distribution boards (PMC) Flush-mounted (FP) With flat bar studs Draw-out type (DR) TemPlug (PG) TemPlug5B (PG) DIN rail mount Clip-in chassis mount Accessories (optional) Symbol Motor operator External operating Breaker-mounted handle Door-mounted (variable depth) Toggle extension Mechanical interlock Slide type Toggle holder Toggle lock Terminal cover For front-connected For rear-connected and plug-in Interpole barrier Terminal block for lead Door flange Standard specifications Overcurrent trip mechanism Trip button (color) Handle position indication (ON: Red, OFF: Green) Suitability for isolation CE marking Externally mounted 7 00A Ratings and Specifications H00-NE (Adjustable) /0 /9 0/0 5/0 5/3 /9 /9 /9 0/ e Electronic! (Red) L00-NE Characteristics and Outline Dimensions Molded Case Circuit Breakers H00-NE, L00-NE (Adjustable) /0 10/135 00/0 5/0 5/3 10/135 00/0 00/0 00/ e Electronic! (Red) Notes: : Standard. This configuration used unless otherwise specified. : Optional standard. Specify when ordering. : Semi-standard. : yes or available. : no or not available. 3 : Line side interpole barriers are supplied as standard. (Front connection only) 9 : The mechanical interlock is not applicable to the draw-out type (DR).! : Optional pretrip alarm or ground fault trip function available on request. Frame Time/Current characteristic curves Tripping Time second minute hour , Overcurrent tripping characteristics 5 3 T I p 5,,7 I R t R t p I g Isd t sd t g Percent Rated Current Characteristics No Long time-delay pick-up current (A) : (I R ) CT rated current : (I CT ) = 00A 3, 00,, 0, 00, 0, Long time-delay time settings (s) : (t R ) at 00%(I R ) at 00%(I R ) Setting tolerance ±0% Short time-delay (I R ) pick-up current (A) : (I sd ) Setting tolerance ±% Short time-delay time settings (s) : (t sd ) I i I Total clearing time +ms, resettable time 0ms Instantaneous trip pick-up (I R )100% Max: (I CT )% current (A) : (I i ) Setting tolerance ±0% Option Preferential trip alarm Pick-up current (A) : (I p) (I R )0% Setting tolerance ±10% Time-settings (s) : (t Definite time-delay characteristic, 0sec. p) Setting tolerance ±10% Ground falut trip Pick-up current (A) : (I g ) (I CT )0% Setting tolerance ±% Time-settings (s) : (t g ) Difinite time-delay characteristic, 0.sec. Total tripping time +ms, resettable time 0ms. Neutral protection Pick-up current (A) : (I N ) (I R )% or % selectable Time-settings (s) : (t N ) (t N )=(t R ) Same as Long time-delay time settings Characteristic No. will be applied as standard setting unless otherwise specified. Note:. In case of (I R )(I CT ), the setting tolerance becomes big when (I N ) is set at (I R )%. Combinations of Internally Mounted AccessoriesOptional Poles Auxiliary switch Alarm switch Shunt trip Under voltage trip Toggle Left pole Right pole 7-

201 : Arrangement Standard Line : Handle Frame Centre Line : Handle Centre Line Outline dimensions (mm) H00-NE, L00-NE Front-connected 1 51 ø13 13 Interpole barrier (removable) 110 Trip button (red) Mounting hole Toggle extension (removable) Conductor overlap, max M M Tapped hole Rear-connected 0.5 Toggle extension (removable) Plug-in (Standard) Stud can be turned M Detail of connecting part 13 1 ø ø for accessory wiring when necessary Conductor overlap, max M Tapped hole Note: Studs are factory installed in horizontal direction both on the line and load sides. Groove for dissipating Panel cutout (front view) heat generated by eddy ø current Panel cutout dimensions shown give an allowance of 1.0mm around the handle escutcheon Trip button (red) Toggle extension (removable) M1 screw 7 5 Conductor width, max.0 Auxiliary circuit terminals M Mounting base (rear view) ø11 Drilling plan (front view) Plug-in (High-performance) Detail of connecting part and Preparation of conductor 3 [max.] 0 ø13 Mounting base Drilling plan M1 screw (rear view) (front view) Mounting hole M Trip button (red) Flush-mounted [max.] Mounting Drilling plan hole (front view) Toggle extension (removable) Stud can be turned Trip button (red) Note: Studs are factory installed in horizontal direction both on the line and load sides LC ø9 ø Characteristics and Outline Dimensions

202 Type Number of poles Ratings Rated current, A Calibrated at 5 C Rated insulation voltageu i V AC Rated impulse withstand voltage U imp kv Rated breaking capacity, ka NK AC V I cu /I cs (sym) V 0V DC V IEC097- AC V I cu /I cs (sym) 0V 0V V V 0V DC V V Rated short time withstand current, ka Weight ( marked standard type) kg Connections and Mountings Front-connected (FC) Terminal screws With extension bars Rear-connected (RC) Bolt studs Flat bar studs Plug-in (PM) For switchboards Standard (PMC) High-performance (PMB) For distribution boards (PMC) Flush-mounted (FP) With flat bar studs Draw-out type (DR) TemPlug (PG) TemPlug5B (PG) DIN rail mount Clip-in chassis mount Accessories (optional) Symbol Motor operator External operating Breaker-mounted handle Door-mounted (variable depth) Toggle extension Mechanical interlock Slide type Toggle holder Toggle lock Terminal cover For front-connected For rear-connected and plug-in Interpole barrier Terminal block for lead Door flange Standard specifications Overcurrent trip mechanism Trip button (color) Handle position indication (ON: Red, OFF: Green) Suitability for isolation CE marking Externally mounted 7 0A Ratings and Specifications S0-NE (Adjustable) /0 5/ /75 5/0 5/3 5/ / 5/5 /75 0.3sec 19. e Electronic! (Red) S0-GE (Adjustable) Characteristics and Outline Dimensions Molded Case Circuit Breakers S0-NE, S0-GE /3 5/ 5/5 5/5 /75 /9 0.3sec 19. e Electronic! (Red) Notes: : Standard. This configuration used unless otherwise specified. : Optional standard. Specify when ordering. : Semi-standard. : yes or available. : no or not available. 3 : Line side interpole barriers are supplied as standard. (Front connection only) 9 : The mechanical interlock is not applicable to the draw-out type (DR).! : Being or will be applied.! : Optional pretrip alarm or ground fault trip function available on : One is supplied with every five breakers. Please specify if more are required. Frame Time/Current characteristic curves Tripping Time second minute hour , Overcurrent tripping characteristics 5 3 T I p 5,,7 I R t R t p I g Isd t sd t g Percent Rated Current Characteristics No Long time-delay pick-up current (A) : (I R ) CT rated current : (I CT ) = 0A 0, 00, 0, 00, 0,, Long time-delay time settings (s) : (t R ) at 00%(I R ) at 00%(I R ) Setting tolerance ±0% Short time-delay (I R ) pick-up current (A) : (I sd ) Setting tolerance ±% Short time-delay time settings (s) : (t sd ) I i I Total clearing time +ms, resettable time 0ms Instantaneous trip pick-up (I R )100% Max: (I CT )% current (A) : (I i ) Setting tolerance ±0% Option Preferential trip alarm Pick-up current (A) : (I p) (I R )0% Setting tolerance ±10% Time-settings (s) : (t Definite time-delay characteristic, 0sec. p) Setting tolerance ±10% Ground falut trip Pick-up current (A) : (I g ) (I CT )0% Setting tolerance ±% Time-settings (s) : (t g ) Difinite time-delay characteristic, 0.sec. Total tripping time +ms, resettable time 0ms. Neutral protection Pick-up current (A) : (I N ) (I R )% or % selectable Time-settings (s) : (t N ) (t N )=(t R ) Same as Long time-delay time settings Characteristic No. will be applied as standard setting unless otherwise specified. Note:. In case of (I R )(I CT ), the setting tolerance becomes big when (I N ) is set at (I R )%. Combinations of Internally Mounted AccessoriesOptional Poles Auxiliary switch Alarm switch Shunt trip Under voltage trip Toggle Left pole Right pole 7-

203 : Arrangement Standard Line : Handle Frame Centre Line : Handle Centre Line Outline dimensions (mm) S0-NE, S0-GE Front-connected Interpole barrier (removable) ø Mounting hole 0 Toggle extension (removable) 1 31 Drilling plan (front view) Trip button (red) ø M Conductor overlap, max Rear-connected Toggle extension (removable) Mounting plate M Insulating plate ø9 Panel cutout (front view) ø Soft plastic tubing ø to be provided on center pole and neutral pole of vertical terminal type for insulation Conductor overlap, max ø for accessory wiring when necessary 9 Note: Studs are factory installed in horizontal direction both on the line and load sides. Panel cutout dimensions shown give an allowance of 1.5mm around the handle escutcheon. Plug-in (Standard) Toggle extension (removable) Mounting angle Mounting base (rear view) Auxiliary circuit terminals M10 Mounting screw ø13 Conductor overlap, max ø Flush-mounted 1 M Trip button (red) Mounting plate (Max.t) Toggle extension (removable) Note: Studs are factory installed in horizontal direction both on the line and load sides. 1 0 Insulating plate 13 ø13 Max Conductor overlap, max Soft plastic tubing ø to be provided on center pole and neutral pole of vertical terminal type for insulation ø9 7-7 Characteristics and Outline Dimensions

204 Type Number of poles Ratings Rated current, A Calibrated at 5 C Rated insulation voltageu i V AC Rated impulse withstand voltage U imp kv Rated breaking capacity, ka NK AC V I cu /I cs (sym) V 0V DC V IEC097- AC V I cu /I cs (sym) 0V 0V V V 0V DC V V Rated short time withstand current, ka Weight ( marked standard type) kg Connections and Mountings Front-connected (FC) Terminal screws With extension bars Rear-connected (RC) Bolt studs Flat bar studs Plug-in (PM) For switchboards Standard (PMC) High-performance (PMB) For distribution boards (PMC) Flush-mounted (FP) With flat bar studs Draw-out type (DR) TemPlug (PG) TemPlug5B (PG) DIN rail mount Clip-in chassis mount Accessories (optional) Symbol Motor operator External operating Breaker-mounted handle Door-mounted (variable depth) Toggle extension Mechanical interlock Slide type Toggle holder Toggle lock Terminal cover For front-connected For rear-connected and plug-in Interpole barrier Terminal block for lead Door flange Standard specifications Overcurrent trip mechanism Trip button (color) Handle position indication (ON: Red, OFF: Green) Suitability for isolation CE marking Externally mounted 7 100A Ratings and Specifications S100-NE (Adjustable) /3 5/5 /9 5/3 5/ 5/5 5/5 /75 /9 00.3sec 7.0 e Electronic! (Red) Characteristics and Outline Dimensions Molded Case Circuit Breakers S100-NE Notes: : Standard. This configuration used unless otherwise specified. : Optional standard. Specify when ordering. : yes or available. : no or not available. 3 : Line side interpole barriers are supplied as standard. (Front connection only) 9 : The mechanical interlock is not applicable to the draw-out type (DR).! : Being or will be applied.! : Optional pretrip alarm or ground fault trip function available on : One is supplied with every five breakers. Please specify if more are required. Frame Time/Current characteristic curves Tripping Time second minute hour , Overcurrent tripping characteristics 5 3 T I p 5,,7 I R t R t p I g Isd t sd t g Percent Rated Current Characteristics No Long time-delay pick-up current (A) : (I R ) CT rated current : (I CT ) = 100A 0, 00, 0, 0,, 100, 00, Long time-delay time settings (s) : (t R ) at 00%(I R ) at 00%(I R ) Setting tolerance ±0% Short time-delay (I R ) pick-up current (A) : (I sd ) Setting tolerance ±% Short time-delay time settings (s) : (t sd ) I i I Total clearing time +ms, resettable time 0ms Instantaneous trip pick-up (I R )100% Max: (I CT )% current (A) : (I i ) Setting tolerance ±0% Option Preferential trip alarm Pick-up current (A) : (I p) (I R )0% Setting tolerance ±10% Time-settings (s) : (t Definite time-delay characteristic, 0sec. p) Setting tolerance ±10% Ground falut trip Pick-up current (A) : (I g ) (I CT )0% Setting tolerance ±% Time-settings (s) : (t g ) Difinite time-delay characteristic, 0.sec. Total tripping time +ms, resettable time 0ms. Neutral protection Pick-up current (A) : (I N ) (I R )% or % selectable Time-settings (s) : (t N ) (t N )=(t R ) Same as Long time-delay time settings Characteristic No. will be applied as standard setting unless otherwise specified. Note:. In case of (I R )(I CT ), the setting tolerance becomes big when (I N ) is set at (I R )%. Combinations of Internally Mounted AccessoriesOptional Poles Auxiliary switch Alarm switch Shunt trip Under voltage trip Toggle Left pole Right pole 7-

205 : Arrangement Standard Line : Handle Frame Centre Line : Handle Centre Line Outline dimensions (mm) S100-NE Front-connected Interpole barrier (removable) ø Mounting hole Toggle extension (removable) 0 11 Insulating plate (max) Mounting angle Trip button (red) M 139(min.) 3 0 ø Conductor overlap, max Rear-connected Panel cutout (front view) Toggle extension (removable) Mounting angle M LH ø1 5 1 R Conductor overlap, max Insulation tube ON side Center pole and Neutral pole ( OFF side All poles ) ø9 139(min) 1 9 Panel cutout dimensions shown give an allowance of 1.5mm around the handle escutcheon. Draw-out Auxiliary circuit terminals (Automatic connection) Auxiliary circuit terminals (self-engaging) Trip button (red) Breaker fixing screw 1 7 0(max.) ø1 Mounting hole Auxiliary circuit terminals (self-engaging) (max.) Auxiliary circuit terminals (self-engaging) Draw-out handle (removable) Toggle extension (removable) (draw-out) 35(disconnected) 95(test) 5(connected) (connected) 5(draw-out) ø Max Conductor overlap, max ø1 Mounting hole Max.5 10 Conductor overlap, max ø1 Mounting hole 1 1 -ø1 0 Mounting angle L Flush-mounted Trip button (red) M Mounting plate (Max.t) Toggle extension (removable) 1 0 Left and right poles 10 Center pole, Neutral pole 55 ø ø9 10 Characteristics and Outline Dimensions 7-9

206 Type Number of poles Ratings Motor rated capacity (kw) and breaker rated current (A) Calibrated at 5 Note: Select an appropriate one depending on the total load current of the motor operator. Rated insulation voltageu i V AC Rated impulse withstand voltageu imp kv Rated breaking capacity, ka NK AC V I cu /I cs (sym) V 0V DC V IEC 097- AC 0V I cu /I cs (sym) V V 0V DC V Weight ( marked standard type) kg Connections and Mountings Front-connected (FC) Terminal screws With extension bars Rear-connected (RC) Bolt studs Flat bar studs Plug-in (PM) For switchboards Standard (PMC) High-performance (PMB) For distribution boards (PMC) Flush-mounted (FP) With flat bar studs Draw-out type (DR) TemPlug (PG) TemPlug5B (PG) DIN rail mount Clip-in chassis mount Accessories (optional) Symbol Motor operator External operating Breaker-mounted handle Door-mounted (variable depth) Toggle extension Mechanical interlock Slide type Toggle holder Toggle lock Terminal cover For front-connected For rear-connected and plug-in Interpole barrier Terminal block for lead Door flange Standard specifications Overcurrent trip mechanism Trip button (color) Handle position indication (ON: Red, OFF: Green) Suitability for isolation CE marking Externally mounted 7 A E-CM Ratings and Specifications E-CM kw (A) 00/0V 00/0V Combinations of Internally Mounted AccessoriesOptional.5/-!3 5/-!.5/1.3.5/1.3.5/1.3 5/ Bolt studs Thermal-magnetic@7 (Red) Non Non Characteristics and Outline Dimensions Molded Case Circuit Breakers Notes: : Standard. This configuration used unless otherwise specified. : Optional standard. Specify when ordering. : yes or available. : no or not available.!3 : at 0V AC.! : at V : Hydraulic-magnetic type for below 5A rating Frame Time/Current characteristic curves Tripping Time hour minute second Ambient Compensating Curves Percent current rating Percent current rating Min.(0.7-5A) Min.(3-5A) 0.7-5A 3-5A 110 3A, A A Max.(3-5A) Max.(0.7-5A) Percent Rated Current Ambient temperature ( C) A, 5A 0A 0A Motor output (kw) and Rated current (A) (A) (kw) (kw) (A) 00V 00V 00V 00V Calibrated temperature Calibrated temperature Ambient temperature ( C) 000 Poles Auxiliary switch Alarm switch Shunt trip 1 Under voltage trip Toggle Left pole Right pole NOTE: 1 Shunt trip is provided with anti-burnout switch. 7-

207 : Arrangement Standard Line : Handle Frame Centre Line : Handle Centre Line Outline dimensions (mm) E-CM Front-connected Mounting hole M5 0. screw Preparation of conductor (max.) ø (max.) max.t M M 0.7 Tapped hole Rear-connected Insulated bushing ø1 M 0.7 Tapped hole 5 Panel cutout (front view) R1 5 Mounting plate (max.t3.) M screw 5 5 M ø1 ø for accessory wiring when necessary Panel cutout dimensions shown give an allowance of 1.0mm around the handle escutcheon. Plug-in (For Switch board ) Detail of connecting part 3 The mounting plate is not supplied. 11 M screw Mounting base (rear view) M Preparation of conductor ø.5 10(max.) 1(max.) Mounting plate (t=3.mm min) 75 Allow a space of 5mm from adjacent breaker when the breaker is fitted with internal accessories. 5 ø Flush-mounted 11 M Mounting plate (t=max.) M screw ø Characteristics and Outline Dimensions 7-51

208 Type Number of poles Ratings Motor rated capacity (kw) and breaker rated current (A) Calibrated at 0 Note: Select an appropriate one depending on the total load current of the motor operator. Rated insulation voltageu i V AC Rated impulse withstand voltageu imp kv Rated breaking capacity, ka NK AC V I cu /I cs (sym) V 0V DC V IEC 097- AC 0V I cu /I cs (sym) V V 0V DC V Weight ( marked standard type) kg Connections and Mountings Front-connected (FC) Terminal screws With extension bars Rear-connected (RC) Bolt studs Flat bar studs Plug-in (PM) For switchboards Standard (PMC) High-performance (PMB) For distribution boards (PMC) Flush-mounted (FP) With flat bar studs Draw-out type (DR) TemPlug (PG) TemPlug5B (PG) DIN rail mount Clip-in chassis mount Accessories (optional) Symbol Motor operator External operating Breaker-mounted handle Door-mounted (variable depth) Toggle extension Mechanical interlock Slide type Toggle holder Toggle lock Terminal cover For front-connected For rear-connected and plug-in Interpole barrier Terminal block for lead Door flange Standard specifications Overcurrent trip mechanism Trip button (color) Handle position indication (ON: Red, OFF: Green) Suitability for isolation CE marking Externally mounted 7S-NM Ratings and Specifications S-NM kw (A) 00/0V 00/0V /5 / 5/5 / / / 1.1 BAR e Thermal-magnetic (Red) Notes: : Standard. This configuration used unless otherwise specified. : Optional standard. Specify when ordering. : yes or available. : no or not available. 3 : Line side interpole barriers are supplied as standard. (Front connection only) Characteristics and Outline Dimensions Molded Case Circuit Breakers A Frame Time/Current characteristic curves Tripping Time second minute hour Min.(3 A) 1 0. Min.(1 A) Max.(3 A) 0 0 Max.(1 A) Percent Rated Current Magnetic trip setting % 10% Ambient Compensating Curves Percent current rating A,5A 75A 3A Calibrated temperature 0A 0A,A,A A Ambient temperature ( C) 000 Combinations of Internally Mounted AccessoriesOptional Poles Auxiliary switch Alarm switch Shunt trip Under voltage trip Toggle Left pole Right pole 7-5

209 : Arrangement Standard Line : Handle Frame Centre Line : Handle Centre Line Outline dimensions (mm) S-NM Front-connected Mounting hole LH Interpole barrier (removable) 7 M screw Preparation of conductor ø9 17(max.) max.t5.5(max.) With extension bars (optional) ø LC M 0.7 LC M 0.7 Tapped hole Rear-connected Mounting plate (max. t3.) Detail of connecting part 13.5 Conductor overlap max LH Panel cutout (front view) 5 LH LC R Flush-mounted M 0.7 ø1 Stud can be turned 0 M or Tapped hole Note: Studs are factory installed in horizontal direction both on the line and load sides. M5 0. Mounting plate (max. t) Detail of connecting part 13.5 Conductor overlap, max Panel cutout dimensions shown give an allowance of 1.0mm or more around the handle escutcheon Panel cutout (front view) -ø Mounting hole (Left and right poles) 107 Stud can be turned 5 or 37 (Center pole)7 Note: Studs are factory installed in horizontal direction both on the line and load sides Characteristics and Outline Dimensions 7-53

Type Number of poles Ratings Motor rated capacity (kw) and breaker rated current (A) Calibrated at 0 Note: Select an appropriate one depending on the total load current of the motor operator.

210 Type Number of poles Ratings Motor rated capacity (kw) and breaker rated current (A) Calibrated at 0 Note: Select an appropriate one depending on the total load current of the motor operator. Rated insulation voltageu i V AC Rated impulse withstand voltageu imp kv Rated breaking capacity, ka NK AC V I cu /I cs (sym) V 0V DC V IEC 097- AC 0V I cu /I cs (sym) V V 0V DC V Weight ( marked standard type) kg Connections and Mountings Front-connected (FC) Terminal screws With extension bars Rear-connected (RC) Bolt studs Flat bar studs Plug-in (PM) For switchboards Standard (PMC) High-performance (PMB) For distribution boards (PMC) Flush-mounted (FP) With flat bar studs Draw-out type (DR) TemPlug (PG) TemPlug5B (PG) DIN rail mount Clip-in chassis mount Accessories (optional) Symbol Motor operator External operating Breaker-mounted handle Door-mounted (variable depth) Toggle extension Mechanical interlock Slide type Toggle holder Toggle lock Terminal cover For front-connected For rear-connected and plug-in Interpole barrier Terminal block for lead Door flange Standard specifications Overcurrent trip mechanism Trip button (color) Handle position indication (ON: Red, OFF: Green) Suitability for isolation CE marking Externally mounted 7S5-NM Ratings and Specifications S5-NM (A) 00/0V /5 5/5 5/5 35/35 35/35 5/5 1.5 BAR e kw 00/0V Thermal-magnetic (Red) Notes: : Standard. This configuration used unless otherwise specified. : Optional standard. Specify when ordering. : yes or available. : no or not available. 3 : Line side interpole barriers are supplied as standard. (Front connection only) Characteristics and Outline Dimensions Molded Case Circuit Breakers 5A Frame Time/Current characteristic curves Tripping Time second minute hour Min Max. Percent Rated Current Magnetic trip setting 100% 0% Ambient Compensating Curves Percent current rating A 0A 175A 5A Calibrated temperature Ambient temperature ( C) 000 Combinations of Internally Mounted AccessoriesOptional Poles Auxiliary switch Alarm switch Shunt trip Under voltage trip Toggle Left pole Right pole 7-5

211 : Arrangement Standard Line : Handle Frame Centre Line : Handle Centre Line Outline dimensions (mm) S5-NM Front-connected Mounting hole 9 Interpole barrier (removable) Preparation of conductor With extension bars (optional) ø M screw 5(max.) max.t7 ø11 10(max.) M 0.7 LC M 0.7 Tapped hole Rear-connected Panel cutout (front view) Mounting plate (max. t3.) ø 5.5 Flush-mounted 0 R1 1 Conductor overlap, max ø Stud can be turned 5 or M M 0.7 Tapped hole Note: Studs are factory installed in horizontal direction both on the line and load sides. 1 Panel cutout dimensions shown give an allowance of 1.0mm or more around the handle escutcheon. Panel cutout (front view) M5 0. Mounting plate (max. t) -ø Mounting hole ø9 Left and right poles 1 Center pole 11 Stud can be turned 5 or 1 13 Note: Studs are factory installed in horizontal direction both on the line and load sides. 7 Characteristics and Outline Dimensions 7-55

212 Ratings and Specifications Characteristics and Outline Dimensions Molded Case Circuit Breakers 7S-NN A Frame Type Number of poles Ratings Rated current, A Rated insulation voltageu i V Rated operational voltage V AC AC DC Rated short circuit making capacity, ka peak Rated short time withstand current, ka Rated impulse withstand voltage U imp kv Performance Utilization category AC IEC DC Upstream Weight ( marked standard type) kg Connections and Mountings Front-connected (FC) Terminal screws With extension bars Rear-connected (RC) Bolt studs Flat bar studs Plug-in (PM) For switchboards Standard (PMC) High-performance (PMB) For distribution boards (PMC) Flush-mounted (FP) With flat bar studs Draw-out type (DR) TemPlug (PG) TemPlug5B (PG) DIN rail mount Clip-in chassis mount Accessories (optional) Symbol Motor operator External operating Breaker-mounted handle Door-mounted (variable depth) Toggle extension Mechanical interlock Slide type Toggle holder Toggle lock Terminal cover For front-connected For rear-connected and plug-in Interpole barrier Terminal block for lead Door flange Standard specifications Trip button (color) Handle position indication (ON: Red, OFF: Green) Suitability for isolation CE marking Externally mounted S-NN sec AC-3A DC-A S-NF BAR e (Red) Notes: : Standard. This configuration used unless otherwise specified. : Optional standard. Specify when ordering. : yes or available. : no or not available. 3 : Line side interpole barriers are supplied as standard. (Front connection : Required for overcurrent protection. Rated conditional short-circuit current [I cc ] will be the same as Rated short-circuit breaking capacity of upstream breaker. Combinations of Internally Mounted AccessoriesOptional Poles Auxiliary switch Alarm switch Shunt trip Under voltage trip Toggle Left pole Right pole 7-5

213 : Arrangement Standard Line : Handle Frame Centre Line : Handle Centre Line Outline dimensions (mm) S-NN Front-connected Interpole barrier (removable) Mounting hole 7 Mscrew Preparation of conductor ø9 17(max.) max.t5.5(max.) ø.5 With extension bars (optional) LC M 0.7 LC M 0.7 Tapped hole Rear-connected Mounting plate (max. t3.) Detail of connecting part 13.5 Conductor overlap, max Panel cutout (front view) 5 LH LC R Plug-in (Standard) 1 M 0.7 ø1 Stud can be turned 0 M or Tapped hole Note: Studs are factory installed in horizontal direction both on the line and load sides. Detail of connecting part Preparation of conductor 1 Panel cutout dimensions shown give an allowance of 1.0mm or more or more around the handle escutcheon. Mounting hole LH ø.5 Mounting base (rear view) (max.) LH LC Mscrew Conductor (max.) LH 7 ø M M Mounting plate Plug-in (High-performance) Detail of connecting part Preparation of conductor 1 LC LH Mounting hole Mscrew Conductor ø.5 Mounting base (rear view) LC 0 LH (max.) 10(max.) ø M M5 0. Mounting plate (max. t) (Left and right poles) M Detail of connecting part 13.5 Conductor overlap, max Stud can be turned 5 or Mounting plate ø1 for accessory wiring when necessary -ø Mounting hole (Center pole, Neutral pole)7 Note: Studs are factory installed in horizontal direction both on the line and load sides Panel cutout (front view) Characteristics and Outline Dimensions

214 7 A Ratings and Specifications Characteristics and Outline Dimensions Molded Case Circuit Breakers S-SN Frame Type Number of poles Ratings Rated current, A Rated insulation voltageu i V Rated operational voltage V AC AC DC Rated short circuit making capacity, ka peak Rated short time withstand current, ka Rated impulse withstand voltage U imp kv Performance Utilization category AC IEC DC Upstream Weight ( marked standard type) kg Connections and Mountings Front-connected (FC) Terminal screws With extension bars Rear-connected (RC) Bolt studs Flat bar studs Plug-in (PM) For switchboards Standard (PMC) High-performance (PMB) For distribution boards (PMC) Flush-mounted (FP) With flat bar studs Draw-out type (DR) TemPlug (PG) TemPlug5B (PG) DIN rail mount Clip-in chassis mount Accessories (optional) Symbol Motor operator External operating Breaker-mounted handle Door-mounted (variable depth) Toggle extension Mechanical interlock9 Slide type Toggle holder Toggle lock Terminal cover For front-connected For rear-connected and plug-in Interpole barrier Terminal block for lead Door flange Standard specifications Trip button (color) Handle position indication (ON: Red, OFF: Green) Suitability for isolation Externally mounted S-SN sec AC-3A DC-A S-SF e (Red) sec AC-3A DC-A S-SF (BAR) e (Red) Notes: : Standard. This configuration used unless otherwise specified. : Optional standard. Specify when ordering. : yes or available. : no or not available. 3 : Line side interpole barriers are supplied as standard. (Front connection only) 9 : The mechanical interlock is not applicable to the draw-out type (DR).!1 : Provided with DIN rail : Required for overcurrent protection. Rated conditional short-circuit current [I cc ] will be the same as Rated short-circuit breaking capacity of upstream breaker. Combinations of Internally Mounted AccessoriesOptional Poles Auxiliary switch Alarm switch Shunt trip Under voltage trip Toggle Left pole Right pole 7-5

215 : Arrangement Standard Line : Handle Frame Centre Line : Handle Centre Line Outline dimensions (mm) S-SN Front-connected LH Interpole barrier (removable) LH Mounting hole M screw Preparation of conductor 1.5 ø9 9(max.) With extension bars (optional) M ø LH 5 Drilling plan (front view) LH M 0.7 Tapped hole Rear-connected Detail of connecting part Mounting plate (max. t3.) LH LH LH Panel cutout (front view) LH R M Studs are horizontal direction only ø0 M 0.7 Tapped hole 1 Panel cutout dimensions shown give an allowance of 1.0mm around the handle escutcheon. Plug-in (Standard) Detail of connecting part Conductor 3 0 Preparation of conductor 1(max.) ø.5 17(max.) M screw Mounting base (rear view) LH M Mounting plate (t=3.mm min) 3 Drilling plan (front view) LH Flush-mounted M Detail of connecting part M Mounting plate (t=max) ø Mounting hole Characteristics and Outline Dimensions 7-59

7 A Ratings and Specifications Characteristics and Outline Dimensions Molded Case Circuit Breakers S-NN Frame Type Number of poles Ratings Rated current, A Rated insulation voltageu i V Rated

216 7 A Ratings and Specifications Characteristics and Outline Dimensions Molded Case Circuit Breakers S-NN Frame Type Number of poles Ratings Rated current, A Rated insulation voltageu i V Rated operational voltage V AC AC DC Rated short circuit making capacity, ka peak Rated short time withstand current, ka Rated impulse withstand voltage U imp kv Performance Utilization category AC IEC DC Upstream Weight ( marked standard type) kg Connections and Mountings Front-connected (FC) Terminal screws With extension bars Rear-connected (RC) Bolt studs Flat bar studs Plug-in (PM) For switchboards Standard (PMC) High-performance (PMB) For distribution boards (PMC) Flush-mounted (FP) With flat bar studs Draw-out type (DR) TemPlug (PG) TemPlug5B (PG) DIN rail mount Clip-in chassis mount Accessories (optional) Symbol Motor operator External operating Breaker-mounted handle Door-mounted (variable depth) Toggle extension Mechanical interlock Slide type Toggle holder Toggle lock Terminal cover For front-connected For rear-connected and plug-in Interpole barrier Terminal block for lead Door flange Standard specifications Trip button (color) Handle position indication (ON: Red, OFF: Green) Suitability for isolation CE marking Externally mounted S-NN sec AC-3A DC-A S-NF BAR e (Red) Notes: : Standard. This configuration used unless otherwise specified. : Optional standard. Specify when ordering. : yes or available. : no or not available. 3 : Line side interpole barriers are supplied as standard. (Front connection : Required for overcurrent protection. Rated conditional short-circuit current [I cc ] will be the same as Rated short-circuit breaking capacity of upstream breaker. Combinations of Internally Mounted AccessoriesOptional Poles Auxiliary switch Alarm switch Shunt trip Under voltage trip Toggle Left pole Right pole 7-0

217 : Arrangement Standard Line : Handle Frame Centre Line : Handle Centre Line Outline dimensions (mm) S-NN Front-connected Interpole barrier (removable) Mounting hole 7 Mscrew Preparation of conductor ø9 17(max.) max.t5.5(max.) ø.5 With extension bars (optional) LC M 0.7 LC M 0.7 Tapped hole Rear-connected Mounting plate (max. t3.) Detail of connecting part 13.5 Conductor overlap, max Panel cutout (front view) 5 LH LC R Plug-in (Standard) 1 M 0.7 ø1 Stud can be turned 0 M or Tapped hole Note: Studs are factory installed in horizontal direction both on the line and load sides. Detail of connecting part Preparation of conductor 1 Panel cutout dimensions shown give an allowance of 1.0mm or more or more around the handle escutcheon. Mounting hole LH ø.5 Mounting base (rear view) (max.) LH LC Mscrew Conductor (max.) LH 7 ø M M Mounting plate Plug-in (High-performance) Detail of connecting part Preparation of conductor 1 LC LH Mounting hole Mscrew Conductor ø.5 Mounting base (rear view) LC 0 LH (max.) 10(max.) ø M M5 0. Mounting plate (max. t) (Left and right poles) M Detail of connecting part 13.5 Conductor overlap, max Stud can be turned 5 or Mounting plate ø1 for accessory wiring when necessary -ø Mounting hole (Center pole, Neutral pole)7 Note: Studs are factory installed in horizontal direction both on the line and load sides Panel cutout (front view) Characteristics and Outline Dimensions

218 7 A Ratings and Specifications Characteristics and Outline Dimensions Molded Case Circuit Breakers S-SN Frame Type Number of poles Ratings Rated current, A Rated insulation voltageu i V Rated operational voltage V AC AC DC Rated short circuit making capacity, ka peak Rated short time withstand current, ka Rated impulse withstand voltage U imp kv Performance Utilization category AC IEC DC Upstream Weight ( marked standard type) kg Connections and Mountings Front-connected (FC) Terminal screws With extension bars Rear-connected (RC) Bolt studs Flat bar studs Plug-in (PM) For switchboards Standard (PMC) High-performance (PMB) For distribution boards (PMC) Flush-mounted (FP) With flat bar studs Draw-out type (DR) TemPlug (PG) TemPlug5B (PG) DIN rail mount Clip-in chassis mount Accessories (optional) Symbol Motor operator External operating Breaker-mounted handle Door-mounted (variable depth) Toggle extension Mechanical interlock Slide type Toggle holder Toggle lock Terminal cover For front-connected For rear-connected and plug-in Interpole barrier Terminal block for lead Door flange Standard specifications Trip button (color) Handle position indication (ON: Red, OFF: Green) Suitability for isolation Externally mounted S-SN 5.3sec AC-3A DC-A S-SF (BAR) e (Red).3sec AC-3A DC-A S-SF (BAR) e (Red) Notes: : Standard. This configuration used unless otherwise specified. : Optional standard. Specify when ordering. : yes or available. : no or not available. 3 : Line side interpole barriers are supplied as standard. (Front connection : Required for overcurrent protection. Rated conditional short-circuit current [I cc ] will be the same as Rated short-circuit breaking capacity of upstream breaker. Combinations of Internally Mounted AccessoriesOptional Poles Auxiliary switch Alarm switch Shunt trip Under voltage trip Toggle Left pole Right pole 7-

219 : Arrangement Standard Line : Handle Frame Centre Line : Handle Centre Line Outline dimensions (mm) S-SN Front-connected Preparation of With extension bars conductor (optional) Interpole barrier Mounting hole (removable) Interpole barrier (removable) LH Conductor LH Conductor overlap, max overlap, max 5(max.) Mounting hole max.t7 3 3 M screw LH LH 101 ø9 11(max.) LH Drilling plan (front view) LH M ø11 ø M 0.7 Tapped hole For the extension bars, straight bars or spread bars can be supplied. Rear-connected Panel cutout (front view) Mounting plate (max. t3.) LH LH ø LH LH Flush-mounted 10 5 Conductor overlap, max 5 ø9 Plug-in (Standard) Detail of connecting part M Mounting plate M 0.7 Stud can be turned or Conductor width, max.5 1.5(max.) M screw 0 1 M5 0. Auxiliary circuit terminals (0) Mounting base (rear view) LH Mounting plate (max.t) Conductor overlap, max ø9 M 0 1 -ø Mounting hole 11 Stud can be turned 5 or 35 Drilling plan (front view) M 0.7 Tapped hole LH ø R1 1 Panel cutout dimensions shown give an allowance of 1.0mm around the handle escutcheon Mounting plate Characteristics and Outline Dimensions 7-3

220 Ratings and Specifications Characteristics and Outline Dimensions Molded Case Circuit Breakers 7S00-NN 00A Frame Type Number of poles Ratings Rated current, A Rated insulation voltageu i V Rated operational voltage V AC AC DC Rated short circuit making capacity, ka peak Rated short time withstand current, ka Rated impulse withstand voltage U imp kv Performance Utilization category AC IEC DC Upstream Weight ( marked standard type) kg Connections and Mountings Front-connected (FC) Terminal screws With extension bars Rear-connected (RC) Bolt studs Flat bar studs Plug-in (PM) For switchboards Standard (PMC) High-performance (PMB) For distribution boards (PMC) Flush-mounted (FP) With flat bar studs Draw-out type (DR) TemPlug (PG) TemPlug5B (PG) DIN rail mount Clip-in chassis mount Accessories (optional) Symbol Motor operator External operating Breaker-mounted handle Door-mounted (variable depth) Toggle extension Mechanical interlock9 Slide type Toggle holder Toggle lock Terminal cover For front-connected For rear-connected and plug-in Interpole barrier Terminal block for lead Door flange Standard specifications Trip button (color) Handle position indication (ON: Red, OFF: Green) Suitability for isolation CE marking Externally mounted S00-NN sec AC-3A DC-A S00-NF. 5. BAR e (Red) Notes: : Standard. This configuration used unless otherwise specified. : Optional standard. Specify when ordering. : Semi-standard. : yes or available. : no or not available. 3 : Line side interpole barriers are supplied as standard. (Front connection only) 9 : The mechanical interlock is not applicable to the draw-out type : Required for overcurrent protection. Rated conditional short-circuit current [I cc ] will be the same as Rated short-circuit breaking capacity of upstream breaker. Combinations of Internally Mounted AccessoriesOptional Poles Auxiliary switch Alarm switch Shunt trip Under voltage trip Toggle Left pole Right pole 7-

221 : Arrangement Standard Line : Handle Frame Centre Line : Handle Centre Line Outline dimensions (mm) S00-NN Front-connected Interpole barrier (removable) Mounting hole H L ON side:3 OFF side:35 M10 screw Preparation of conductor With extension bars (optional) 1 (max.) ø11 5 (max.) ø H L H L M Trip button (red) M Tapped hole Rear-connected Mounting plate Stud can be turned 5 or H L 103 H L H L Groove for dissipating heat generated by eddy current Panel cutout (front view) Plug-in (Standard) ø13 0 Conductor overlap, max 39 ø Conductor overlap, max M Tapped hole Note: Studs are factory installed in horizontal direction both on the line and load sides. Detail of connecting part ø3 Mounting base (rear view) R Panel cutout dimensions shown give an allowance of 1.0mm around the handle escutcheon M Conductor width, max. 35 M10screw Auxiliary circuit terminals ø Mounting plate Plug-in (High-performance) LC H L H M10screw L H L H L H L H L (max.) LC Flush-mounted (max.) M Detail of connecting part M5 Conductor width, max Mounting plate LC t max. Mounting base (rear view) ø13 Preparation of conductor ø11 0 Stud can be turned 5 or Note: Studs are factory installed in horizontal direction both on the line and load sides (max.) -ø Panel cutout (front view) LC 5 Mounting angle ø7 Mounting hole Characteristics and Outline Dimensions

222 7 A Ratings and Specifications Characteristics and Outline Dimensions Molded Case Circuit Breakers S-GN Frame Type Number of poles Ratings Rated current, A Rated insulation voltageu i V Rated operational voltage V AC AC DC Rated short circuit making capacity, ka peak Rated short time withstand current, ka Rated impulse withstand voltage U imp kv Performance Utilization category AC IEC DC Upstream Weight ( marked standard type) kg Connections and Mountings Front-connected (FC) Terminal screws With extension bars Rear-connected (RC) Bolt studs Flat bar studs Plug-in (PM) For switchboards Standard (PMC) High-performance (PMB) For distribution boards (PMC) Flush-mounted (FP) With flat bar studs Draw-out type (DR) TemPlug (PG) TemPlug5B (PG) DIN rail mount Clip-in chassis mount Accessories (optional) Symbol Motor operator External operating Breaker-mounted handle Door-mounted (variable depth) Toggle extension Mechanical interlock9 Slide type Toggle holder Toggle lock Terminal cover For front-connected For rear-connected and plug-in Interpole barrier Terminal block for lead Door flange Standard specifications Trip button (color) Handle position indication (ON: Red, OFF: Green) Suitability for isolation Externally mounted S-GN sec AC-3A DC-A S-NF e (Red) Notes: : Standard. This configuration used unless otherwise specified. : Optional standard. Specify when ordering. : Semi-standard. : yes or available. : no or not available. 3 : Line side interpole barriers are supplied as standard. (Front connection only) 9 : The mechanical interlock is not applicable to the draw-out type : Required for overcurrent protection. Rated conditional short-circuit current [I cc ] will be the same as Rated short-circuit breaking capacity of upstream breaker. Combinations of Internally Mounted Accessories Poles Auxiliary switch Alarm switch Shunt trip Under voltage trip Toggle Left pole Right pole 7-

223 : Arrangement Standard Line : Handle Frame Centre Line : Handle Centre Line Outline dimensions (mm) S-GN Front-connected ø Trip button (red) Interpole barrier (removable) Mounting hole Conductor overlap, max 3 Toggle extension (removable) M M Tapped hole Rear-connected Toggle extension (removable) Plug-in (Standard) Stud can be turned M ø for accessory wiring when necessary Detail of connecting part 13 ø Conductor overlap, max 1 ø M Tapped hole Groove for dissipating heat generated by eddy current Note: Studs are factory installed in horizontal direction both on the line and load sides. 5 Panel cutout (front view) 53 9 Panel cutout dimensions shown give an allowance of 1.0mm around the handle escutcheon Trip button (red) Toggle extension (removable) M1 screw 7 5 Conductor width, max.0 Auxiliary circuit terminals 1 0 M ø11 Detail of connecting part and Preparation of conductor 3 0 ø13 7 Mounting base (rear view) Drilling plan (front view) Plug-in (High-performance) Drilling plan (front view) Mounting hole Toggle extension (removable) Stud can be turned.5 [max.] Trip button (red) Flush-mounted Mounting hole.5 M1 screw 33 Toggle extension (removable) M Trip button (red) Note: Studs are factory installed in horizontal direction both on the line and load sides. Mounting base (rear view) Drilling plan (front view) ø9 ø Characteristics and Outline Dimensions

224 7 00A Ratings and Specifications Characteristics and Outline Dimensions Molded Case Circuit Breakers S00-NN Frame Type Number of poles Ratings Rated current, A Rated insulation voltageu i V Rated operational voltage V AC AC DC Rated short circuit making capacity, ka peak Rated short time withstand current, ka Rated impulse withstand voltage U imp kv Performance Utilization category AC IEC DC Upstream Weight ( marked standard type) kg Connections and Mountings Front-connected (FC) Terminal screws With extension bars Rear-connected (RC) Bolt studs Flat bar studs Plug-in (PM) For switchboards Standard (PMC) High-performance (PMB) For distribution boards (PMC) Flush-mounted (FP) With flat bar studs Draw-out type (DR) TemPlug (PG) TemPlug5B (PG) DIN rail mount Clip-in chassis mount Accessories (optional) Symbol Motor operator External operating Breaker-mounted handle Door-mounted (variable depth) Toggle extension Mechanical interlock9 Slide type Toggle holder Toggle lock Terminal cover For front-connected For rear-connected and plug-in Interpole barrier Terminal block for lead Door flange Standard specifications Trip button (color) Handle position indication (ON: Red, OFF: Green) Suitability for isolation Externally mounted S00-NN sec AC-3A DC-A S00-NF e (Red) Notes: : Standard. This configuration used unless otherwise specified. : Optional standard. Specify when ordering. : Semi-standard. : yes or available. : no or not available. 3 : Line side interpole barriers are supplied as standard. (Front connection only) 9 : The mechanical interlock is not applicable to the draw-out type : Required for overcurrent protection. Rated conditional short-circuit current [I cc ] will be the same as Rated short-circuit breaking capacity of upstream breaker. Combinations of Internally Mounted Accessories Poles Auxiliary switch Alarm switch Shunt trip Under voltage trip Toggle Left pole Right pole 7-

225 : Arrangement Standard Line : Handle Frame Centre Line : Handle Centre Line Outline dimensions (mm) S00-NN Front-connected ø Trip button (red) Interpole barrier (removable) Mounting hole Conductor overlap, max 10 3 Toggle extension (removable) M M Tapped hole Rear-connected Toggle extension (removable) Plug-in (Standard) Stud can be turned M ø for accessory wiring when necessary Detail of connecting part 13 ø Conductor overlap, max 1 ø M Tapped hole Groove for dissipating heat generated by eddy current Note: Studs are factory installed in horizontal direction both on the line and load sides. 5 Panel cutout (front view) 53 9 Panel cutout dimensions shown give an allowance of 1.0mm around the handle escutcheon Trip button (red) Toggle extension (removable) M1 screw 7 5 Conductor width, max.0 Auxiliary circuit terminals 1 0 M ø11 Detail of connecting part and Preparation of conductor 3 0 ø13 7 Mounting base (rear view) Drilling plan (front view) Plug-in (High-performance) Drilling plan (front view) Mounting hole Toggle extension (removable) Stud can be turned.5 [max.] Trip button (red) Flush-mounted Mounting hole.5 M1 screw 33 Toggle extension (removable) M Trip button (red) Note: Studs are factory installed in horizontal direction both on the line and load sides. Mounting base (rear view) Drilling plan (front view) ø9 ø Characteristics and Outline Dimensions

226 7 0A Ratings and Specifications Characteristics and Outline Dimensions Molded Case Circuit Breakers S0-NN Frame Type Number of poles Ratings Rated current, A Rated insulation voltageu i V Rated operational voltage V AC AC DC Rated short circuit making capacity, ka peak Rated short time withstand current, ka Rated impulse withstand voltage U imp kv Performance Utilization category AC IEC DC Upstream Weight ( marked standard type) kg Connections and Mountings Front-connected (FC) Terminal screws With extension bars Rear-connected (RC) Bolt studs Flat bar studs Plug-in (PM) For switchboards Standard (PMC) High-performance (PMB) For distribution boards (PMC) Flush-mounted (FP) With flat bar studs Draw-out type (DR) TemPlug (PG) TemPlug5B (PG) DIN rail mount Clip-in chassis mount Accessories (optional) Symbol Motor operator External operating Breaker-mounted handle Door-mounted (variable depth) Toggle extension Mechanical interlock9 Slide type Toggle holder Toggle lock Terminal cover For front-connected For rear-connected and plug-in Interpole barrier Terminal block for lead Door flange Standard specifications Trip button (color) Handle position indication (ON: Red, OFF: Green) Suitability for isolation Externally mounted S0-NN sec AC-3A DC-A S0-NE 1. e (Red) Notes: : Standard. This configuration used unless otherwise specified. : Optional standard. Specify when ordering. : Semi-standard. : yes or available. : no or not available. 3 : Line side interpole barriers are supplied as standard. (Front connection only) 9 : The mechanical interlock is not applicable to the draw-out type : One is supplied with every five breakers. Please specify if more are : Required for overcurrent protection. Combinations of Internally Mounted Accessories Poles Auxiliary switch Alarm switch Shunt trip Under voltage trip Toggle Left pole Right pole 7-

227 : Arrangement Standard Line : Handle Frame Centre Line : Handle Centre Line Outline dimensions (mm) S0-NN Front-connected Interpole barrier (removable) ø Mounting hole 0 Toggle extension (removable) 1 31 Drilling plan (front view) Trip button (red) ø M Conductor overlap, max Rear-connected Toggle extension (removable) Mounting plate M Insulating plate ø9 Panel cutout (front view) ø Soft plastic tubing ø to be provided on center pole and neutral pole of vertical terminal type for insulation Conductor overlap, max ø for accessory wiring when necessary 9 Note: Studs are factory installed in horizontal direction both on the line and load sides. Panel cutout dimensions shown give an allowance of 1.5mm around the handle escutcheon. Plug-in (Standard) Toggle extension (removable) Mounting angle Mounting base (rear view) Auxiliary circuit terminals M10 Mounting screw ø13 Conductor overlap, max ø Flush-mounted 1 M Trip button (red) Mounting plate (Max.t) Toggle extension (removable) Note: Studs are factory installed in horizontal direction both on the line and load sides. 1 0 Insulating plate 13 ø13 Max Conductor overlap, max Soft plastic tubing ø to be provided on center pole and neutral pole of vertical terminal type for insulation ø Characteristics and Outline Dimensions

7 100A Ratings and Specifications Characteristics and Outline Dimensions Molded Case Circuit Breakers S100-NN Frame Type Number of poles Ratings Rated current, A Rated insulation voltageu i V Rated

228 7 100A Ratings and Specifications Characteristics and Outline Dimensions Molded Case Circuit Breakers S100-NN Frame Type Number of poles Ratings Rated current, A Rated insulation voltageu i V Rated operational voltage V AC AC DC Rated short circuit making capacity, ka peak Rated short time withstand current, ka Rated impulse withstand voltage U imp kv Performance Utilization category AC IEC DC Upstream Weight ( marked standard type) kg Connections and Mountings Front-connected (FC) Terminal screws With extension bars Rear-connected (RC) Bolt studs Flat bar studs Plug-in (PM) For switchboards Standard (PMC) High-performance (PMB) For distribution boards (PMC) Flush-mounted (FP) With flat bar studs Draw-out type (DR) TemPlug (PG) TemPlug5B (PG) DIN rail mount Clip-in chassis mount Accessories (optional) Symbol Motor operator External operating Breaker-mounted handle Door-mounted (variable depth) Toggle extension Mechanical interlock9 Slide type Toggle holder Toggle lock Terminal cover For front-connected For rear-connected and plug-in Interpole barrier Terminal block for lead Door flange Standard specifications Trip button (color) Handle position indication (ON: Red, OFF: Green) Suitability for isolation Externally mounted S100-NN sec AC-3A DC-A S100-NE.9 e (Red) Notes: : Standard. This configuration used unless otherwise specified. : Optional standard. Specify when ordering. : yes or available. : no or not available. 3 : Line side interpole barriers are supplied as standard. (Front connection only) 9 : The mechanical interlock is not applicable to the draw-out type : One is supplied with every five breakers. Please specify if more are : Required for overcurrent protection. Combinations of Internally Mounted Accessories Poles Auxiliary switch Alarm switch Shunt trip Under voltage trip Toggle Left pole Right pole 7-7

229 : Arrangement Standard Line : Handle Frame Centre Line : Handle Centre Line Outline dimensions (mm) S100-NN Front-connected Interpole barrier (removable) ø Mounting hole Toggle extension (removable) 0 11 Insulating plate (max) Mounting angle Trip button (red) M 139(min.) 3 ø Conductor overlap, max Rear-connected Panel cutout (front view) Toggle extension (removable) Mounting angle M LH ø1 5 1 R Conductor overlap, max Insulation tube ON side Center pole and Neutral pole ( OFF side All poles ) ø9 139(min) 1 9 Panel cutout dimensions shown give an allowance of 1.5mm around the handle escutcheon. Draw-out Auxiliary circuit terminals (Automatic connection) Auxiliary circuit terminals (self-engaging) Trip button (red) Breaker fixing screw 1 7 0(max.) ø1 Mounting hole Auxiliary circuit terminals (self-engaging) (max.) Auxiliary circuit terminals (self-engaging) Draw-out handle (removable) Toggle extension (removable) (draw-out) 35(disconnected) 95(test) 5(connected) (connected) 5(draw-out) ø Max Conductor overlap, max ø1 Mounting hole Max.5 10 Conductor overlap, max ø1 Mounting hole 1 1 -ø1 0 Mounting angle L Flush-mounted Trip button (red) M Mounting plate (Max.t) Toggle extension (removable) 1 0 Left and right poles 10 Center pole, Neutral pole 55 ø ø9 10 Characteristics and Outline Dimensions 7-73

230 Type Number of poles Ratings Rated current, A Calibrated at 5 C 7 0AA Ratings and Specifications TL-0NE (Adjustable) TL-NE Characteristics and Outline Dimensions (Adjustable) Molded Case Circuit Breakers TL-0NE, TL-NE Time/Current characteristic curves hour minute Electronic Frame Curves Based on standard settings Rated insulation voltageu i V AC Rated impulse withstand voltage U imp kv Rated breaking capacity, ka NK AC V I cu /I cs (sym) V 0V DC V IEC097- AC V I cu /I cs (sym) 0V 0V V V 0V DC V V Rated short time withstand current, ka Weight ( marked standard type) kg Connections and Mountings Front-connected (FC) Terminal screws With extension bars Rear-connected (RC) Bolt studs Flat bar studs Plug-in (PM) For switchboards Standard (PMC) High-performance (PMB) For distribution boards (PMC) Flush-mounted (FP) With flat bar studs Draw-out type (DR) TemPlug (PG) TemPlug5B (PG) DIN rail mount Clip-in chassis mount Accessories (optional) Symbol Motor operator External operating Breaker-mounted handle Door-mounted (variable depth) Toggle extension Mechanical interlock Slide type Toggle holder Toggle lock Terminal cover For front-connected For rear-connected and plug-in Interpole barrier Terminal block for lead Door flange Standard specifications Overcurrent trip mechanism Trip button (color) Handle position indication (ON: Red, OFF: Green) Suitability for isolation CE marking Externally mounted /@3 5/3 75/57 /5 /5 /5 0/ sec.0 e Electronic (Brown) Non Non 5/3 75/57 /5 /5 /5 0/ sec.0 e Electronic (Brown) Non Non Notes: : Standard. This configuration used unless otherwise specified. : Optional standard. Specify when ordering. : Semi-standard. : yes or available. : no or not available. 3 : Line side interpole barriers are supplied as standard. (Front connection only) 9 : The mechanical interlock is not applicable to the draw-out type (DR).! : Optional pretrip alarm or ground fault trip function available on : at 0V : One is supplied with every five breakers. Please specify if more are required. ^ : Ground fault trip can not be equipped with Pre-trip alarm. Tripping Time second TL-NE 00A[I 1]Setting A[I 1]Setting TL-0NE 0A[I 1]Setting 0A[I 1]Setting [I CT ] Percent rated current of base current[i 1 ] Overcurrent tripping characteristics Type CT rated current (A) (I CT ) Long time-delay pick-up current (A) (I 1 ) Long time-delay time settings (S) (T 1 ) Short time-delay pick-up current (A) (I ) Short time-delay time settings (S) (T ) Instantaneous trip pick-up current (A) (I 3 ) Pre-trip alarm pick-up current (A) (I P ) (optional) Pre-trip alarm time setting (S) (T P ) (optional) Ground fault trip pick-up current (A) (I G ) (optional) ^ Ground fault trip-time setting (S) (T G ) (optional) ^ TL-0NE TL-NE 0 0 0, 00, 0, 00, 0, 00, 0, 00, 0, 0 ( ) at (I 1 ) x 00% current Setting tolerance ±0% (I 1 ) x 00, 00, 00, 00, 0% Setting tolerance ± % Opening time (0.1, 0., 0., 0.5, 0.3) in the definite time-delay. Total clearing time is +ms and resettable time 0ms for the time-delay settings Continuously adjustable from (I CT ) x 0 ~ %. Setting tolerance ±0% (I 1 ) x, 0,, % Setting tolerance ±10% 0 fixed definite time-delay. Setting tolerance ±10% Continuously adjustable from (I CT ) x 10 ~ 0% Setting tolerance ±% Opening time (0.1, 0., 0.3, 0., 0.) in the definite time- delay. Total clearing time is +ms and resettable time 0ms for the time-delay settings NOTE: The underlined values will be applied as standard ratings unless otherwise specified when ordering Combinations of Internally Mounted Accessories Poles Auxiliary switch Alarm switch Shunt trip Under voltage trip Toggle Left pole Right pole NOTE: The UV Controller is installed externally when provided with AC UV. 7-7

231 : Arrangement Standard Line : Handle Frame Centre Line : Handle Centre Line Outline dimensions (mm) TL-0NE, TL-NE Front-connected ø13 13 Mounting hole 33 3 Conductor overlap, max Toggle extension (removable) 1 31 N ø9 M Rear-connected 1 M Conductor overlap, max ø9 Panel cutout (front view) Mounting plate LC M10 Auxiliary circuit terminals LH LC 35 3 ø13 LC C 75 L Conductor overlap, max Soft plastic tubing ø to be provided on center pole and neutral pole of vertical terminal type for insulation. Note: Studs are factory installed in horizontal direction both on the line and load sides. Plug-in Flush-mounted Conductor overlap, max Mounting plate (t=max.) M Note: Studs are factory installed in horizontal direction both on the line and load sides Mounting angle 1 ø13 19 Insulating plate (Factory fitted) ø Panel cutout dimensions shown give an allowance of 1.5mm ø for accessory wiring when necessary around the handle escutcheon. Mounting base (rear view) ø13 Soft plastic tubing to be provided on center pole and neutral pole of vertical terminal type for insulation Mounting angle LC R LC 9 3 ø9 5 5 ø Characteristics and Outline Dimensions

Type Number of poles Ratings Rated current, A Calibrated at 5 C 7 000A Ratings and Specifications XS000NE (Adjustable) 0 100 100 000 Characteristics and Outline Dimensions Molded Case Circuit

232 Type Number of poles Ratings Rated current, A Calibrated at 5 C 7 000A Ratings and Specifications XS000NE (Adjustable) Characteristics and Outline Dimensions Molded Case Circuit Breakers XS000NE Time/Current characteristic curves hour minute Electronic Frame Curves Based on standard settings Rated insulation voltageu i V AC Rated impulse withstand voltage U imp kv Rated breaking capacity, ka NK AC V I cu /I cs (sym) V 0V DC V IEC097- AC V I cu /I cs (sym) 0V 0V V V 0V DC V V Rated short time withstand current, ka Weight ( marked standard type) kg Connections and Mountings Front-connected (FC) Terminal screws With extension bars Rear-connected (RC) Bolt studs Flat bar studs Plug-in (PM) For switchboards Standard (PMC) High-performance (PMB) For distribution boards (PMC) Flush-mounted (FP) With flat bar studs Draw-out type (DR) TemPlug (PG) TemPlug5B (PG) DIN rail mount Clip-in chassis mount Accessories (optional) Symbol Motor operator External operating Breaker-mounted handle Door-mounted (variable depth) Toggle extension Mechanical interlock Slide type Toggle holder Toggle lock Terminal cover For front-connected For rear-connected and plug-in Interpole barrier Terminal block for lead Door flange Standard specifications Overcurrent trip mechanism Trip button (color) Handle position indication (ON: Red, OFF: Green) Suitability for isolation CE marking Externally mounted 5/!3 5/ 5/ 5/5 5/5 /75 /9 0.3sec Electronic (Red) Non Non Notes: : Standard. This configuration used unless otherwise specified. : Optional standard. Specify when ordering. : yes or available. : no or not available. : Supplied as standard. 9 : The mechanical interlock is not applicable to the draw-out type (DR).!3 : at 0V AC.! : Optional pretrip alarm or ground fault trip function available on request. ^ : Ground fault trip can not be equipped with Pre-trip alarm. Tripping Time second [I CT ] Percent rated current of base current[i 1 ] Overcurrent tripping characteristics CT rated current (A) (I CT ) Long time-delay pick-up current (A) (I 1 ) Long time-delay time settings (S) (T 1 ) Short time-delay pick-up current (A) (I ) Short time-delay time settings (S) (T ) Instantaneous trip pick-up current (A) (I 3 ) Pre-trip alarm pick-up current (A) (I P ) (optional) Pre-trip alarm time setting (S) (T P ) (optional) Ground fault trip pick-up current (A) (I G ) (optional) ^ Ground fault trip-time setting (S) (T G ) (optional) ^ ,, 100, 100,, A[I 1]Setting 0A[I 1]Setting ( ) at (I 1 ) x 00% current Setting tolerance ±0% (I 1 ) x 00, 00, 00, 00, 0% Setting tolerance ± % Opening time (0.1, 0., 0., 0.5, 0.3) in the definite time-delay. Total clearing time is +ms and resettable time 0ms for the time-delay settings Continuously adjustable from (I CT ) x 0 ~ %. Setting tolerance ±0% (I 1 ) x, 0,, % Setting tolerance ±10% 0 fixed definite time-delay. Setting tolerance ±10% Continuously adjustable from (I CT ) x 10 ~ 0% Setting tolerance ±% Opening time (0.1, 0., 0.3, 0., 0.) in the definite time- delay. Total clearing time is +ms and resettable time 0ms for the time-delay settings NOTE: The underlined values will be applied as standard ratings unless otherwise specified when ordering Combinations of Internally Mounted Accessories Poles Auxiliary switch Alarm switch Shunt trip Under voltage trip Toggle Left pole Right pole NOTE: The UV Controller is installed externally when provided with AC UV. 7-7

233 : Arrangement Standard Line : Handle Frame Centre Line : Handle Centre Line Outline dimensions (mm) XS000NE Front-connected Mounting hole 5 ø11 LH 1. Mounting angle LH N Toggle extension (removable) M Conductor overlap, max Use non-magnetic angle (SUS etc.) Rear-connected Toggle extension (removable) Draw-out Auxiliary circuit terminals (Automatic connection) Mounting hole LH (max.) LC M10 Mounting angle ø11 0 Conductor overlap, max 1 Draw-out handle (removable) LH Use non-magnetic angle (SUS etc.) Toggle extension (removable) 51(max.) Contact TERASAKI if manual connection is required. Flush-mounted LH 0 51(draw-out) 371(disconnected) 31(test) 311(connected) ø1 Mounting hole ø1 LH Panel cutout (front view) LH LC Panel M10 LH LC 5.5 LH ø Mounting angle 19 3 ø11 LH Conductor overlap, max ø1 Use non-magnetic angle (SUS etc.) LH R () 79() 30() ø1 LH () () 5() Mounting angle LC 1 Panel cutout dimensions shown give an allowance of mm around the handle escutcheon. Panel cutout (front view) 3 59 LC Characteristics and Outline Dimensions 7-77

7Characteristics and Outline Dimensions Molded Case Circuit Breakers XS000NN Ratings and Specifications 000A Frame Type Number of poles Ratings Rated current, A Rated insulation voltageu i V Rated

234 7Characteristics and Outline Dimensions Molded Case Circuit Breakers XS000NN Ratings and Specifications 000A Frame Type Number of poles Ratings Rated current, A Rated insulation voltageu i V Rated operational voltage V AC AC DC Rated short circuit making capacity, ka peak Rated short time withstand current, ka Rated impulse withstand voltage U imp kv Performance Max switching current A AC IEC 097- Ann.L CBI-Y DC Endurance Number of operating cycles with current Number of operating cycles without current Upstream breaker Weight ( marked standard type) kg Connections and Mountings Front-connected (FC) Terminal screws With extension bars Rear-connected (RC) Bolt studs Flat bar studs Plug-in (PM) For switchboards Standard (PMC) High-performance (PMB) For distribution boards (PMC) Flush-mounted (FP) With bolt studs Draw-out type (DR) TemPlug (PG) TemPlug5B (PG) DIN rail mount Clip-in chassis mount Accessories (optional) Symbol Motor operator External operating Breaker-mounted handle Door-mounted (variable depth) Toggle extension Mechanical interlock9 Slide type Toggle holder Toggle lock Terminal cover For front-connected For rear-connected and plug-in Interpole barrier Terminal block for lead Door flange Standard specifications Trip button (color) Handle position indication (ON: Red, OFF: Green) Suitability for isolation CE marking Externally mounted XS000NN sec XS000NE 51.. ^3 (Red) Non Non Notes: : Standard. This configuration used unless otherwise specified. : Optional standard. Specify when ordering. : yes or available. : no or not available. : Supplied as standard. 9 : The mechanical interlock is not applicable to the draw-out type : Required for overcurrent protection. ^3 : Fixed depth, not adjustable. Combinations of Internally Mounted Accessories Poles Auxiliary switch Alarm switch Shunt trip Under voltage trip Toggle Left pole Right pole NOTE: The UV Controller is installed externally when provided with AC UV. 7-7

235 : Arrangement Standard Line : Handle Frame Centre Line : Handle Centre Line Outline dimensions (mm) XS000NN Front-connected Mounting hole 5 ø11 LH 1. Mounting angle LH N Toggle extension (removable) M ø Conductor 9 overlap, max Use non-magnetic angle (SUS etc.) Rear-connected Toggle extension (removable) Draw-out Auxiliary circuit terminals (Automatic connection) Mounting hole LH (max.) M10 Mounting angle Contact TERASAKI if manual connection is required. Flush-mounted LH LC (max.) ø Conductor overlap, max Use non-magnetic angle (SUS etc.) Toggle extension (removable) Draw-out handle (removable) LH LH LC LH 51(draw-out) 371(disconnected) 31(test) 311(connected) Panel ø1 Mounting hole ø1 LH Panel cutout (front view) LH LC ø M10 Mounting angle 19 3 ø11 LH Conductor overlap, max LH ø1 Use non-magnetic angle (SUS etc.) R () 79() 30() ø1 LH () () 5() Mounting angle LC 1 Panel cutout dimensions shown give an allowance of mm around the handle escutcheon. Panel cutout (front view) 3 59 LC Characteristics and Outline Dimensions 7-79

Type Number of poles Ratings Rated current, A Calibrated at 5 C Rated voltage V AC DC Rated breaking capacity, ka NK AC sym DC Weight kg Connecting scheme Front-connected both on the line and load

236 Type Number of poles Ratings Rated current, A Calibrated at 5 C Rated voltage V AC DC Rated breaking capacity, ka NK AC sym DC Weight kg Connecting scheme Front-connected both on the line and load sides Plug-in on the line side and front-connected on the load side Plug-in both on the line and load sides Mounting scheme (optional) Clip-in chassis Mounting base for single-row installation Mounting base for branched-into-dual-rows installation Accessories (optional) Symbol Toggle holder Toggle lock Toggle cap Interpole barrier Standard specifications Overcurrent trip mechanism Trip button (color) Handle position indication (ON: Red, OFF: Green) Suitability for isolation CE marking Notes: : yes or available. : no or not available. $ :.5kA for 10A. 7 A Ratings and Specifications TB-5S $ Thermal-magnetic Non Non Non Non Characteristics and Outline Dimensions Molded Case Circuit Breakers TB-5S Frame Time/Current characteristic curves Tripping Time second minute hour Min. 0 Max Percent Rated Current 00 Ambient Compensating Curves Percent current rating Calibrated at 5 C 1 A 10A 0A 10 Calibrated 0A 0A temperature A Ambient temperature ( C)

237 : Arrangement Standard Line : Handle Frame Centre Line : Handle Centre Line Outline dimensions (mm) TB-5S 1 P P 3 P P M5 0. screw N (1P) Preparation of conductor Clip A M ø (max.) (max.) (t: mm max.) Clip and Clip-in chassis Clip A Clip-in Chassis, part number TDB-SG (1-pieces snap-off chassis) Snap-off notch 5.5 M (not supplied) M (not supplied) =0 Spring Clip.5 " NOTE: Clips A are supplied with breakers, pieces/pole. NOTE: 1. Clip-in chassis is notched between every. Screw clip-in chassis down at or 5 For multi-pole installation, clip-to-clip distance is 5 mm. two pieces to adjust number of pieces to number of breaker poles. (Bend once or twice to snap off.) pole intervals. 7 Characteristics and Outline Dimensions 7-1

238 Type Number of poles Ratings Rated current, A Calibrated at 5 C Rated voltage V AC DC Rated breaking capacity, ka NK AC sym DC Weight kg Connecting scheme Front-connected both on the line and load sides Plug-in on the line side and front-connected on the load side Plug-in both on the line and load sides Mounting scheme (optional) Clip-in chassis Mounting base for single-row installation Mounting base for branched-into-dual-rows installation Accessories (optional) Symbol Toggle holder Toggle lock Toggle cap Interpole barrier Standard specifications Overcurrent trip mechanism Trip button (color) Handle position indication (ON: Red, OFF: Green) Suitability for isolation CE marking 7 A Ratings and Specifications TB-5P $ $7 $7 Thermal-magnetic Non Non Non Non Notes: : yes or available. : no or not available. $ :.5kA for 10A. $7 : Specify the branch bars when ordering. See page 7-, 7 for details. Characteristics and Outline Dimensions Molded Case Circuit Breakers TB-5P Frame Time/Current characteristic curves Tripping Time second minute hour Min Max Percent Rated Current 00 Ambient Compensating Curves Percent current rating Calibrated at 5 C 1 10 A 110 A A 0A 0A 10A Calibrated temperature Ambient temperature ( C)

239 : Arrangement Standard Line : Handle Frame Centre Line : Handle Centre Line Outline dimensions (mm) TB-5P 1P 1 P Line end plug-in terminal Preparation of conductor 13(max.) (max.) 5 5 M. screw Load end terminal (1P) 79(P) 3 5 ø (t: mm max.) Single mounting base-tdb-pc Example 1 Example ø10.5 for Branching bar mtg. ø.5 Mounting hole Clip D Type BH-SC Line blade terminal (separately sold) Pressure plate-sc t:1 Load end terminal M. screw Clip D (1P) Applied branching bars type 1RT-LC (separately sold) type 1S-LC t:1 Bus bar (3 max.) (not supplied) Pressure plate-sc Mounting plate (not supplied) Clip D Mounting plate (not supplied) Double mounting base-tda-pc ø10.5 for Branching bar mtg. ø.5 Mounting hole Clip D Pressure plate-dc t: Load end terminal M. screw 19 17(1P) Clip D Mounting plate (not supplied) Bus bar (3 max.) (not supplied) M. tapped hole for Branching bar connecting, type 1S-LC type S-LC M. tapped hole for Branching bar connecting, type 1RT-L C type RT-L C type 1T-L C Drilling plan M0.7 tapped mtg. hole (Min. mounting pitch) 7 Characteristics and Outline Dimensions 7-3

240 Type Number of poles Ratings Rated current, A Calibrated at 5 C Rated voltage V AC DC Rated breaking capacity, ka NK AC sym DC Weight kg Connecting scheme Front-connected both on the line and load sides Plug-in on the line side and front-connected on the load side Plug-in both on the line and load sides Mounting scheme (optional) Clip-in chassis Mounting base for single-row installation Mounting base for branched-into-dual-rows installation Accessories (optional) Symbol Toggle holder Toggle lock Toggle cap Interpole barrier Standard specifications Overcurrent trip mechanism Trip button (color) Handle position indication (ON: Red, OFF: Green) Suitability for isolation CE marking 7 A Ratings and Specifications TB-5D $ 5 0. $7 $7 Thermal-magnetic Non Non Non Non Notes: : yes or available. : no or not available. $ :.5kA for 10A. $7 : Specify the branch bars when ordering. See page 7-, 7 for details. Characteristics and Outline Dimensions Molded Case Circuit Breakers TB-5D Frame Time/Current characteristic curves Tripping Time second minute hour Min Max Percent Rated Current 00 Ambient Compensating Curves Percent current rating Calibrated at 5 C A A A A 0A 10A Calibrated temperature Ambient temperature ( C)

241 : Arrangement Standard Line : Handle Frame Centre Line : Handle Centre Line Outline dimensions (mm) TB-5D Line end plug-in terminal Load end plug-in terminal Single mounting base-tdb-dc Example 1 Example ø10.5 for Branching bar mtg. ø.5 Mounting hole Type BH-SC Line blade terminal (separately sold) Pressure plate-sc t:1 5 M. screw Load end terminal Applied branching bars type 1RT-LC (separately sold) type 1S-LC 5 Pressure plate-sc t:1 Mounting plate (not supplied) M.screw Load end terminal 1 5 Bus bar (3 max.) (not supplied) 7 Mounting plate (not supplied) Double mounting base-tda-dc ø10.5 for Branching bar mtg. ø.5 Mounting hole M. screw Load end terminal Pressure plate-dc t:1 M. screw Load end terminal Mounting plate (not supplied) Bus bar (3 max.) (not supplied) M. tapped hole for Branching bar connecting, type 1S-LC type S-LC M. tapped hole for Branching bar connecting, type 1RT-LC type RT-LC type 1T-LC Drilling plan 5 M0.7 tapped mtg. hole (Min. mounting pitch) Characteristics and Outline Dimensions

242 Characteristics and Outline Dimensions Molded Case Circuit Breakers TB-5P, TB-5D 7Mounting bases, branching bars and other accessories Mounting bases for dual-row installation (for four circuits) Type Applicable breaker Outline Clip D TDA-PC TB-5P (Outer busbar) (Inner busbar) (Outer busbar) Load terminal TDA-DC TB-5D (Outer busbar) (Inner busbar) (Outer busbar) Mounting bases for single-row installation (for two circuits) Type Applicable breaker Outline Clip D TDB-PC TB-5P (Inner busbar) (Outer busbar) (Inner busbar) TDB-DC TB-5D (Inner busbar) (Outer busbar) Accessories Name Outline M.5R Retainer plate DC t=1mm Retainer plate DC M.5R Retainer plate DC t=1mm Retainer plate SC M.0R (Not supplied) Braided line terminal BH-SC Square nut 7-

243 TB-5P, TB-5D Branching bars Application Type Arrangement M5 0. R (Not supplied) Two branches from outer busbar RT-LC (Outer busbar) (Inner busbar) (Outer busbar) (Outer) (Inner) (Outer) M5 0. 0R (Not supplied) Two branches from inner busbar S-LC Connecting stud (B pipe) (Outer busbar) (Inner busbar) (Outer busbar) (Outer) (Inner) (Outer) Connecting stud (B pipe) M5 0. 0R (Not supplied) One branch from inner busbar 1S-LC (Outer busbar) (Inner busbar) (Outer busbar) (Outer) (Inner) (Outer) M5 0. R (Not supplied) One branch from outer busbar 1RT-LC (Outer busbar) (Inner busbar) (Outer busbar) 7 One branch from outer busbar in opposite direction 1T-LC (Outer busbar) (Inner busbar) (Outer busbar) (Outer) (Inner) (Outer) M5 0. R (Not supplied) (Outer) (Inner) (Outer) Characteristics and Outline Dimensions 7-7

244 Characteristics and Outline Dimensions 7Motor operators Outline dimensions (mm) (Type TMC1) S-GF, S-NF, S-GF, S-NM, S-NN, S-NF, S-GF, S-NN Front-connected Preparation of conductor Interpole barrier (removable) H L H L Mounting hole Operating knob Front Panel t M screw ø9 17(max.) max.t5.5(max.) Connector plug (max.) M 0.7 M 0.7 Tapped hole Rear-connected Operating knob 5 1 Front Panel t Mounting plate (max. t3.) 5 Conductor overlap, max Panel cutout (front view) R1 5 Pad lock Connector plug (max.) ø Stud can be turned 5 or M ø1 M 0.7 Tapped hole 5 Panel cutout dimensions shown give an allowance of 1.5mm around motor operator. Plug-in (Standard) Front Panel Operating knob t Detail of connecting part 3 3 M Nut Conductor Mounting base (rear view) Drilling plan (front view) Panel hinge position (hatching area) (bottom view) 5 1 Pad lock Connector plug (max.) ø.5 M5 0. Preparation of conductor 10(max.) LH Operating knob (max.) M 13 ø Mounting plate ±1 Plug-in (High-performance) 75 Front Panel t Detail of connecting part M Nut Conductor Preparation of conductor ø.5 (max.) 10(max.) Mounting base (rear view) ø Connector plug (max.) 7 M M 35 Mounting plate.5 7-

245 : Arrangement Standard Line : Handle Frame Centre Line : Handle Centre Line Outline dimensions (mm) (Type TMC5) S5-NF, S5-GF, S5-NM, S-NF, S-GF Front-connected Interpole barrier (removable) Mounting hole Operating knob Front Panel t M screw Preparation of conductor ø9 10(max.) 5(max.) max.t7 Mounting hole With extension bars (optional) ø11 Conductor overlap, max Operating knob M 0.7 Connector plug (max.) ø Connector plug M 0.7 Tapped hole Rear-connected Panel cutout (front view) Operating knob 5 1 Front Panel t Mounting plate (max. t3.) 1 Conductor overlap, max ø 1 1 R1 5 Pad lock Connector plug (max.) ø Stud can be turned 5 or M M 0.7 Tapped hole 5 Panel cutout dimensions shown give an allowance of 1.5mm around motor operator. Plug-in (Standard) 5 Front Panel Operating knob Mounting plate t 10 Detail of connecting part (max.) Conductor width, max.5 M Nut Mounting base (rear view) Drilling plan (front view) ø Panel hinge position (hatching area) (bottom view) 17.5 ±1 Pad lock Connector plug (max.) 75 Front Panel t 9 5 (17.5) (max.) Plug-in (High-performance) Operating knob Connector plug Auxiliary circuit terminals M M5 0. Detail of connecting part 7.5 (max.) ø9 Conductor width, max. M screw Preparation of conductor (max.).5(max.) 1 M 35 Mounting base (rear view) Mounting plate 75 1 M LC ø Mounting plate 7 Characteristics and Outline Dimensions 7-9

246 Characteristics and Outline Dimensions 7Motor operators Outline dimensions (mm) (Type TMC5) E-SF, S-SF, S-SN Front-connected Interpole barrier (removable) Mounting hole Operating knob 7 Front Panel t M screw Preparation of conductor ø9 11(max.) 5(max.) max.t7 Mounting hole With extension bars (optional) Conductor overlap, max ø11 Operating knob Connector plug (max.) M 0.7 M ø Connector plug 35 For the extension bars, straight bars or spread bars can be supplied. 35 M 0.7 Tapped hole Rear-connected Panel cutout (front view) Operating knob 5 1 Pad lock Connector plug Front Panel t (max.) Mounting plate (max. t3.) Conductor overlap, max 5 ø Stud can be turned 5 or M 0.7 ø M 0.7 Tapped hole 5 R1 5 Panel cutout dimensions shown give an allowance of 1.5mm around motor operator. Plug-in (Standard) Front Panel Operating knob t 10 Mounting plate Detail of connecting part (max.) Mounting base (rear view) Drilling plan (front view) Panel hinge position (hatching area) (bottom view) Conductor width, max.5 M Nut ø ±1 Pad lock Connector plug (max.) 57 Auxiliary circuit terminals M M Mounting plate

247 : Arrangement Standard Line : Handle Frame Centre Line : Handle Centre Line Outline dimensions (mm) (Type TMC1, TMC5) H, H, H5, L, L, L5 Front-connected Interpole barrier (removable) Mounting hole Operating knob 19 Front Panel t M screw 59 Preparation of conductor ø9 10(max.) 5(max.) max.t7 Mounting hole M 0.7 With extension bars (optional) Conductor overlap, max ø11 Operating knob Connector plug (max.) ø Connector plug M 0.7 Tapped hole Rear-connected Panel cutout (front view) Operating knob Front Panel t Mounting plate (max. t3.) 1 Conductor overlap, max ø 1 1 R1 5 Pad lock Connector plug (max.) ø Stud can be turned 5 or M M 0.7 Tapped hole 5 Panel cutout dimensions shown give an allowance of 1.5mm around motor operator. Plug-in (Standard) Front Panel t Operating knob 5 1 Connector plug Plug-in (High-performance) Operating knob Connector plug (max.) Front Panel t (max.) Mounting plate Detail of connecting part M5 0. Detail of connecting part M (max.) Conductor width, max.5 M Nut Auxiliary circuit terminals (max.) Conductor width, max. M screw Mounting base (rear view) Preparation of conductor ø9.5(max.) (max.) M Drilling plan (front view) Mounting plate Mounting base (rear view) ø M 13 LC Panel hinge position (hatching area) (bottom view) ø ±1 Mounting plate 7 Characteristics and Outline Dimensions 7-91

248 Characteristics and Outline Dimensions 7Motor operators Outline dimensions (mm) (Type TMC0) S00 Front-connected Preparation of conductor With extension bars (optional) Interpole barrier (removable) Mounting hole 110 ON side: 3 OFF side: 35 Manual operating handle (removable) M10 screw 1 (max.) ø11 5 (max.) max. t10 ø Front Panel t 3 0 ( 1 ) M Pad lock ( 19. ) (.5 ) M Tapped hole Rear-connected Stud can be turned 5 or Mounting plate Manual operating handle (removable) Panel cutout (front view) 10 Connector plug ø13 ø Conductor overlap, max M Tapped hole 1 Note: Studs are factory installed in horizontal direction both on the line and load sides ø Panel cutout dimensions shown give an allowance of 1.5mm around motor operator. Plug-in (Standard) Manual operating handle (removable) Front Panel t 7 10 Detail of connecting part 0 M Conductor width, max.35 M10 Screw Mounting base (rear view) 5 5 Drilling plan (front view) Panel hinge position (hatching area) (bottom view) ± Connector plug Auxiliary circuit terminals 1 5 -ø9 Mounting angle Plug-in (High-performance) Detail of connecting part 0(max.) M10 screw Preparation of conductor Mounting base (rear view) M5 Conductor width, 1 max. ø (max.) 0(max.) ø Mounting plate

249 : Arrangement Standard Line : Handle Frame Centre Line : Handle Centre Line Outline dimensions (mm) (Type TMC0) H00, L00 Front-connected Preparation of conductor With extension bars (optional) Interpole barrier (removable) Mounting hole 110 ON side: 75 OFF side: 7 Manual operating handle (removable) M10 screw 1 (max.) ø11 5 (max.) max. t10 ø Front Panel t 75 0 ( 1 ) M Pad lock ( 19. ) (.5 ) M Tapped hole Rear-connected 10 Stud can be turned 5 or Mounting plate Manual operating handle (removable) Panel cutout (front view) ø Connector plug ø Conductor overlap, max 39 M Tapped hole Note: Studs are factory installed in horizontal direction both on the line and load sides. ø3 10 Panel cutout dimensions shown give an allowance of 1.5mm around motor operator. Plug-in (Standard) Manual operating handle (removable) Front Panel t 7 10 Detail of connecting part 0 M Conductor width, max.35 M10 Screw Mounting base (rear view) 5 5 Drilling plan (front view) 1 Panel hinge position (hatching area) (bottom view) 10 Connector plug Plug-in (High-performance) 1 0(max.) Auxiliary circuit terminals 7 3 Detail of connecting part M5 Conductor width, max. M10 screw ø11 1 (max.) 0(max.) Preparation of conductor 0 -ø9 0 Mounting base (rear view) Mounting angle ø Mounting plate ± 7 Characteristics and Outline Dimensions 7-93

250 Characteristics and Outline Dimensions 7Motor operators Outline dimensions (mm) (Type TMC0) S, S00 Front-connected ø M Interpole barrier (removable) Mounting hole Conductor overlap, max t1 Front Panel Manual operating handle (removable) (1) Pad lock (.5) Connector plug (19.) L1 t L Breaker type t1 t L1 L S-CF, S-NF S-RF, S-GN 3 3 S-NE, S-RE 3 3 S00-CF, S00-NF S00-RF, S00-NN S00-NE, S00-RE M Tapped hole Rear-connected Panel cutout (front view) 1.5 Front Panel Manual operating handle (removable) (1) Pad lock (.5) Connector plug ø for accessory wiring 10 when necessary M (19.) ø Stud can be turned Conductor overlap, max ø M Tapped hole Note: Studs are factory installed in horizontal direction both on the line and load sides Panel cutout dimensions shown give an allowance of 1.5mm around motor operator. Plug-in (Standard) 1.5 Front Panel Connector plug M10 Auxiliary circuit terminals Detail of connecting part Conductor width, max.0 Mounting base (rear view) Drilling plan (front view) ø11 Panel hinge position (hatching area) (bottom view) Plug-in (High-performance) 1.5 Front Panel Manual operating handle (removable) Pad lock 10 (.5) 10. Connector plug 5.1 M Detail of connecting part and Preparation of conductor [max.] 0 [max.].5 LH Mounting base (rear view) (19.) M ø

251 : Arrangement Standard Line : Handle Frame Centre Line : Handle Centre Line Outline dimensions (mm) (Type TMC0) H, H00, L, L00 Front-connected ø13 13 Interpole barrier (removable) 110 Mounting hole (1) Front Panel Manual operating handle (removable) Pad lock M Tapped hole Conductor overlap, max 0 (.5) Connector plug (19.) 10 L M Breaker type H-NE, L-NE H00-NE, L00-NE L Rear-connected Panel cutout (front view) 1.5 Front Panel Manual operating handle (removable) (1) Pad lock (.5) Connector plug (19.) Stud can be turned M Conductor overlap, max 10 1 ø for accessory wiring when necessary ø M Tapped hole Groove for dissipating heat generated by eddy current Note: Studs are factory installed in horizontal direction both on the line and load sides Panel cutout dimensions shown give an allowance of 1.5mm around motor operator Front Panel Plug-in (Standard) Detail of connecting part Conductor width, max.0 Mounting base (rear view) Drilling plan (front view) Panel hinge position (hatching area) (bottom view) M10 M1 screw Mounting angle L Connector plug Front Panel Manual operating handle (removable) (.5) Plug-in (High-performance) Pad lock Connector plug M [max.] 0 [max.] Detail of connecting part and Preparation of conductor LH ø11 (19.) Mounting base (rear view) 1 M ø Characteristics and Outline Dimensions 7-95

252 Characteristics and Outline Dimensions 7Motor operators Outline dimensions (mm) (Type XMD9) TL-0NE, TL-NE Front-connected ø13 Mounting hole Mounting hole ø Pad lock 1 31 Conductor overlap, max Control circuit terminal 1 N (max.) (max.) M ø9 Rear-connected Panel cutout (front view) 1 M R3 11(max.).5 Mounting plate Insulating plate ø13 Soft plastic tubing ø to be provided on center pole and neutral pole of vertical terminal type for insulation. 75 Conductor overlap, max ø9 0 ø for accessory wiring when necessary 1 5 Max Note: Studs are factory installed in horizontal direction both on the line and load sides. Plug-in (Standard) Mounting base (XDM) Auxiliary circuit terminals Mounting angle Mounting angle 11(max.) M10 5 ø Conductor overlap, max ø

253 : Arrangement Standard Line : Handle Frame Centre Line : Handle Centre Line Outline dimensions (mm) (Type TMCX) S0-NE, S0-GE, S0-NN Front-connected ø Pad lock Control circuit terminal Conductor overlap, max 11(max.) (max.) 9 M ø9 Rear-connected Panel cutout (front view) Mounting plate M Insulating plate ø R3 10 ø (max.) Soft plastic tubing ø to be provided on center pole and neutral pole of vertical terminal type for insulation. 0 Conductor overlap, max ø for accessory wiring when necessary 1 Note: Studs are factory installed in horizontal direction both on the line and load sides. Plug-in (Standard) Panel cutout dimensions shown give an allowance of 1.0mm around motor operator. 11(max.) M Auxiliary circuit terminals 5 13 Mounting angle ø Conductor overlap, max Mounting base (rear view) Mounting angle H L 0 ø11 9 Max. Max. 7 Characteristics and Outline Dimensions 7-97

254 Characteristics and Outline Dimensions 7Motor operators Outline dimensions (mm) (Type TMCX) S100-NE, S100-NN Front-connected Control circuit terminal Pad lock (max.) Insulating plate Mounting angle L0 0 5 M ø ø Conductor overlap, max (max.) Rear-connected Panel cutout (front view) 11(max.).5.5 Mounting angle M ø Conductor overlap, max 1.5 Insulation tube ON side Center pole and Neutral pole ( ) OFF side All poles ø9 139(min.) 1 R3 H L Panel cutout dimensions shown give an allowance of 1.0mm around motor operator. Draw-out (max.) -M3.5 Auxiliary circuit terminals (Automatic connection) 0 0 3(max.) Draw-out handle (removable) Breaker fixing screw ø1 Mounting hole 11(max.) (draw-out) 7.5 (disconnected) 17.5 (test) 37.5 (connected) 5 ø1 Mounting hole ø Conductor overlap, max Conductor overlap, max () 11.5 () 1.5 5() 00() () 1() ø1 0 Mounting angle L 1 1 Contact TERASAKI if manual connection is required. 7-9

255 : Arrangement Standard Line : Handle Frame Centre Line : Handle Centre Line Outline dimensions (mm) (Type XMB10) XS000NE, XS000NN Front-connected Mounting hole 5 ø11 0 Manual operating handle (removable). M Conductor overlap, max ø1 Rear-connected M10 7 Mounting angle ø11 0 Conductor overlap, max ø1 Use non-magnetic angle (SUS etc.) Draw-out Auxiliary circuit terminals (Automatic connection) 33 05(max.) 3 Draw-out handle (removable) Contact TERASAKI if manual connection is required. 7 (draw-out) 97 (disconnected) 7 (test) 37 (connected) Manual operating handle (removable) ø1 Mounting hole ø (max.) Conductor overlap, max Mounting angle 1()79() 30() () () 5() ø Characteristics and Outline Dimensions 7-99

256 Characteristics and Outline Dimensions 7Motor operators Outline dimensions (mm) (Type XMB1) E-SF Front-connected Control circuit terminal (Leading horizontal direction) M5 screw Preparation of conductor ø5.5 Drilling plan (front view) (max.) (max.) Earth terminal Mounting hole 17.1 Operating handle 7 M M 0.7 Tapped hole Rear-connected Drilling plan (front view) Control circuit terminal.5 Mounting plate (max.t3.) M screw ø1 M 0.7 Tapped hole ø accessory wiring when necessary Plug-in (For Switch board) Mounting base (rear view) Preparation of conductor Drilling plan (front view) Control circuit terminal Mounting plate 75 ø.5 10(max.) 75 ø (max.) Detail of connecting part M M screw Note: Above outline dimensions are for AC operated Motor operators. For DC Motor, contact us for details. 7-

257 : Arrangement Standard Line : Handle Frame Centre Line : Handle Centre Line Outline dimensions (mm) (Type XMB1) E-SF Front-connected Preparation of conductor Drilling plan (front view) Control circuit terminal (Leading horizontal direction) M5 screw(10 A) M screw(0 A) 3.(10 A) (0 A) ON side ø5.5(10 A) ø9(0 A) (max.) (max.) C.5 OFF side (max.) Earth terminal Mounting hole Operating handle M (max.) 5 -M 0.7 Tapped hole Rear-connected Drilling plan (front view) Control circuit terminal Mounting plate (max.t3.) 110 M screw(10 A) M screw(0 A) 5(10 A) 5.1(0 A) (10 A) 3.1(0 A) (10 A) 7.1(0 A) (10 A) 7.1(0 A) ø M 0.7 Tapped hole ø accessory wiring when necessary Plug-in (For Switch board) Control circuit terminal Mounting plate Mounting base (rear view) 75 Preparation of conductor ø.5 10(max.) Drilling plan (front view) 75 ø Detail of connecting part 3 11 M screw M5 0. Note: Above outline dimensions are for AC operated Motor operators. For DC Motor, contact us for details (max.) Characteristics and Outline Dimensions 7-101

258

259 Handling and maintenance ztransportation and storage - xenvironmental operating conditions - cinstallation and connection - vmaintenance and inspection - -1 Handling and maintenance

260 Handling and maintenance ztransportation and storage xenvironmental operating conditions cinstallation and connection ztransportation and storage Storage Precautions Avoid corrosive gases: Do not leave the breakers in an atmosphere of hydrogen sulfide or ammonia gas. Avoid humidity: Do not leave the breakers in high humidity for a long period. Avoid direct sunlight: Do not expose the breakers to direct sunlight for a long period. Avoid dust: Keep the breakers in the ON position and covered against dust during storage. Storage temperature: 0 to +0 C Transportation Precautions Handle and transport with care: Do not drop the breakers during transportation. Carefully pack the breakers before transportation. Take due measures against moisture and gas absorption of the breakers during long transportation. Hold by the breaker body: Be sure to hold the breaker by its body during handling and transportation. Holding the breaker by a lead wire, terminal cover, stud or flash plate may result in the breaker being dropped, damaged and/or failed. xenvironmental operating conditions Use the breakers in the following environmental conditions: Ambient temperature 5 C to +5 C. The average ambient temperature over a period of hours must not exceed 35 C. Humidity 5 to 5% RH Vibration/Shock No unusual vibration and mechanical shock Altitude,000 m max Atmosphere No excessive water vapor, oil vapor, dust, salt or corrosive substances. No sudden change in temperature. Non-condensing cinstallation and connection Installation Precautions Avoid direct sunlight: Avoid vibration and shock: Avoid dust and chippings: Install the breakers in an area that is not exposed to direct sunlight. Otherwise, the breakers may malfunction due to a temperature rise. Do not block the arc gas exhaust ports: If installing the breakers in an area that is exposed to vibration or shock, use cushions to relieve vibration or shock applied to the breakers. Do not remove the back cover: Take measures so that the breakers are not directly exposed to rainwater, oil, dust or chippings. Pay special attention to electrically conducive particles such as iron chippings that can enter the breakers. House the breakers in enclosures during use. - Do not block the arc gas exhaust ports. Doing so may deteriorate the breaking capacity. Ensure due insulation distance (arc space) between current carrying parts and grounded metal members in the vicinity of the exhaust ports. See page 5-0 for instructions regarding insulation distance. Do not remove the base back cover or thread locking compound.

261 Connection Precautions Tighten to a proper torque: Never lubricate threads: Insulate exposed live parts: Interpole barrier Insulation tube or tape Undertightening terminal screws may result in overheat or malfunction and overtightening in damage to the mold. Tighten the screws to the specified torques. See pages 5-1 to 5-19 for proper tightening torques. Use screwdrivers suited to the size and type of screws. Do not lubricate screw threads. Doing so will decrease the frictional resistance, resulting in looseness and overheat. Electrically and positively insulate bare live parts of front-connected breakers using interpole barriers, terminal covers, insulation tube and/or insulation tape. Do not deform studs: Normal connection of power supply and load is preferable: Power supply (line) Load Tighten the conductor connections of rear-connected or plug-in breakers so that the studs do not suffer deformation due to excessive force. Load Normal connection Power supply (line) Reverse connection It is preferable in principle that the breaker is in normal connection. If reverse connection is necessary, refer to page 5-. Firmly secure pole conductors in parallel with each other: Insulating support Install connecting conductors so that they are in parallel with each other. Firmly secure or tie the conductors by insulating support in case they are acted upon by an electromagnetic force, the strength of which depends on the magnitude of fault current. See the table to the right. Electromagnetic force acted per meter of conductor Conventional rated current ka (Power factor) Electromagnetic force (three-phase short-circuit) N Conductor clearance: 10 cm Conductor clearance: 0 cm 10 (0.) 5 1 (0.3) 10 5 (0.) 35 (0.) 35 (0.) 0 0 (0.) 17 5 (0.) (0.) (0.) 3 (0.) Handling and maintenance -3

262 Handling and maintenance vmaintenance and inspection 1. Initial inspection After installing the breakers, inspect them according to the table shown below before energizing them for the first time. Make sure that the breakers are not energized before starting the inspection. Check item Criterion 1. Packing material debris, iron chippings, electrical wire debris or other Must have been completely removed. electrically conductive foreign matter. Cracks of or damage to the cover and base Must not have occurred. 3. Terminal screws and conductor clamping screws Must have been tightened to the torques specified on pages 5-1 to Insulation resistance Must be 5 megohms or higher when measured with a 0V megger. 5. Rated voltage and circuit voltage Must be identical or within the permitted range. Caution on dielectric withstand test voltage Perform the dielectric withstand test according to the table shown below. Make sure that the test voltage does not exceed the upper limits specified in the table. (Units in voltage) Main circuit Auxiliary or control circuit (Note 1) Rated insulation voltage Test voltage Rated insulation voltage Test voltage (ac rms) of operating circuit (ac rms) Ui0 000 Uis0 0 (Note ) 0Ui 0 0Uis00 Uis+0 Notes: 1. Between terminal group and ground only. Isolate DC V motors from the control circuit. Dielectric withstand voltage: AC 0 V. (00 min). Periodic Inspection Periodic inspection is needed to maintain the optimum performance of the breakers and prevent malfunctions. Perform the first inspection one month after the system is put into commission and subsequently, at periodic intervals depending on the operating conditions. Guidelines for inspection intervals Operating conditions Installation location Examples Guidelines for inspection intervals Where the ambient air is Dustproof and air-conditioned Every or 3 years before 10 years since installation always clean and dry. electrical installation rooms Every year after 10 years since installation Typical Harsh Every months after years since installation Indoors where dust is low Switchboards or enclosures in electrical Every year before 10 years since installation and corrosive gases are not. installation rooms not dustproof nor Every months after 10 years since installation present. air-conditioned Every month after years since installation Where sulfur dioxide, hydrogen Geothermal power plants sewage Every months before 5 years since installation sulfide, chloride and/or high-humidity treatment plants, steelmaking plants, Every month after 5 years since installation gases are present and dust is low. papermaking plants or pulp making plants Where dust and/or corrosive gases Chemical plants, quarries or mines. Every month are severe, making it impossible for people to stay in for a long time. -

263 Check items Make sure that the breakers are not energized before starting the inspection. Check item Criterion Remedy 1. Terminal screws Must not be loosened. If loosened, retighten to the torque specified on pages 5-1 to Terminals and their vicinities Must be free of dust and oil. If not, clean with a cleaner. Wipe with a clean cloth. 3. Cracks of or damage to the cover Must not have occurred. If cracks or damage is found, replace. and base. Operating mechanism Must work smoothly. If not, replace or contact us. 5. Discoloration or overheat signs of Must not be present by visual inspection. If present, replace. terminals and/or base (Discoloration of silver coating to a certain degree proves no problem).. Insulation resistance Must be 5 megohms or higher when If not, replace. measured with a 0V megger. 3. Inspection and action after interruption of fault current When a breaker trips to interrupt a fault current, check the breaker to determine if it can be reused or must be replaced. 1. If arc gas exhaust ports are kept clean and no anomaly is found, the breaker can be reused.. If arc gas exhaust ports are blackened by soot, the breaker may be reused provided that the insulation resistance is 5 MΩ or higher, live parts including terminals are not overheated during energization and no other anomaly is found. If the insulation resistance is lower than 5 megohms, perform the dielectric withstand test of the breaker. If the test shows that the breaker still has the specified dielectric strength, the breaker may be reused provided that live parts including terminals are not overheated. It is strongly recommended, however, that the breaker be reused for a limited duration of time and be replaced with new one as early as possible. The dielectric withstand test is to be done according to the description on page If the handle and arc gas exhaust ports are heavily blackened by soot and molten metal grains are found around the ports, replace the breaker with new one.. Operation durability The operation durability of breakers depends on their frame size. Larger the frame size is, the lower the operation durability is. IEC 097- specifies the operation durability of breakers as shown in the table blow. Breakers are a protection tool and unlike electromagnetic relays, are originally inappropriate for frequent switching operation. Admissible number of operation cycles of molded case circuit breakers Rated current, A (Note 1) I n I n 3 3 I n I n 0 0 I n Number of operation cycles per hour (Note ) Number of operation cycles Not energized Energized (Note 3) Total Notes: 1. Max value applicable to respective frame size. Min value. This may be increased by agreement. If the value is increased, the test report must state so specifically. 3. The breakers must be kept closed at each operation cycle for a duration of time sufficient for the current to be established. The duration, however, does not need to be longer than two seconds. Handling and maintenance -5

264 Handling and maintenance vmaintenance and inspection 5. Troubleshooting guide Take an appropriate action according to the following table when a trouble occurs: Troubles in breakers Category Symptom Possible cause Remedy/Action Overheat of terminals Looseness of terminal screws or conductor clamping screws Retighten. Burnout of terminal Increase in contact resistance of contactors Replace. insulation Contact failure between stud conductor and terminal (due to looseness of screws or foreign matter) Overheat Overheat (exceeding Increase in contact resistance of contactors Replace. C) of breaker molded Looseness of interior parts case Increase in current density due to disconnection of braided wire High-frequency distortion of load current Improve distortion factor. Continuity Abnormal voltage Excessive wear of contactors Replace. failure on load side Foreign matter between contactors Damage to current carrying parts (due to excessively frequent switching or corrosive gases) Closing not allowed Breaker is kept in tripped state, i.e., is not reset. Reset. Resetting not allowed UVT is not excited. Energize. Bimetal is not enough cooled after tripping due to overcurrent. Cool down before resetting. Inoperativeness Bimetal is deformed e.g. by corrosion. Replace. Admissible number of operation cycles is exceeded and service life has expired. (SHT or UVT was frequently used for tripping). Mechanical failure Tripping occurring while Ambient temperature too high (exceeding 0 C) Reduce ambient rated current is still not temperature e.g. through reached ventilation. Overheat due to looseness of terminal screws Retighten. Overheat of interior parts Replace. Vibration and/or shock Use cushions or the like to dampen vibration and shock. Incompatible frequency (for thermal-magnetic breakers with CT) Replace to match frequency. High-frequency distortion of load current Reduce load current or Nuisance change current rating. tripping Conductor size smaller than specified Use larger size conductors or change current rating. Electromagnetic-induced noise (for electronic breakers) Isolate noise source. Excessive surge (for electronic breakers) Isolate surge source. Tripping due to Inrush starting current Change instantaneous trip starting current Switching operation of star-delta starter pickup current or replace Start of inching (resulting in instantaneous tripping) with breaker having larger current rating. Starting current too high (resulting in long-delayed tripping) Replace with breaker Starting time too long (resulting in long-delayed tripping) having larger current rating. Short-circuit in motor Repair or replace motor. Erroneous connection of control circuit for SHT or UVT Check connection. No response No tripping at trip Failure in coordination with an upstream current-limiting fuse or breaker Review coordination. to overcurrent pickup current Ambient temperature too low Check compensation current. Incompatible frequency Match frequency. -

265 Troubles in accessories Category Symptom Possible cause Remedy/Action Failure of motor operator Wiring mistakes in control circuit Check and correct wiring. Continuous on/off operations due to wiring mistakes in control circuit Voltage drop due to insufficient capacity of power supply cable Use larger size cable. Insufficient power supply capacity of control circuit Increase power supply capacity. Closing/opening/resetting not allowed due to improper stroke adjustment Return to Terasaki for of operation mechanism stroke readjustment. Failure of SHT Supply-voltage drop due to insufficient current carrying capacity Increase current carrying of control circuit capacity. Supply-voltage drop due to insufficient current carrying capacity Increase power supply capacity. Failure of Coil burnout due to continuous excitations, improper coil ratings, failure or Return to Terasaki or accessories fusion of anti-burnout contacts, etc. replace. Failure of UVT Remanence Repair or replace. Improper stroke adjustment Failure of auxiliary and/or Fusion or burnout of microswitch contacts due to their improper ratings Return to Terasaki or alarm switches replace. Load to microswitch contacts will be relieved e.g through auxiliary relays. Improper adjustment of microswitches Return to Terasaki for repair. Handling and maintenance -7

266

267 9 Appendix zhandle operation and dimensions9- xmounting positions for trip button9-3 cstandard arrangement for plug-in type auxiliary circuit terminals (for high-performance type)9- vstandard arrangement for plug-in type auxiliary circuit terminals (for standard type) 9-5 binternal resistance and power consumptions of breakers 9- Appendix 9 9-1

268 9 Appendix zhandle operation and dimensions Molded Case Circuit Breakers D G E F G D E F G D E ON OFF Trip Reset C Plus side Minus side F Fig. 1 Fig. Fig. 3 A B Frame (A) Breaker Ref. figure Operation angle Dimensions Operation effort N ON OFF Trip Reset OFF ON Trip Radius of rotation A B C D E F G ON OFF Reset (mm) E-SF,E-CM S-SF S-GF E-SF S-NF,S-GF S-NM,S-NN H-NF,L-NF S-SF,S-SN S-NF,S-GF,S-NN H-NF,L-NF S5-NF,S5-GF,S5-NM S5-GE,H5-NF,L5-NF E-SF,S-SF,S-SN S-NF,S-GF S00-CF,S00-NF S00-NE,S00-NN S00-GF,S00-GE S00-PF,S00-PE H00-NE,L00-NE S-CF,S-NF,S-RF S-NE,S-RE,S-GN H-NE,L-NE S00-CF,S00-NF,S00-RF S00-NE,S00-RE,S00-GN H00-NE,L00-NE TL-0NE TL-NE S0-NE,S0-GE,S0-NN S100-NE,S100-NN XS000NE,XS000NN Unit Operation effort : N 1N1/9.kgf 9-

269 9 Appendix xmounting positions for trip button Trip button Trip button D B B 1 D B D C C C A A Trip button A Fig. 1 Fig. Fig. 3 P P Trip button øc Trip button B E B B B B B A D A øc Trip button A A øc Trip button A øc Trip button Minus side A Plus side Plus side Minus side Fig. Fig. 5 Fig. Fig. 7 : Handle Frame Centre Line : Handle Centre Line : Arrangement Standard Line Frame Breaker Ref. Trip button figure A B C D S-SF S-GF S-NF,S-GF S-NM,S-NN H-NF,L-NF S-SF,S-SN S-NF,S-GF,S-NN H-NF,L-NF S5-NF,S5-GF,S5-NM H5-NF,L5-NF,S5-GE E-SF,S-SF,S-SN S-NF,S-GF S00-CF,S00-NF S00-NE,S00-NN S00-GF,S00-GE S00-PF,S00-PE H00-NE,L00-NE S-CF,S-NF,S-RF S-NE,S-RE,S-GN H-NE,L-NE S00-CF,S00-NF,S00-RF S00-NE,S00-RE,S00-GN H00-NE,L00-NE Frame Breaker Ref. Trip button figure E-SF,E-CM E-SF TL-0NE TL-NE XS000NE,XS000NN Appendix Frame Breaker Ref. Trip button figure A B A B C D E 0 S0-NE,S0-GE,S0-NN S100-NE,S100-NN Notes: 1. 00AF apply Handle Centre Line.. AF and 00AF apply Arrangement Standard Line. 3. trip buttons are equipped

270 9 Appendix cstandard arrangement for plug-in type auxiliary circuit terminals (for high-performance type) Auxiliary circuit terminals are of self-engaging type. Shown in the table below are standard terminal arrangements as seen from the front of the plugin base for high-performance type. ~~~~~~~~~~~ ~~~ Contact us for non-standard arrangements. Terminal screw M3.5 Suitable compression terminal R Breaker S-NF S-GF S-NF S-GF H-NF,L-NF S-GF H-NF,L-NF S-NF,S-GF,S-NN S5-NF,S5-GF,H5-NF S-NF,S-GF L5-NF,S5-GE S-NF,S-GF S00-CF,S00-NF,S00-NE S00-GF,S00-GE,S00-NN S00-PF,S00-PE,H00-NE,L00-NE S-CF,S-NF,S-RF S-NE,S-RE,S-GN S00-CF,S00-NF,S00-RF S00-NE,S00-RE,S00-NN H-NE,LNE,H00-NE,L00NE Number of auxiliary circuit terminals (Max allowable) C1 AXa1 AXa ALa1 C1 AXa1 AXa ALa1 C1 AXa1 AXa AXa3 ALa1 C1 Arrangement 1 AXb1 AXb ALb1 AXb1 AXb ALb1 AXb1 AXb AXb3 ALb1 C AXc1 AXc ALc1 C AXc1 AXc ALc1 C AXc1 AXc AXc3 ALc1 C D1 AXa1 AXa ALa1 D1 AXa1 AXa ALa1 D1 AXa1 AXa AXa3 ALa1 D1 Arrangement AXb1 AXb ALb1 AXb1 AXb ALb1 AXb1 AXb AXb3 ALb1 D AXc1 AXc ALc1 D AXc1 AXc ALc1 D AXc1 AXc AXc3 ALc1 D AXa1 AXa Arrangement 3 AXb1 AXb AXc1 AXc AXa1 ALa1 Arrangement AXb1 ALb1 AXc1 ALc1 9-

271 9Appendix vstandard arrangement for plug-in type auxiliary circuit terminals (for standard type) Five auxiliary circuit terminals (self-engaging) constitute a terminal block. Shown in the table below are standard terminal arrangements as seen from the rear of the plug-in ~~~~~~~~~~~ base for standard type. ~~ Contact us for non-standard arrangements. Breaker S-SF,S-SF S-SF,S-SF S-SN E-SF,S-SF S-SN 3 3 Number of auxiliary circuit terminals (Max allowable) AXc1 AXa1 AXb1 C1 C AXc1 AXa1 AXb1 C1 C Arrangement 1 C1 C ALc1 ALa1 ALb1 C1 C ALc1 ALa1 ALb1 C1 C AXc1 AXa1 AXb1 D1 D AXc1 AXa1 AXb1 D1 D Arrangement D1 D ALc1 ALa1 ALb1 D1 D ALc1 ALa1 ALb1 D1 D AXc1 AXa1 AXb1 Arrangement 3 AXc1 AXa1 AXb1 ALc1 ALa1 AXc1 AXa1 AXb1 ALc1 ALa1 ALc1 ALa1 ALb1 Appendix Arrangement 9 9-5

272 9 Appendix vstandard arrangement for plug-in type auxiliary circuit terminals (for standard type) Five auxiliary circuit terminals (self-engaging) constitute a terminal block. Shown in the table below are standard terminal arrangements as seen from the rear of the plug-in ~~~~~~~~~~~ base for standard type. ~~ Contact us for non-standard arrangements. If the number of auxiliary circuit terminals (self-engaging) is insufficient for E-SF, E-CM and E-SF lead wires are to be used along with the auxiliary circuit terminals. Please state the accessories for which lead wires are used, when ordering. Breaker E-SF E-SF E-SF E-CM E-SF S-GF, S-NF S-GF, S-NN H-NF, L-NF S-NF, S-GF S-NN, H-NF L-NF, S5-NF S5-GF, H5-NF L5-NF, S5-GE S-NF, S-GF S00-CF,S00-NF,S00-GF,S00-NN S00-NE, S00-GE,S00-PF,S00-PE H00-NE,L00-NE Number of auxiliary circuit terminals (Max allowable) AXc1 AXa1 AXb1 AXc1 AXa1 AXb1 U1 U AXc1 AXa1 AXb1 C1 C AXc1 AXa1 AXb1 AXc AXa AXb C1 C Arrangement 1 ALc1 ALa1 ALb1 ALc1 ALa1 ALb1 U1 U ALc1 ALa1 ALb1 C1 C AXc AXa AXb ALc1 ALa1 ALb1 C1 C U1 U AXc1 AXa1 AXb1 P1 P AXc1 AXa1 AXb1 D1 D AXc1 AXa1 AXb1 AXc AXa AXb D1 D Arrangement P1 P ALc1 AXa1 AXb1 P1 P ALc1 ALa1 ALb1 D1 D AXc1 AXa1 AXb1 ALc1 ALa1 ALb1 D1 D AXc1 AXa1 AXb1 S1 S AXc1 AXa1 AXb1 ALc1 ALa1 AXc1 AXa1 AXb1 PALa PALb OP1 OP C1 C Arrangement 3 S1 S ALc1 ALa1 ALb1 S1 S AXc1 AXa1 AXb1 PALa PALb OP1 OP C1 C 9-

273 S-CF,S-NF,S-RF,S-NE S-RE,S-GN,S00-CF,S00-NF S00-RF,S00-NE,S00-RE,S00-NN H-NE, L-NE,H00-NE,L00-NE S0-NE,S0-GE,S0-NN TL-0NE,TL-NE 3 3 AXc1 AXa1 AXb1 ALc1 ALa1 ALb1 OP1 OP D1 D AXc1 AXa1 AXb1 ALc1 ALa1 ALb1 OP1 OP U1 U 1 1 AXc AXa AXb PALc PALa AXc AXa AXb PALc PALa AXc1 AXa1 AXb1 ALc1 ALa1 ALb1 OP1 OP C1 C AXc1 AXa1 AXb1 ALc1 ALa1 ALb1 OP1 OP P1 P 1 1 AXc AXa AXb PALc PALa AXc AXa AXb PALc PALa AXc1 AXa1 AXb1 ALc1 ALa1 ALb1 OP1 OP S1 S AXc AXa AXb PALc PALa 1 Appendix 1If the OCR controller is installed separately, substitute OS1 and OS for OP1 and OP and connect these terminals to the controller terminals having the same numbers. If the UVT controller is installed separately, substitute UC1 and UC for P1 and P and connect these terminals to the controller terminals having the same numbers

274 9 Appendix binternal resistance and power consumptions of breakers Molded Case Circuit Breakers Frame (A) Breaker Rated current, A Internal resistance, M (Note 1) Per pole Frontconnected Plug-in Power consumption, W (Note ) Per pole Frontconnected Plug-in E-SF S-SF S-GF E-SF S-NF,S-GF H-NF,L-NF S-NM S-SF S-NF,S-GF H-NF,L-NF 5 S5-NF,S5-GF S5-GE H5-NF,L5-NF S5-NM E-SF S-SF S-NF,S-GF Frame (A) Breaker 00 S00-CF,S00-NF S00-GF Rated current, A Internal resistance, M (Note 1) Per pole Frontconnected Plug-in Notes: 1. The resistance values shown above are for reference purpose only.. The power consumptions shown above are calculated on the basis of the dc internal resistance. 3. Applicable to draw-out type. Power consumption, W (Note ) Per pole Frontconnected Plug-in S00-PF S00-NE,S00-GE S00-PE H00-NE,L00-NE S-CF,S-NF,S-RF S-NE,S-RE H-NE,L-NE S00-CF,S00-NF,S00-RF S00-NE,S00-RE H00-NE,L00-NE TL-0NE TL-NE S0-NE,S0-GE S100-NE (Note 3) (Note 3) (Note 3) (Note 3) (Note 3) (Note 3) (Note 3) 39 (Note 3) (Note 3) (Note 3) (Note 3) (Note 3) (Note 3) (Note 3) 000 XS000NE (Note 3) 17 (Note 3) (Note 3) (Note 3) (Note 3) (Note 3) (Note 3) (Note 3) (Note 3) (Note 3) (Note 3) 9 (Note 3) 9-

275

TERASAKI SKANDINAVISKA AB (Sweden) TERASAKI

(United Kingdom) TERASAKI SUCURSAL EN ESPAÑA

Global Network TERASAKI ELECTRIC CO., LTD.

BHD. (Malaysia) TERASAKI CIRCUIT BREAKERS (S) PTE.

(Brazil) Since 1971 when we established TERASAKI

the UK, we have assembled a global network of 10

and technical supports to customers worldwide.

to ensure proper installation, connection,

Head Office : 7--10 Hannancho, Abenoku, Osaka,

Hiranoku, Osaka, JAPAN Telephone : 1--791-933 / Fax

276 TERASAKI SKANDINAVISKA AB (Sweden) TERASAKI ELECTRIC (EUROPE) LTD. (United Kingdom) TERASAKI ELECTRIC (EUROPE) LTD. SUCURSAL EN ESPAÑA (Spain) TERASAKI ELECTRIC (EUROPE) LTD. FILIALE ITALIA (Italy) TERASAKI Global Network TERASAKI ELECTRIC CO., LTD. (Head Quarters, Japan) TERASAKI ELECTRIC (M) SDN. BHD. (Malaysia) TERASAKI CIRCUIT BREAKERS (S) PTE. LTD. (Singapore) TERASAKI ELECTRIC CO., (FAR EAST) PTE. LTD. (Singapore) TERASAKI ELECTRIC (SHANGHAI) CO., LTD. (China) TERASAKI ELECTRIC (CHINA) LTD. (China) TERASAKI DO BRASIL LTDA. (Brazil) Since 1971 when we established TERASAKI ELECTRIC Europe, our first overseas subsidiary, in the UK, we have assembled a global network of 10 overseas subsidiaries and 5 agents to provide sales and technical supports to customers worldwide.! Safety Notice Carefully read instruction manual to ensure proper installation, connection, operation, handling and maintenance of the product. Head Office : Hannancho, Abenoku, Osaka, JAPAN Circuit Breaker Division : Kamihigashi, Hiranoku, Osaka, JAPAN Telephone : / Fax : int-sales@terasaki.co.jp NOV. 01 Catalogue No. 13!5E Ratings and specifications are subject to change without notice.

18-I73E CAT REF.

18-I73E CAT REF. & www.terasaki.co.jp 1-I73E CAT REF. TABLE OF CONTENTS General 1-1 Introduction 1- General 1-3 Selection Chart 1- Ratings and Specifications -1 Air Circuit Breakers for DC350V-00V - Moulded Case Circuit